Epson Printer 7600 Users Manual StylusPro7600_9600_A

9600 to the manual 0c571298-6899-4cf2-95ab-2b8a3cf7f957

2015-01-23

: Epson Epson-Epson-Printer-7600-Users-Manual-251537 epson-epson-printer-7600-users-manual-251537 epson pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 322 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600
Color Large Format Inkjet Printer
®
SERVICE MANUAL
SEIJ01017
Notice:
All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.
The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
All effort have been made to ensure the accuracy of the contents of this manual. However, should any errors be detected, SEIKO EPSON would greatly
appreciate being informed of them.
The above not withstanding SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION can assume no responsibility for any errors in this manual or the consequences thereof.
EPSON is a registered trademark of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.
General Notice: Other product names used herein are for identification purpose only and may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective owners. EPSON disclaims any and all rights in those marks.
Copyright © 2002 SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.
Imaging & Information Product Division
TPCS Quality Assurance Department
PRECAUTIONS
Precautionary notations throughout the text are categorized relative to 1)Personal injury and 2) damage to equipment.
DANGER Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in serious or fatal personal injury. Great caution should be exercised in
performing procedures preceded by DANGER Headings.
WARNING Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in damage to equipment.
The precautionary measures itemized below should always be observed when performing repair/maintenance procedures.
DANGER
1. ALWAYS DISCONNECT THE PRODUCT FROM THE POWER SOURCE AND PERIPHERAL DEVICES PERFORMING ANY MAINTENANCE
OR REPAIR PROCEDURES.
2. NO WORK SHOULD BE PERFORMED ON THE UNIT BY PERSONS UNFAMILIAR WITH BASIC SAFETY MEASURES AS DICTATED FOR
ALL ELECTRONICS TECHNICIANS IN THEIR LINE OF WORK.
3. WHEN PERFORMING TESTING AS DICTATED WITHIN THIS MANUAL, DO NOT CONNECT THE UNIT TO A POWER SOURCE UNTIL
INSTRUCTED TO DO SO. WHEN THE POWER SUPPLY CABLE MUST BE CONNECTED, USE EXTREME CAUTION IN WORKING ON
POWER SUPPLY AND OTHER ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS.
WARNING
1. REPAIRS ON EPSON PRODUCT SHOULD BE PERFORMED ONLY BY AN EPSON CERTIFIED REPAIR TECHNICIAN.
2. MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE SOURCE VOLTAGES IS THE SAME AS THE RATED VOLTAGE, LISTED ON THE SERIAL NUMBER/RATING
PLATE. IF THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS A PRIMARY AC RATING DIFFERENT FROM AVAILABLE POWER SOURCE, DO NOT CONNECT IT
TO THE POWER SOURCE.
3. ALWAYS VERIFY THAT THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS BEEN DISCONNECTED FROM THE POWER SOURCE BEFORE REMOVING OR
REPLACING PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS AND/OR INDIVIDUAL CHIPS.
4. IN ORDER TO PROTECT SENSITIVE MICROPROCESSORS AND CIRCUITRY, USE STATIC DISCHARGE EQUIPMENT, SUCH AS ANTI-
STATIC WRIST STRAPS, WHEN ACCESSING INTERNAL COMPONENTS.
5. REPLACE MALFUNCTIONING COMPONENTS ONLY WITH THOSE COMPONENTS BY THE MANUFACTURE; INTRODUCTION OF
SECOND-SOURCE ICs OR OTHER NON-APPROVED COMPONENTS MAY DAMAGE THE PRODUCT AND VOID ANY APPLICABLE EPSON
WARRANTY.
About This Manual
This manual describes basic functions, theory of electrical and mechanical operations, maintenance and repair procedures of the printer. The instructions and procedures included
herein are intended for the experienced repair technicians, and attention should be given to the precautions on the preceding page.
Manual Configuration
This manual consists of six chapters and Appendix.
CHAPTER 1.PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS
Provides a general overview and specifications of the product.
CHAPTER 2.OPERATING PRINCIPLES
Describes the theory of electrical and mechanical operations of
the product.
CHAPTER 3.TROUBLESHOOTING
Describes the step-by-step procedures for the troubleshooting.
CHAPTER 4.DISASSEMBLY / ASSEMBLY
Describes the step-by-step procedures for disassembling and
assembling the product.
CHAPTER 5.ADJUSTMENT
Provides Epson-approved methods for adjustment.
CHAPTER 6.MAINTENANCE
Provides preventive maintenance procedures and the lists of
Epson-approved lubricants and adhesives required for servicing
the product.
APPENDIX Provides the following additional information for reference:
• Connector pin assignments
• Electric circuit boards components layout
• Electrical circuit boards schematics
• Exploded diagram & Parts List
Symbols Used in this Manual
Various symbols are used throughout this manual either to provide additional
information on a specific topic or to warn of possible danger present during a
procedure or an action. Be aware of all symbols when they are used, and
always read NOTE, CAUTION, or WARNING messages.
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or
condition that is necessary to keep the product’s quality.
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice, or
condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in damage to,
or destruction of, equipment.
May indicate an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or
condition that is necessary to accomplish a task efficiently. It may
also provide additional information that is related to a specific
subject, or comment on the results achieved through a previous
action.
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or
condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in injury or loss
of life.
Revision Status
Revision Date of Issue Description
A May 10, 2002 First release
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
6
Contents
Chapter 1 Product Description
1.1 Product Description ............................................................................................ 12
1.1.1 Features ...................................................................................................... 12
1.1.2 Differences between Stylus Pro 7600 and Stylus Pro 9600 ...................... 13
1.2 Basic Specifications ............................................................................................ 14
1.2.1 Print Specifications .................................................................................... 14
1.2.2 Character Specification .............................................................................. 14
1.2.3 Control Code .............................................................................................. 14
1.2.4 Paper Feed ................................................................................................. 14
1.2.5 Paper Specifications ................................................................................... 15
1.2.5.1 Roll Paper ........................................................................................... 15
1.2.5.2 Sheet ................................................................................................... 16
1.2.5.3 Special Paper ...................................................................................... 18
1.2.6 Mechanism Specifications ......................................................................... 21
1.2.6.1 Printable Area ..................................................................................... 21
1.2.6.2 Paper Set Lever .................................................................................. 22
1.2.6.3 Cutting Specification .......................................................................... 22
1.2.6.4 Acoustic Noise ................................................................................... 23
1.2.7 Electrical Specifications (TBD) ................................................................. 23
1.2.8 Reliability .................................................................................................. 23
1.2.8.1 Total Print Volume ............................................................................. 23
1.2.8.2 Print Head Life ................................................................................... 23
1.2.8.3 Maintenance Tank Life ...................................................................... 23
1.2.8.4 Cutter Life average ............................................................................. 23
1.2.8.5 Maintenance Parts (TBD) ................................................................... 23
1.2.9 Ambient Conditions ................................................................................... 24
1.2.9.1 Temperature/Humidity ....................................................................... 24
1.2.9.2 Vibration ............................................................................................. 24
1.2.9.3 Shock .................................................................................................. 24
1.2.9.4 Surrounding Space ............................................................................. 25
1.2.10 Overall Dimensions ................................................................................. 26
1.2.11 Accessories .............................................................................................. 28
1.2.11.1 Accessories and Options for Stylus Pro 7600 .................................. 28
1.2.11.2 Accessories and Options for Stylus Pro 9600 .................................. 29
1.3 External View and Parts Names ......................................................................... 30
1.4 Operating Panel .................................................................................................. 31
1.4.1 Buttons and Functions ............................................................................... 31
1.4.1.1 Functions of Buttons .......................................................................... 31
1.4.1.2 LEDs ................................................................................................... 32
1.4.2 Indications on the Panel ............................................................................. 33
1.4.2.1 lED Indications in Normal Mode ....................................................... 33
1.4.2.2 LCD Indications in Normal Mode ..................................................... 34
1.4.3 SelecType .................................................................................................. 35
1.4.3.1 Outline ................................................................................................ 35
1.4.3.2 Panel Setting Menu Item .................................................................... 36
1.4.3.3 PG Setting .......................................................................................... 40
1.4.3.4 Page Lines .......................................................................................... 41
1.4.3.5 Interface Select ................................................................................... 41
1.4.3.6 Code Page Switching ......................................................................... 41
1.4.3.7 Roll Paper Margin .............................................................................. 41
1.4.3.8 Detect Paper Width ............................................................................ 42
1.4.3.9 Detect Skew Error .............................................................................. 42
1.4.3.10 Job Timeout Setting ......................................................................... 42
1.4.3.11 No margin print setting .................................................................... 43
1.4.3.12 Cutter position adjustment ............................................................... 44
1.4.3.13 Auto margin refresh ......................................................................... 44
1.4.3.14 Panel Setup Value Initialization ....................................................... 45
1.4.3.15 Nozzle Check Pattern Printing ......................................................... 45
1.4.3.16 Status Printing .................................................................................. 46
1.4.3.17 Job Information Print ....................................................................... 48
1.4.3.18 Firmware version .............................................................................. 49
1.4.3.19 Printable pages of each ink cartridge ............................................... 49
1.4.3.20 Ink remaining ................................................................................... 49
1.4.3.21 Maintenance tank count ................................................................... 49
1.4.3.22 Use counter ....................................................................................... 50
1.4.3.23 Clear use counter .............................................................................. 50
1.4.3.24 Job history display ............................................................................ 50
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
7
1.4.3.25 Job history clear ................................................................................ 50
1.4.3.26 Total prints ....................................................................................... 50
1.4.3.27 Consumables life .............................................................................. 51
1.4.3.28 Suction adjustment for paper setting and indicator display ............. 53
1.4.3.29 Ink remaining indicator display ........................................................ 54
1.4.3.30 Job information ................................................................................. 55
1.4.3.31 User Paper Setting ............................................................................ 56
1.4.3.32 Power cleaning ................................................................................. 60
1.4.3.33 Cutter Blade Replacement ................................................................ 60
1.4.3.34 Gap Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment, Uni-D Adjustment) ................ 60
1.4.3.35 BK ink cartridge replacement ........................................................... 64
1.4.4 Maintenance Mode 1 ................................................................................. 66
1.4.5 Maintenance Mode 2 ................................................................................. 70
1.4.6 Paper feeding adjustment conversion table ............................................... 84
1.4.7 Firmware Reload ....................................................................................... 85
1.4.7.1 Reload from ROM-DIMM ................................................................. 85
1.4.7.2 Reload with F/W DOWNLOAD mode .............................................. 85
1.4.7.3 Installation with service utility (F/W Update function) ..................... 85
1.4.7.4 Compulsory start F/W DOWNLOAD mode ...................................... 85
1.4.8 Function to prevent irregular printing ........................................................ 86
1.4.9 Initialization ............................................................................................... 86
1.4.9.1 Hardware initialization ....................................................................... 86
1.4.9.2 Software initialization ........................................................................ 86
1.4.9.3 Panel initialization .............................................................................. 86
1.4.10 Default Setup Values ............................................................................... 87
1.4.10.1 Initial Setting for Operation ............................................................. 87
1.4.10.2 Ink Type Setting ............................................................................... 87
1.4.10.3 MW Printing Adjustment / Setting Values and Printing Modes ...... 88
1.4.10.4 Printing Mode Combination Table ................................................... 89
1.5 Controller ............................................................................................................ 90
1.6 Interfaces ............................................................................................................ 91
1.6.1 Parallel Interface ........................................................................................ 91
1.6.1.1 Compatibility Mode ........................................................................... 91
1.6.1.2 Nibble Mode ....................................................................................... 93
1.6.1.3 ECP Mode .......................................................................................... 94
1.6.2 USB interface ............................................................................................. 95
1.6.3 Optional Interface ...................................................................................... 96
1.6.4 Supplements ............................................................................................... 97
1.7 Optional Units and Consumables ....................................................................... 98
1.7.1 Ink Cartridge .............................................................................................. 98
1.7.2 Cleaning cartridge ...................................................................................... 99
1.7.3 Draining cartridge ...................................................................................... 99
1.7.4 Maintenance Tank ..................................................................................... 99
Chapter 2 Operating Principles
2.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 101
2.2 Print Mechanism Components ......................................................................... 102
2.2.1 Carriage (CR) Mechanism ....................................................................... 103
2.2.2 Paper Feed Assembly .............................................................................. 113
2.2.3 Cleaning Mechanism ............................................................................... 115
2.2.4 Ink Supply Mechanism ............................................................................ 117
2.2.5 Others ....................................................................................................... 118
2.3 Outline of Control Circuit Board ...................................................................... 119
2.4 Outline of Power Supply Circuit Board ........................................................... 120
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
3.1 Outline .............................................................................................................. 122
3.1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 122
3.2 Error Display .................................................................................................... 123
3.2.1 Errors ....................................................................................................... 123
3.2.1.1 Error Indications on LCD ................................................................. 123
3.2.1.2 Warning Indications on LCD ........................................................... 124
3.2.1.3 Service Call (Fatal) Errors ................................................................ 125
3.2.2 Errors ....................................................................................................... 126
3.2.2.1 Paper End/End of roll ....................................................................... 126
3.2.2.2 Wrong paper source is selected on panel ......................................... 126
3.2.2.3 Paper set lever is released during operation ..................................... 126
3.2.2.4 Paper set lever is released ................................................................. 127
3.2.2.5 Paper Jam ......................................................................................... 127
3.2.2.6 Front Cover Open ............................................................................. 127
3.2.2.7 Type-B I/F error ............................................................................... 128
3.2.2.8 Paper cutting error ............................................................................ 128
3.2.2.9 Paper Not Straight ............................................................................ 128
3.2.2.10 Paper check error/Paper eject error (sheet) .................................... 129
3.2.2.11 Paper is too thick for cleaning ........................................................ 129
3.2.2.12 Not enough ink for cleaning ........................................................... 129
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
8
3.2.2.13 Ink-related Errors ........................................................................... 130
3.2.2.14 Defective ink cartridge ................................................................... 130
3.2.2.15 Ink lever released ............................................................................ 130
3.2.2.16 Illegal ink cartridge ........................................................................ 131
3.2.2.17 Maintenance tank full ..................................................................... 131
3.2.2.18 No Maintenance tank ...................................................................... 131
3.2.2.19 Wrong IK designation .................................................................... 131
3.2.2.20 Fatal Error ....................................................................................... 131
3.2.3 Troubleshooting for Warning .................................................................. 132
3.2.3.1 Ink Low ............................................................................................ 132
3.2.3.2 Maintenance tank full warning ......................................................... 132
3.2.3.3 Maintenance request ......................................................................... 132
3.2.4 Troubleshooting for Service Call Errors .................................................. 134
3.2.4.1 CR motor life (00000101) ................................................................ 134
3.2.4.2 PF motor encoder check error (00010000) ....................................... 135
3.2.4.3 PF Motor out of step (00010001) ..................................................... 135
3.2.4.4 PF motor overcurrent (00010002) .................................................... 136
3.2.4.5 PF motor in-position time out (00010003) ....................................... 136
3.2.4.6 CR motor encoder check error (00010004) ...................................... 137
3.2.4.7 CR motor out of step (00010005) ..................................................... 137
3.2.4.8 CR motor overcurrent (00010006) ................................................... 138
3.2.4.9 CR motor in-position time-out (00010007) ...................................... 138
3.2.4.10 Servo interrupt watchdog time-out (00010008) ............................. 139
3.2.4.11 System interrupt watchdog time-out (00010009) ........................... 139
3.2.4.12 CR home position sensor error (0001000A) .................................. 139
3.2.4.13 PF home position sensor error (0001000B) ................................... 139
3.2.4.14 Head slide (PG) home position sensor error (0001000C) .............. 140
3.2.4.15 CR motor PWM output faulty (0001000F) .................................... 140
3.2.4.16 PF motor PWM output faulty (00010010) ..................................... 141
3.2.4.17 Head driver (TG) temperature error (0001001B) ........................... 141
3.2.4.18 CR servo parameter error (0001001D) ........................................... 142
3.2.4.19 PF servo parameter error (0001001E) ............................................ 142
3.2.4.20 CSIC reed/right error (00010020) .................................................. 143
3.2.4.21 Ink type error (setting on printer body side) (00010022) ............... 143
3.2.4.22 RTC analysis error (00010023) ...................................................... 143
3.2.4.23 CSIC ROM communication error (00010025) ............................... 144
3.2.4.24 RTC communication error (00010026) .......................................... 144
3.2.4.25 Head error (00010028) ................................................................... 144
3.2.4.26 Unidentified NMI (00010029) ....................................................... 144
3.2.4.27 CR ASIC ECU error (0001002A) .................................................. 144
3.2.4.28 PF ASIC ECU error (0001002B) ................................................... 144
3.2.4.29 NVRAM error (00020000) ............................................................. 144
3.2.4.30 SDRAM error (00020002) ............................................................. 145
3.2.4.31 BOOT program SUM error (00020003) ........................................ 145
3.2.4.32 Flash memory SUM error (00020009) ........................................... 145
3.2.4.33 Program load error (0002000A) ..................................................... 145
3.2.4.34 Internal memory shortage error (0002000B) ................................. 145
3.2.4.35 Review error (0002000C) ............................................................... 146
3.2.4.36 CPU address error (load misalignment) (100000E0) ................. 146
3.2.4.37 CPU address error (storage misalignment) (10000100) ................. 146
3.2.4.38 CPU reserve command code exception error (10000180) ............. 146
3.2.4.39 CPU slot illegal command exception error (100001A0) ................ 146
3.2.4.40 CPU DMA address error (100005C0) ............................................ 146
3.2.4.41 CPU error (10000xxx) .................................................................... 146
3.3 Troubleshooting Based on Your Printout ......................................................... 147
3.3.1 Dot Missing ............................................................................................. 147
3.3.2 Uneven Printing/Poor Resolution ............................................................ 148
3.3.3 Smudged or Marred Printout (Front) ....................................................... 148
3.3.4 Smudged or Marred Printout (Reverse side) ........................................... 149
3.3.5 White or Black Banding in the carriage running direction ...................... 149
3.3.6 Banding in the paper feed direction ......................................................... 150
Chapter 4 Disassembly & Assembly
4.1 Summary .......................................................................................................... 152
4.1.1 Precautions ............................................................................................... 152
4.1.2 Tools ........................................................................................................ 155
4.1.3 Screw List ................................................................................................ 155
4.1.4 Disassembly Flow .................................................................................... 156
4.2 Removing the Panel Unit and Housing ............................................................ 158
4.2.1 Panel Unit ................................................................................................ 159
4.2.2 R Side Cover ............................................................................................ 160
4.2.3 L Side Cover ............................................................................................ 163
4.2.4 I/H Cover ................................................................................................. 164
4.2.5 H Top Cover ............................................................................................ 165
4.2.6 Rear Cover ............................................................................................... 166
4.2.7 Paper Guide L2 ........................................................................................ 168
4.2.8 Roll Paper Cover ..................................................................................... 169
4.2.9 Front Cover .............................................................................................. 170
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
9
4.3 Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism .............................. 171
4.3.1 Print Head ................................................................................................ 171
4.3.2 Damper ASSY ......................................................................................... 173
4.3.3 CR Board ASSY ...................................................................................... 174
4.3.4 Cutter Section .......................................................................................... 175
4.3.4.1 Cutter Holder ASSY ......................................................................... 175
4.3.4.2 Cutter Solenoid ................................................................................. 177
4.3.5 CR Encoder Sensor ASSY ....................................................................... 178
4.3.6 P_EGDE Sensor ASSY ........................................................................... 179
4.3.7 CR Motor ASSY ...................................................................................... 180
4.3.8 HEAD_SLIDE Sensor ASSY .................................................................. 182
4.3.9 CR_HP Sensor ASSY .............................................................................. 183
4.3.10 CR Encoder Scale (Timing Fence) ........................................................ 184
4.4 Disassembly and Assembly of Paper Feed Mechanism ................................... 185
4.4.1 PF Motor .................................................................................................. 185
4.4.2 PF Encoder Sensor ASSY ....................................................................... 186
4.4.3 Cautions when replacing the PF Loop Scale ........................................... 187
4.4.3.1 Assembly Procedure for the PF Loop Scale ASSY ......................... 187
4.4.3.2 PF Loop Scale ASSY Affixing Procedure ....................................... 188
4.4.4 Suction Fans ............................................................................................. 189
4.4.5 P_THICK Sensor/P_THICK Sensor_0.3 ASSY ..................................... 190
4.4.6 P_REAR Sensor ASSY ........................................................................... 191
4.5 Disassembly and Assembly of Ink Supply Mechanism ................................... 192
4.5.1 C472_SUB-B Board ................................................................................ 192
4.5.2 I/H (Ink Holder) ASSY ............................................................................ 193
4.5.3 Cover Sensor ASSY ................................................................................ 197
4.6 Disassembly and Assembly of Cleaning Mechanism ...................................... 198
4.6.1 Maintenance ASSY Removal .................................................................. 199
4.6.2 Pump Motor ASSY .................................................................................. 200
4.6.3 Cap ASSY ................................................................................................ 200
4.6.4 Pump ASSY ............................................................................................. 201
4.6.5 Cleaner Head (Wiper) .............................................................................. 203
4.6.6 Flushing Box ASSY ................................................................................ 204
4.7 Disassembly and Assembly of Circuit Boards ................................................. 205
4.7.1 Power Supply Board ................................................................................ 205
4.7.2 AC Inlet ................................................................................................... 206
4.7.3 MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) .................................................................... 207
4.7.4 DIP Switch and Jumper Setting at Factory before Shipment .................. 209
Chapter 5 Adjustment
5.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 211
5.1.1 Cautions ................................................................................................... 211
5.1.2 Adjustment Tools .................................................................................... 211
5.1.3 Procedure for Adjustment Work .............................................................. 212
5.1.4 Adjustment Items ..................................................................................... 212
5.1.4.1 Print Head Adjustment ..................................................................... 212
5.1.4.2 Main Board Adjustment ................................................................... 213
5.1.4.3 CR Motor Adjustment ...................................................................... 214
5.1.4.4 PF Motor Adjustment ....................................................................... 214
5.1.4.5 P_EDGE Sensor ASSY Adjustment ................................................ 215
5.1.4.6 P_REAR Sensor ASSY Adjustment ................................................ 215
5.1.4.7 P_THICK/P_THICK_0.3 Sensor ASSY Adjustment ..................... 215
5.1.4.8 CR Encoder Sensor ASSY Adjustment ........................................... 215
5.1.4.9 Cover Sensor ASSY Adjustment ..................................................... 216
5.1.4.10 PF Encoder Sensor ASSY Adjustment .......................................... 216
5.1.4.11 Cutter Solenoid ASSY or Paper Guide L Adjustment ................... 217
5.1.4.12 Damper ASSY Adjustment ............................................................ 217
5.1.4.13 Release Sensor (I/H Lever) Adjustment ......................................... 217
5.1.4.14 Battery ............................................................................................ 217
5.1.5 Parameter Backup .................................................................................... 218
5.1.5.1 Parameter Backup Procedure ........................................................... 218
5.1.5.2 Work Procedure ................................................................................ 218
5.1.5.3 Others ............................................................................................... 218
5.1.6 Firmware Reinstallation .......................................................................... 219
5.1.6.1 Firmware Installation through ROM-DIMM ................................... 219
5.1.6.2 Firmware Installation through Interface ........................................... 219
5.2 Self-diagnostic Function ................................................................................... 220
5.2.1 Overview ................................................................................................. 220
5.2.1.1 How to Start Self-diagnostic Function ............................................. 220
5.2.1.2 Functions of Keys during Self-diagnosis ......................................... 220
5.2.1.3 Top Menu ......................................................................................... 221
5.2.2 Test .......................................................................................................... 222
5.2.2.1 Version ............................................................................................. 223
5.2.2.2 Control Panel .................................................................................... 223
5.2.2.3 Sensors ............................................................................................. 224
5.2.2.4 Encoder ............................................................................................. 225
5.2.2.5 Fan .................................................................................................... 225
5.2.2.6 Record .............................................................................................. 226
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
10
5.2.2.7 CSIC ................................................................................................. 227
5.2.2.8 Actuator ............................................................................................ 229
5.2.2.9 Actuator 2 ......................................................................................... 229
5.2.3 Adjustment ............................................................................................... 230
5.2.3.1 Rear AD Adjustment ........................................................................ 231
5.2.3.2 Edge AD Adjustment ....................................................................... 232
5.2.3.3 Input Rank ........................................................................................ 233
5.2.3.4 Write D/A Value .............................................................................. 236
5.2.3.5 Check Nozzle ................................................................................... 237
5.2.3.6 Check Skew ...................................................................................... 238
5.2.3.7 Feed Correction + T&B Adjustment ................................................ 239
5.2.3.8 Top & Bottom Adjustment ............................................................... 242
5.2.3.9 Rear Sensor Position ........................................................................ 243
5.2.3.10 Platen Position (Sponge Position) Adjustment .............................. 244
5.2.3.11 Platen Position Checking ................................................................ 245
5.2.3.12 Head Slant Checking ...................................................................... 246
5.2.3.13 Round Trip Print Position Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment) ............ 248
5.2.3.14 Parameter Copying ......................................................................... 251
5.2.3.15 Bi-D2 Adjustment (PG=0.7mm) .................................................... 251
5.2.3.16 Bi-D3 Adjustment (PG=2.1mm) .................................................... 251
5.2.3.17 Round Trip Print Position (Bi-D Adjustment) Checking ............... 252
5.2.3.18 Head Gap Adjustment (Uni-D Adjustment) ................................... 253
5.2.3.19 Test Pattern Printing ....................................................................... 255
5.2.3.20 Clean Head ..................................................................................... 256
5.2.3.21 Counter Clear ................................................................................. 257
5.2.4 Cleaning ................................................................................................... 259
5.2.5 Print .......................................................................................................... 259
5.2.6 Parameter ................................................................................................. 260
5.2.6.1 Parameter Initialize ........................................................................... 261
5.3 Mechanism Adjustment .................................................................................... 263
5.3.1 Overview .................................................................................................. 263
5.3.2 CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment ...................................................... 263
5.3.3 PF Timing Belt Tension Adjustment ....................................................... 264
5.3.4 P_THICK_0.3/P_THICK Sensor Mounting Plate Position Adjustment . 265
5.3.5 Cover Sensor ASSY Mounting Position Adjustment .............................. 267
5.3.6 CR Encoder Sensor Mounting Position Adjustment ............................... 268
5.3.7 Cutter Positioning Adjustment ................................................................ 269
5.3.7.1 Paper Cutting Position Check ........................................................... 271
5.3.8 PF Encoder Sensor Installation Position Adjustment .............................. 272
5.3.9 USB ID Writing ....................................................................................... 273
Chapter 6 Maintenance
6.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 275
6.1.1 Periodic Maintenance Items and Product Life Information .................... 276
6.1.2 Important Maintenance Items During Service Operations ...................... 279
6.2 Lubrication and Glue ........................................................................................ 280
6.2.1 Lubricating the CR Guide Rail ................................................................ 280
Chapter 7 Appendix
7.1 Connectors ........................................................................................................ 282
7.2 Component Layout ........................................................................................... 285
7.3 Circuit Diagrams .............................................................................................. 286
7.4 Exploded Diagrams .......................................................................................... 292
7.5 ASP List (Parts List) ......................................................................................... 317
7.5.1 ASP List for Stylus Pro 7600 .................................................................. 317
7.5.2 ASP List for Stylus Pro 9600 .................................................................. 320
CHAPTER
1
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Product Description 12
1.1 Product Description
1.1.1 Features
Large Format
Stylus Pro 7600: Max. 24 inch paper width, A1+ size supported
Stylus Pro 9600: Max. 44 inch paper width, B0+ size supported
Pigment ink / Dye ink
Pigment ink:
Users can select following blackish ink combinations.
•Photo Black + Light Black
•Matte Black + Light Black
•Matte Black × 2
Dye ink:
2 black ink cartridges are installed.
High-speed Throughput
Stylus Pro 7600
Note *1: Color high-speed 360×180dpi mode (for POP, for all ink combinations of pigment/
dye)
*2: Black double-speed mode (for CAD, supported with FW),
(It is switched automatically with 2 BK ink cartridge installation (dye/PPI) + M/W
OFF)
Stylus Pro 9600
Note *1: Color high-speed 360×180dpi mode (for POP, for all ink combinations of pigment/
dye)
*2: Black double-speed mode (for CAD, supported with FW),
(It is switched automatically with 2 BK ink cartridge installation (dye/PPI) + M/W
OFF)
Super High Quality
High image quality with 7-color ink, 2880×1440 dpi, and minimum 4pl various
layers.
Low Running Cost
•Independent for each color and 110 ml ink cartridge
•Large capacity 220 ml ink cartridge as an option
Paper Handling
•Support various media.
•Automatic roll paper cutter, manual cutter
•Automatic loading (cut sheet)
•Borderless print for right and left
Compatibility with other LFPs
Commands are upper compatible with Stylus Pro 10000, Stylus Pro 10000CF,
Stylus Pro 9000, Stylus Pro 9500, Stylus Pro 7000, and Stylus Pro 7500.
The latest RIP technology
CPSI Pro software RIP
Table 1-1. Throughput (Stylus Pro 7600)
EPSON media Quality Resolution
(dpi) Mode Throughput
(A1 printing time)
Plain Paper Draft*1360 × 180 Pseudo 4-color 2 min.
Speed 360 × 360 Bi-D MF 240 cps 3/2 (BK×2*2)
min.
Doubleweight
Matte Paper
Speed 360
× 360 Bi-D M/W(POL) 240 cps 5 min.
Quality 720 × 360 Bi-DFOL(POL) 9 min
Glossy Photo
Paper
Glossy Paper-
Heavy Weight
Speed 720
× 360 Bi-D 22POL 240 cps 8 min.
Quality 720 × 720 Bi-D 14POL 240 cps 13 min.
Adv.Photo 1440
× 720 Bi-D 4-pass 240 cps 25 min
Photo 2880 2880 × 1440 Bi-D 4-pass 190 cps 55 min
Table 1-2. Throughput (Stylus Pro 9600)
EPSON media Quality Resolution
(dpi) Mode Throughput
(A1 printing time)
Plain Paper Draft*1360 × 180 Pseudo 4-color 3.5 min
Speed 360 × 360 Bi-D MF 240 cps 6/3.5 (BK×2*2)
min.
Doubleweight
Matte Paper
Speed 360
× 360 Bi-D M/W(POL) 240 cps 9 min.
Quality 720 × 360 Bi-DFOL(POL) 17 min
Glossy Photo
Paper
Glossy Paper-
Heavy Weight
Speed 720
× 360 Bi-D 22POL 240 cps 14 min
Quality 720 × 720 Bi-D 14POL 240 cps 24 min
Adv.Photo 1440
× 720 Bi-D 4-pass 240 cps 46 min
Photo 2880 2880 × 1440 Bi-D 4-pass 190 cps 102 min
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Product Description 13
1.1.2 Differences between Stylus Pro 7600 and Stylus Pro
9600
Table 1-3. Differences between Stylus Pro 7600 and Stylus Pro 9600
Item Stylus Pro 7600 Stylus Pro 9600
Product
Specifications
Maximum paper
width
610mm
(About 24 inches /
A1+size supported)
1118m
(About 44 inches /
B0+size supported)
RAM capacity 32MB (16Mbit×2)
(IC600/601 = not mounted)
64MB (16Mbit×4)
Option Take-up Reel Unit Not supported
(CN30 = not mounted)
Supported
220 ml ink
cartridge
Not supported Supported
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Basic Specifications 14
1.2 Basic Specifications
1.2.1 Print Specifications
Printing: On-demand ink-jet
Nozzle configuration:
Black: 192 nozzles (Black1, Black2, 96 nozzles each)
Color: 480 nozzles (cyan, magenta, light cyan, light magenta,
yellow, 96 nozzles each)
Nozzle pitch: 0.141mm (1/180 inch) for each color
Printing direction:
Bi-direction with logic seeking (high-speed return, high-speed skip only)
Printing speed and printable area
Character mode
•Character quality: high quality
•Character pitch: 10 cpi
•Printable area:
Stylus Pro 7600: 237 characters (at 10 cpi) / 8,561 dots (360dpi)
Stylus Pro 9600: 437 characters (at 10 cpi) / 15,840 dots (360dpi)
•Printing speed: 240 cps max.
Graphic Mode
1.2.2 Character Specification
Character tables: 2 international character sets
PC 437 (US, Standard Europe)
PC 850 (Multilingual)
NOTE:
This specification is not described in the user's manual.
Typeface:
Bit map LQ font: EPSON Courier 10 cpi
NOTE:
This specifications is not described in the user's manual.
1.2.3 Control Code
Control code:
ESC/P Raster
ESC/P3
NOTE:
This specifications is not described in the user's manual.
1.2.4 Paper Feed
Paper feeding: Friction feed
Line spacing: 1/6 inch or programmable at 1440 inch
Paper path: Roll paper/manual
Feed speed: 6.35 mm paper feed: 215 ± 10 msec
(except front rush, back rush, and hold time)
Table 1-4. Graphics Modes (Stylus Pro 7600)
Horizontal resolution
(dpi) Printable area Maximum number
of printable dots Printing speed
360 604 mm (24.16 inches) 8698 240 cps
720 604 mm (24.16 inches) 17395 240 cps
1440 604 mm (24.16 inches) 34790 240 cps
2880 604 mm (24.16 inches) 69581 190 cps
Table 1-5. Graphics Modes (Stylus Pro 9600)
Horizontal resolution
(dpi) Printable area Maximum number
of printable dots Printing speed
360 1112 mm (43.78 inches) 15762 240 cps
720 1112 mm (43.78 inches) 31524 240 cps
1440 1112 mm (43.78 inches) 63048 240 cps
2880 1112 mm (43.78 inches) 126087 190 cps
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Basic Specifications 15
1.2.5 Paper Specifications
1.2.5.1 Roll Paper
ACCEPTABLE PAPER
The printer accepts following plain paper and EPSON special paper. With any other
paper, proper paper feeding and satisfactory print quality are not ensured.
Paper Size
Note "*": Within roll size
Roll Size
2-inch core: 103 mm ext. diameter maximum for 1 roll setting
3-inch core: 150 mm ext. diameter maximum for 1 roll setting
Thickness: 0.08 mm ~ 0.50 mm
PLAIN PAPER
Trouble-free paper feeding is ensured only in the following specifications.
Paper Size
Note "*": Within roll size
Roll Size
2-inch core: 103 mm ext. diameter maximum for 1 roll setting
3-inch core: 150 mm ext. diameter maximum for 1 roll setting
Thickness: 0.08 ~ 0.11 mm
Weight: 64 ~ 90gf/m2
Type: Plain paper, Recycle paper
Table 1-6. Acceptable Roll Paper Sizes (Acceptable Paper)
Core Model Paper Size
2-inch core Stylus Pro 7600 203mm ~ 610 mm (W) × ~ 45 m (H) *
Stylus Pro 9600 203 mm ~ 1118 mm (W) × ~ 45 m (H) *
3-inch core Stylus Pro 7600 203 mm ~ 610 mm (W) × ~ 202 m (H) *
Stylus Pro 9600 203 mm ~ 1118 mm (W) × ~ 202 m (H) *
Table 1-7. Acceptable Roll Paper Sizes (Plain Paper)
Core Model Paper Size
2-inch core Stylus Pro 7600 203 mm ~ 610 mm (W) × ~ 45m (H) *
Stylus Pro 9600 203 mm ~ 1118 mm (W) × ~ 45m (H) *
3-inch core Stylus Pro 7600 203 mm ~ 610 mm (W) × ~ 202m (H) *
Stylus Pro 9600 203 mm ~ 1118 mm (W) × ~ 202m (H) *
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Basic Specifications 16
BORDERLESS PRINT ROLL PAPER
Borderless print for right and left is enssured for roll paper with any of the paper widths
as specified in Figure 1-9 below.
NOTE: 300 mm, 400 mm, 500 mm and 600 mm are supported for Europe.
Paper width
Note 1: Paper should have no wrinkles, tears, or folds and the surface should be smooth.
2: The force to remove the end of the roll paper from the core should be between 300 gf
and 2000 gf
3: If core is used, a product-exclusive option (roll paper spindle 3 inch) is necessary.
4: It is used under normal conditions. (temperature 15°C ~ 25°C, humidity 40 ~ 60%RH)
5: Roll paper can be printed before paper comes out of the core.
(Reference: Remaining paper length is 30cm approx. when roll paper come out of the
core.)
6: The mechanism clips print data out of over-printable area for borderless printing.
1.2.5.2 Sheet
ACCEPTABLE PAPER
The printer accepts following plain paper and special paper. With any other paper,
proper paper feeding and satisfactory print quality are not ensured.
Paper Size (The sizes indicated in bold italic are only for Stylus Pro 9600.)
Note "*": Only for Stylus Pro 9600
Thickness
0.08 ~ 1.5 mm (paper length: 279 mm ~ 728 mm)
0.08 ~ 0.5 mm (paper length: 728 mm ~ 1580 mm)
NOTE 1: Paper should have no wrinkles, tears, or folds and the surface should be
smooth.
2:
0.08 ~ 1.50 mm paper thickness is supported for long-edge insertion.
3:
The sizes indicated in bold italic are only for Stylus Pro 9600.
Table 1-8.
Stylus Pro 7600
Stylus Pro 9600
Japan 8” 210
mm 10” - 12” 14” - 16” - 20” - 24” 36” 44”
USA/Europe 8” 210
mm 10” 300
mm 12” 14” 400
mm 16” 500
mm 20” 600
mm 24” 36” 44”
Table 1-9. Acceptable Sheet Sizes (Acceptable Paper)
Paper Size Size (W × H) Paper Size Size (W × H)
B0+* 1118 mm × 1580 mm A4 210 mm × 297 mm
B0 * 1030 mm × 1456 mm US E 34 × 44 in
B1 * 728 mm × 1030 mm US D 22 × 34 in
B2 515 mm × 728 mm US C 17 × 22 in
B3 364 mm
× 515 mm US B 11 × 17 in
B4 257 mm × 364 mm 44 × 36 in * 44 × 36 in
A0+ * 914 mm × 1292 mm 30 × 24 in 30 × 24 in
A0 * 841 mm × 1189 mm Letter 8.5 × 11 in
A1+ 24 × 36 in B1 (wide) * 1030 × 728 mm
A1 594m × 841 mm 8 × 10 in 8 × 10 in
A2 420 mm
× 594 mm 30 cm × 45 cm 30 cm × 45 cm
A3+ 329 mm × 483 mm 60 cm × 90 cm 60 cm × 90 cm
A3 297 mm
× 420 mm
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Basic Specifications 17
PLAIN PAPER
Proper feeding is ensured only in the following specifications.
Paper Size: Same as above list
Thickness: 0.08 ~ 0.11 mm
Weight: 64 ~ 90 gf/m2
Type: Plain paper, Recycle paper
NOTE 1: Paper is fed short-edge first.
2:
Paper should have no wrinkles, tears, or folds and the surface should be
smooth.
3:
It is used under normal conditions (temperature 15
~
25°C, humidity 40
~
60%RH)
4:
300mm, 400mm, 500mm, 600mm are supported for Europe.
5:
Mechanism clips print data out of over-printable area for borderless print.
BORDERLESS PRINT WIDTH
Borderless print for right and left is assured with following paper width. *4
Paper width
Table 1-10.
Stylus Pro 7600
Stylus Pro 9600
Japan 8” 210
mm 10” - 12” 14” - 16” - 20” - 24” 36” 44”
USA/Europe 8” 210
mm 10” 300
mm 12” 14” 400
mm 16” 500
mm 20” 600
mm 24” 36” 44”
CHECK
P O I N T
Description of units of measure
cpi: characters per inch
dpi: dots per inch
cps: characters printed per second (at 10 cpi)
1 cps = 2.54 mm/s
ips: travel in inches per second
1 ips = 25.4 mm/s
G: Gravity
General ambient conditions:
Temperature 15°C ~ 25°C
Humidity 40% ~ 60%
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Basic Specifications 18
1.2.5.3 Special Paper
Roll (pigment)
Note : Symbol ~: Assured, {: Supported, z: Supported conditionally, ×: Not supported, 2H/3H: High tension spindle
Table 1-11. Availability with Special Paper (Pigment)
Roll / Pigment
Characteristic Media Size
Black INK core”
spindle
Paper
thickness
(mm)
Auto
cut
Borde
rless 8” 210
mm 10” 30
cm 12” 14” 40
cm 16” 50
cm 20” 22” 60
cm 24” 36” 44”
Name Japan
USA/
Europe
/Asia
MK
×2
MK
+LK
PK
+LK 203 210 254 300 305 356 400 406 500 508 560 600 610 914 1118
Doubleweight Matte Paper {{zz{20.21~------------~~~
Glossy Paper - Photo Weight { { { 2 0.22 ~----------~- - ~ ~
Glossy Film {{ {20.13~------------~~~
Premium Glossy Photo Paper { { { 2 0.18 ~------------~~~
Premium Semigloss Photo Paper {{ {20.18~------------~~~
Photo Glossy Paper / Photo Grade Glossy Paper { { { 2 0.17 ~------------~~~
Photo Semigloss Paper / Photo Grade Semigloss Paper {{ {20.18~------------~~~
Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250) { { { 3 0.26 ~ ~ ------------~~~
Premium Semigloss Photo Paper (250) {{ {30.26~~ ------------~~~
Premium Semimatte Photo Paper (250) { { { 3 0.26 ~ ~ ------------~~~
Premium Luster Photo Paper {{ {30.26~~ --~~~~~ ~~ -~~~~
Watercolor Paper - Radiant White { { { { 3H 0.29 ~------------~~~
Smooth Fine Art Paper (Roll) {{{3H 0.37 ------------~~~
Textured Fine Art Paper (Roll) { { { { 3H 0.37 - - - - - - - - - - - - ~~~
Canvas {{{2 0.46 ------------~~~
Backlight Film { { 2 0.13 ~------------~~~
Backlight Film (USA / Europe) {{2 0.18 ------------~~~
Heavyweight Polyester Banner { { z { 2 0.28 ------------~~~
Enhanced Synthetic Paper {{zz{2H 0.12 ~------------~~~
Adhesive Enhanced Synthetic Paper { { z z { 2H 0.17 ~------------~~~
Tyvek Brillion {zz{ 20.24~------------~~~
Adhesive Vinyl { z z { 2 0.33 ------------~~~
Enhanced Matte Paper {{ {{30.25~------------~~~
Semiglossy 2 TBD TBD {2TBD ~------------~ ~ -
Semiglossy 4 {{2TBD~------------~~ -
Dupont / EPSON Semi - Gloss Proofing Paper - A { { 2 0.20 ------------~ ~ -
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Basic Specifications 19
Roll (dye)
Note : Symbol ~: Assured, {: Supported, z: Supported conditionally, ×: Not supported, 2H/3H: High tension spindle
Note *1: Assured with Uni-D print.
*2: Paper is fed short-edge first.
*3: Paper should have no wrinkles, tears, or folds and the surface should be smooth.
*4: It is used under normal conditions (temperature 15°C ~ 25°C, humidity 40% ~ 60%RH)
*5: Paper feeding and print quality with borderless print is not assured on paper which is not assured for borderless print.
*6: Borderless print is not assured with sheet.
Table 1-12. Availability with Special Paper (Dye)
Roll / Dye
Characteristic Media Size
core”
spindle
Paper
thickness
(mm)
Auto cut Borderless
8” 210
mm 10” 30cm 12” 14” 40cm 16” 50cm 20” 22” 60cm 24” 36” 44”
Name Japan
USA/
Europe/
Asia
203 210 254 300 305 356 400 406 500 508 560 600 610 914 1118
Presentation Matte Paper {{ 20.20{------------~~~
Semigloss Photo Paper (Asia / Europe)
Semi Gloss Paper - Heavy Weight (US) { { 2 0.21 {------------~~~
Glossy Photo Paper (Asia / Europe)
Glossy Paper - Heavy Weight (US) {{ 20.23{------------~~~
Doubleweight Matte Paper {2 0.21 {------------~~~
Glossy Film {{ 20.13{------------~~~
Photo Grade Glossy Paper (Asia / Europe)
Photo Glossy Paper (US) {2 0.17 {------------~~~
Photo Grade Semigloss Paper (Asia / Europe)
Photo Semigloss Paper (US) {20.18{------------~~~
Heavyweight Polyester Banner { { 2 0.28 ------------~~~
RC 10mil Glossy Paper (TBD) TBD {30.26{----------- ~~~
RC 10mil Semigloss Paper (TBD) TBD {3 0.26 {------------~~~
Premium Luster Photo Paper TBD {30.26{~--~~~~~~~~ -~~~~
Dupont / EPSON Commercial Proofing Paper {2 0.21 {------------~ ~ -
Dupont / EPSON Commercial Matte Proofing Paper {20.24{------------~~ -
Dupont / EPSON Publication Proofing Paper {2 0.24 {------------~ ~ -
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Basic Specifications 20
Sheet (pigment)
Note : Symbol ~: Assured, {: Supported, z: Supported conditionally, ×: Not supported, 2H/3H: High tension spindle
Sheet (dye)
Note : Symbol ~: Assured, {: Supported, z: Supported conditionally, ×: Not supported, 2H/3H: High tension spindle
Note *1: Assured with Uni-D print.
*2: Paper is fed short-edge first.
*3: Paper should have no wrinkles, tears, or folds and the surface should be smooth.
*4: It is used under normal conditions (temperature 15°C~25°C, humidity
40%~60%RH)
Table 1-13. Availability with Sheets (Pigment)
Sheet / Pigment
Characteristic Media size
Black INK Paper
thickness
(mm)
A4 LTR A3 BSuper
A3/B A2 CB2 A1 D24”×30” 30”×40” 36”×44”
Name Japan
USA/
Europe/
Asia
MK
×2
MK
+LK
PK
+LK 210×297 216×279 297×420 279×432 329×483 420×594 432×559 515×728 728×1030 559×864 610×762 762×1016 914×1118
Glossy Paper - Photo Weight {{ { ~~~~~ ------ - -
Watercolor Paper - Radiant White { { { { ----~- - - - - - - -
Smooth Fine Art Paper {{{0.67-------- - -~-~
Textured Fine Art Paper TBD { { { 0.67 - - - - - - - - - - ~-~
Enhanced Matte - Poster Board {{ {{1.3 ------ - -~~ -
Table 1-14. Availability with Sheets (Dye)
Sheet / Dye
Characteri stic Mediasize
Paper
thickness
A4 LTR A3 BSuper
A3/B A2 CB2 A1 DB1”
Name Japan USA/Europe
/Asia 210×297 216×279 297×420 279×432 329×483 420×594 432×559 515×728 728×1030 559×864 728×1030
Glossy Photo paper { { ~~~~~ ------
Photo Quality Inkjet Paper { { ~~~~~~~ ----
Glossy Film { { ~~~~~ -----
Semigloss Paper - Poster Board {-------~- - ~
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Basic Specifications 21
1.2.6 Mechanism Specifications
1.2.6.1 Printable Area
The printer detects paper width when paper is set. (If paper width detection setting
is OFF, it does not detect paper width.)
It does not print the image beyond the detected paper width or the printable area
specified by paper size setting.
(It may print on the platen if paper width detection setting is OFF.)
Margins of roll paper can be changed on the panel as follows;
Top/bottom 15 mm, left/right 3 mm
Top/bottom/left/right 3 mm
Top/bottom/left/right 15 mm
NOTE:
Under special conditions, it is possible to set right and left margin (LM,
RM) to 0.
For borderless print, right and left margins are 3mm each because skew detection
limit is 3mm. If the distance from the paper edge to the platen (sponge width) is
less than 3mm, the maximum surplus print quantity without ink discharge onto the
platen (0mm~3mm) is printable area.
Figure 1-1. Printable Area
Table 1-15. Printable Area
Item Roll paper
/Sheet Model Dimension
PW
(Paper width)
Roll paper Stylus Pro 7600 203 mm ~ 610 mm
Stylus Pro 9600 203 mm ~ 1118 mm
Sheet Stylus Pro 7600 203 mm ~ 610 mm
Stylus Pro 9600 203 mm ~ 1118 mm
PL
(Paper length)
Roll paper Stylus Pro 7600/Stylus Pro 9600 Max. 202m
Sheet Stylus Pro 7600/Stylus Pro 9600 279 mm ~ 1580 mm
TM
(Top margin)
Roll paper Stylus Pro 7600/Stylus Pro 9600 3 mm/15 mm
Sheet Stylus Pro 7600/Stylus Pro 9600 3 mm
BM
(Bottom margin)
Roll paper Stylus Pro 7600/Stylus Pro 9600 3 mm/15 mm
Sheet Stylus Pro 7600/Stylus Pro 9600 14 mm
LM
(Left margin)
Roll paper Stylus Pro 7600/Stylus Pro 9600 0 mm/3 mm/15 mm
Sheet Stylus Pro 7600/Stylus Pro 9600 0 mm/3 mm
RM
(Right margin)
Roll paper Stylus Pro 7600/Stylus Pro 9600 0 mm/3 mm/15 mm
Sheet Stylus Pro 7600/Stylus Pro 9600 0 mm/3 mm
Printable Area
Paper Feed Direction
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Basic Specifications 22
1.2.6.2 Paper Set Lever
1.2.6.3 Cutting Specification
There are two methods to cut roll paper, automatic and manual cutting.
AUTOMATIC CUTTING OF ROLL MEDIA
Automatic cutting under the following conditions can only be performed on the
approved media.
Mechanical conditions
Distance between cut position and paper setting position: L0=167mm
Distance between cut position and cutter mark: L1= 44mm
Minimum cut length (same as paper edge waiting position): L2=030mm
Note : Cutting pressure at high speed can be changed.
Cutting pressure at low speed is “Duty: 45%” fixed.
Paper edge waiting position is fed L2 for initial cut.
MANUAL CUTTING OF ROLL PAPER
Manual cutting is performed by the following procedure.
1. Select “Roll Cutter Off” on the panel.
2. Press “Cut/ Eject” button.
3. Paper is automatically fed toward the cutter guide, and printer becomes Off-line.
“Pause” is indicated on the LCD panel.
4. Adjust cutting position with “Paper Feed +/-” button if necessary.
5. Slide the cutter along the cutter guide to cut the paper.
6. After cutting, release the printer from the pause status by pressing the “Pause”
button. Then paper is fed backward and printer enters on-line.
Table 1-16. Paper Set Lever
Lever Position Description
In the rear Position for paper setting
(You can set paper.)
In the front Ready-to-print position
(Paper is held with the paper holder.)
C A U T I O N Do not use the auto cutting function with any paper for which auto
cutting is prohibited; otherwise, the head would be damaged.
Table 1-17. Cutting Conditions and Cutting Methods
Cut condition Cut method
Initial cut (Cut with pushing “Cut/Eject” button after paper
is set, and set lever is pushed down.)
Paper is fed for L1 length and cut in 4 steps.
(50cps)
Cut after print completed by driver 4-step cut (200cps) When paper is shorter
than L2, it is cut after feeding L2.
Initial cut during printing Cut during printing is not allowed with this
printer. (Product specification)
Initial cut during normal waiting status Paper is fed for L1 length and cut in 4 steps.
(50cps)
Initial cut with Auto cut ON after print with Auto cut OFF.
4-step cut (200cps), when paper is longer
than L2. 4-step cut (50cps) after feeding L2,
when paper is shorter than L2.
Cut with Paper width detection OFF 3-step cut always (100cps fixed)
CHECK
P O I N T
For manual cutting of roll paper, use the manual cutter available as
an option.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Basic Specifications 23
1.2.6.4 Acoustic Noise
Level: Approx. 50dB(A) (According to ISO 7779)
1.2.7 Electrical Specifications (TBD)
Rated voltage: AC 100 ~ 240V
Input voltage range: AC 90 ~ 264V
Rated frequency range: 50 ~ 60Hz
Input frequency range: 49 ~ 61Hz
Rated current:
Stylus Pro 7600: 1.0A/100-120v, 0.5A/220-240v
Stylus Pro 9600: 1.0A/100-120v, 0.5A/220-240v
Power consumption:
Operation status: Stylus Pro 7600 50W
Stylus Pro 9600 55W
Waiting status: Less than 15W (shifting time: 15 minutes)
Power OFF: Less than 0.7W
Insulation resistance: More than 10M ohms
(between AC line and chassis, DC 500V)
Dielectric strength: AC 1.0kV rms 1min.
AC1.2kV rms 1 sec.
(between AC line and chassis)
Leakage: Less than 0.25mA
International Energy Star Program Compliant:
(Complies with the power supply harmonic control
guideline)
1.2.8 Reliability
1.2.8.1 Total Print Volume
Stylus Pro 7600: 50,000 pages, 6.5million pass approx. (A1, 360×360 M/F, Bi-D)
Stylus Pro 9600: 20,000 pages, 5million pass approx. (B0, 360×360 M/F, Bi-D)
1.2.8.2 Print Head Life
Monochrome: 28billion shot / nozzle
Color: 28billion shot / nozzle
1.2.8.3 Maintenance Tank Life
Stylus Pro 7600: 11,000 pages approx.
(A1, plain paper, Speed mode, continuous print)
Stylus Pro 9600: 5,000 pages approx.
(B0, plain paper, Speed mode, continuous print)
1.2.8.4 Cutter Life average
1.2.8.5 Maintenance Parts (TBD)
RTC backup battery: (TBD)
Cleaning unit life average
(Cap assembly, Pomp assembly, Flushing box, Wiper)
Stylus Pro 7600: 18,000 pages approx.
(A1, plain paper, Speed mode, continuous print)
Stylus Pro 9600: 8,000 pages approx.
(B0, plain paper, Speed mode, continuous print)
Ink absorbent sponge for right/left borderless print: (TBD)
Table 1-18. Cutter life average
Paper Type
Stylus Pro 7600
For 24-inch standard roll paper,
3-step cutting
Stylus Pro 9600
For 44-inch standard roll paper,
3-step cutting
Coated paper Approx. 2000 sheets Approx. 2000 sheets
Film Approx. 1000 sheets Approx. 1000 sheets
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Basic Specifications 24
1.2.9 Ambient Conditions
1.2.9.1 Temperature/Humidity
Note *1: 120 hours max. at 60°C, one month max. at 40°C
*2: No condensation. These values are applicable only within the range as shown below.
Figure 1-2. Environmental Conditions: Temperature/Humidity
1.2.9.2 Vibration
During operation: 0.15G, 10 ~ 55Hz X,Y and Z directions
During storage: 0.50G, 10 ~ 55Hz X,Y and Z directions
1.2.9.3 Shock
During operation: 1G, 1ms max. X,Y and Z directions
During storage: 2G, 2ms max. X,Y and Z directions
NOTE 1: For storage, check that the print head is capped.
2:
Before transportation, check that the print head is capped, remove the ink
cartridges, and close the ink cartridge cover .
3:
If the power to the printer is OFF with the printer head uncapped, turn the
power ON with the ink cartridges installed. Then wait until capping is
completed, and turn the power OFF.
4:
If the printer is left standing at temperature of -15°C or below, the ink in the
print head and ink cartridges will freeze. If the ink is frozen, leave the printer
standing at temperature of 25°C for more than three hours before its use.
Table 1-19. Temperature/Humidity
Condition Temperature*1Humidity*2
During operation 10 ~ 35°C 20 ~ 80%
During storage -20 ~ 40°C 20 ~ 85%
During transport -20 ~ 60°C 5 ~ 85%
Temperature (°C)
Humidity (%)
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Basic Specifications 25
1.2.9.4 Surrounding Space
Provide the printer with an enough surrounding space to ensure proper installation of
accessories and replacement of consumables and easy work for daily maintenance.
From the front of the printer: 60 cm or more
From the rear and both sides of the printer: 15 cm or more
When Stylus Pro 7600 is not equipped with the dedicated stand:
Stylus Pro 7600 ejects paper downward. To prevent the ejected paper from
being obstructed, install the printer on a table or desk 60 to 80 cm high above
the floor and provide the printer with a 60 cm or more space in front.
In doing so, locate the front rubber feet of the printer close to the front end of
the table or the desk.
Figure 1-3. Surrounding Space
Stylus Pro 7600
(without stand)
* Shown above is Stylus Pro 7600
15 cm or more
60~80 cm or more
60 cm or more
15 cm or more
15 cm or more
60 cm or more
15 cm or more
15 cm or more 15 cm or more
Stylus Pro 7600 (with stand)/
Stylus Pro 9600
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Basic Specifications 26
1.2.10 Overall Dimensions
Figure 1-4. Overall Dimensions of Stylus Pro 7600
Dimensions of Unit Note 1: For “rearward paper eject”, the paper exit tray is brought down toward the rear.
2: For “frontward paper eject”, the paper exit tray is brought down toward the front.
1181.21
1100 754.11
1033.94
604.94
560.91
Model Condition Width (W) × Depth (D) × Height (H) (mm)
Stylus Pro 7600 Printer body 1100 ×805 × 561
Rearward paper eject 1100 × 754 × 1181
Frontward paper eject 1100 × 1034 × 1181
Stylus Pro 9600 Frontward paper eject 1624 × 691 × 1178
Rearward paper eject 1624 × 697 × 1178
Frontward paper eject 1624 × 1076 × 1178
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Basic Specifications 27
Figure 1-5. Overall Dimensions of Stylus Pro 9600
Weight
Note "*": Excluding the ink cartridges
1178.41
1624.1
1076.33
697
Model Condition Weight
Stylus Pro 7600 Printer body (without feet mounted) * About 43.5 kg
Feet About 10.5 kg
Stylus Pro 9600 Printer body (without feet mounted) * About 62.0 kg
Feet About 22.5 kg
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Basic Specifications 28
1.2.11 Accessories
This section describes the accessories and options for Stylus Pro 7600 and Stylus Pro
9600.
1.2.11.1 Accessories and Options for Stylus Pro 7600
Standard Accessories
AC Cable
Change Plug Adapter 3pin to 2pin
24 (2/3) inch roll paper spindle
Roll paper sample
Roll paper belt
Ink cartridges (110ml PK, MK, LK, C, M, LC, LM, Y)
Maintenance Tank
User's Manual
Driver & User's Manual
EPSON GrayBalancer & EPSON Printer Service Utility
Utility Software
Guarantee Card
Card holder
Carton Box
Special Options
Special stand (PX70MCU)
Manual cutter unit 24” (PX70MCU)
Normal tension spindle 24”<2”/3”> (PX70RPSD)
Black ink replacement kit (Draining cartridge, Cleaning cartridge)
Special Consumables
Ink cartridge (110ml)
Note : The 220 ml ink cartridges are supported only by Stylus Pro 9600.
Special paper (Refer to “1.2.5 Paper Specifications (p.15)” for paper type and
size)
Maintenance tank
Options Common to Other Printers
Auto cutter blade (PM90SPB)
Leo 2.13 (PRIFNW3S)
Fairbanks (PRIF14)
Name Model Number
110 ml (Standard Product)
Photo Black ICBK24
Matte Black ICMB24
Light Black ICGY24
Cyan ICC24
Magenta ICLC24
Light Cyan ICM24
Light Magenta ICLM24
Yellow ICY24
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Basic Specifications 29
1.2.11.2 Accessories and Options for Stylus Pro 9600
Standard accessories
AC Cable
Change Plug Adapter 3pin to 2pin
Special stand
44 (2/3) inch roll paper spindle
Roll paper sample
Roll paper belt
Ink cartridges (110ml PK, MK, LK, C, M, LC, LM, Y)
Maintenance Tank
User's Manual
Driver & User's Manual
EPSON GrayBalancer & EPSON Printer Service Utility
Utility Software
Guarantee Card
Card holder
Carton Box
Special Options
Manual cutter unit 44”(PX90MCU)
Normal tension spindle 44”<2”/3”> (PX90RPSD)
High tension spindle 44”<2”/3”> (PX90HSD)
Black ink replacement kit (Draining cartridge, Cleaning cartridge)
Special Consumables
Ink cartridge (110 ml/220 ml (only for pigment))
Note : The 220 ml ink cartridges are supported only by Stylus Pro 9600.
Special paper (Refer to “1.2.5 Paper Specifications (p.15)” for paper type and
size)
Maintenance tank
Options common to other printers
Auto cutter blade (PM90SPB)
Take-up roller (PMARFU1)
Leo 2.13 (PRIFNW3S)
Fairbanks (PRIF14)
Name Model Number
110 ml (Standard Product) 220ml (Option)*
Photo Black ICBK24 ICBK25
Matte Black ICMB24 ICMB25
Light Black ICGY24 ICGY25
Cyan ICC24 ICC25
Magenta ICLC24 ICLC25
Light Cyan ICM24 ICM25
Light Magenta ICLM24 ICLM25
Yellow ICY24 ICY25
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description External View and Parts Names 30
1.3 External View and Parts Names
EXTERNAL VIEW
Figure 1-6. External View and Parts Names
Paper Cover
Spindle Support
Control Panel
Control Panel
Paper Set Lever
Paper Feed Slot
Maintenance Tank
Dedicated Stand
Stylus Pro 7600: Option
Stylus Pro 9600: Standard
Ink Cartridge Box
Clamp
Paper Receive Basket
Stylus Pro 7600: Option
Stylus Pro 9600: Standard
Parallel Interface Connector
AC Inlet
USB Interface Connector
Connector Cover
Connector for Take-up Drive Unit
(Stylus Pro 9600 only)
Note : Shown above is Stylus Pro 7600
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 31
1.4 Operating Panel
1.4.1 Buttons and Functions
The operating panel contains the following buttons.
Figure 1-7. Panel Design
Power
Pause
SelecType (Panel setting menu shift, setting item shift (down))
Paper Feed ∆ (setup value +)
Paper Feed ∇ (setup value -)
Paper Source (Item shift (up))
Cut / Eject (Enter)
Cleaning
1.4.1.1 Functions of Buttons
Table 1-20. Panel Functions
Switch Function (Independent) Function
(in SelecType mode)
Function
(+PowerOn )
Power Power ON/OFF - -
Pause Pause / ready,
reset (press for 3 seconds)
Leaving SelectType
mode
Maintenance
mode
SelecType During printing
Printer status menu shift
Except above
Panel setting mode shift
Cutter replace menu
(press for 5 seconds)
Selection of SelecType
menu (major
categories)
-
Cut / Eject Eject sheet *1
Feed roll paper from cutter
mark to cutting position and
cut. (Auto Cut)*1
Feed roll paper to the manual
cutting position (cutter
OFF).*1
Confirm and save
setting values
-
Paper Feed ∆Paper feed (reverse)*2(setup value +)
Increase setup value
-
Paper Feed ∇Paper feed (forward)*3(setup value -)
Decrease setup value
-
Paper Source Select paper source Selection of SelecType
items (minor
categories)
-
Cleaning Cleans all heads
(press for 3 seconds)
- -
Paper Source+
Eject+paper feed
- - Maintenance
mode 2
Eject + Paper
feedD + Paper feed
Self-diagnosis
mode
Cleaning + Paper
Source + Eject
--F/W download
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 32
Note *1: It interrupts ink drying and runs the specified operation.
*2: 1.27cm/second (5.0 cps) paper feeding for 2 seconds after the button is pressed.
13.2cm/second (52. cps) paper feed if pressed for another 2 seconds. Maximum
reverse feeding is 20 cm by one press of the button.
*3: 1.27 cm/second (5.0 cps) paper feed for 2 seconds after the button is pressed.
13.2 cm/second (52. cps) paper feed if pressed for another 2 seconds.
1.4.1.2 LEDs
The printer is equipped with the following LEDs.
The LEDs indicate printer status as follows:
Table 1-21. LEDs
LED (color) Display Printer Status
Operate (Green) On Printer power ON.
Blink Printer processing data, or in power OFF sequence.
Paper Out (Red) On Paper out, end of roll, confusion of roll paper and sheet,
paper set lever is released, or paper is thick for cleaning
Blink Paper jam error, paper cutting error, paper not straight,
paper recognition error, or paper (sheet) eject failure
Pause (Green) On Pause.
Blink Cleaning print head, or ink drying.
Ink Out (K1) (Red) On Black ink1 end, or wrong black ink
Blink Black ink1 low.
Ink Out (K2) (Red) On Black ink2 end, or wrong black ink
Blink Black ink2 low.
Ink Out (C) (Red) On Cyan ink end, or wrong cyan ink
Blink Cyan ink low.
Ink Out (M) (Red) On Magenta ink end, or wrong magenta ink
Blink Magenta ink low.
Ink Out (LC) (Red) On Light cyan ink end, or light cyan ink
Blink Light cyan ink low.
Ink Out (LM) (Red) On Light magenta ink end, or wrong light magenta ink
Blink Magenta ink low.
Ink Out (Y) (Red) On Yellow ink end, or wrong yellow ink
Blink Yellow ink low.
Maintenance tank
(Red)
On Maintenance tank full error, or No maintenance tank error
Blink Maintenance tank almost full
Roll, Auto cut (Green) On Roll, Auto cut is selected.
Blink Confusion of roll paper and sheet, roll paper is not set.
Roll, Cutter off
(Green)
On Roll, Cutter off is selected.
Blink Confusion of roll paper and sheet, roll paper is not set.
Sheet (Green) On Sheet is selected.
Blink Confusion of roll paper and sheet, sheet is not set.
Table 1-21. LEDs (continued)
LED (color) Display Printer Status
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 33
1.4.2 Indications on the Panel
1.4.2.1 lED Indications in Normal Mode
Operate
Paper Out
Pause
Ink Out
Maintenance tank
Table 1-22.
Displayed functions Indicator status
While processing data, during power OFF sequence Blink
Fatal error Blink
Reset, timer IC reset/NVRAM clear On
With power ON and in status other than those above On
F/W updating completed On
Table 1-23.
Displayed functions Indicator status
Out of paper, end of roll On
Confusion of roll paper and sheet On
Paper set lever is released On
Paper is thick for cleaning On
Paper jam Blink
Paper cutting error Blink
Paper not straight Blink
Paper check error Blink
Paper (sheet) eject failure Blink
Fatal error Blink
Reset, timer IC reset/NVRAM clear On
Maintenance call On for 100ms at intervals of 5 seconds
F/W updating completed On
Table 1-24.
Displayed functions Indicator status
Print ready On
In SelecType mode Off
During pause Off
During ink drying time Blink
During ink sequence Blink
Other errors Off
Fatal error Blink
Reset, timer IC reset/NVRAM clear On
Ink end (warning) Blink
F/W updating completed On
Table 1-25.
Displayed functions Indicator status
Out of corresponded ink
No cartridge for corresponded ink
Wrong cartridge for corresponded ink
Illegal cartridge for corresponded ink
On
Corresponded ink level low Blink
Fatal error Blink
Reset, timer IC reset/NVRAM clear On
F/W updating completed On
Table 1-26.
Displayed functions Indicator status
Maintenance tank full
No maintenance tank
On
Maintenance tank almost full warning Blink
Fatal error Blink
Reset, timer IC reset / NVRAM clear On
F/W updating completed On
Table 1-24.
Displayed functions Indicator status
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 34
1.4.2.2 LCD Indications in Normal Mode
Note *1: When PG setting = WIDE or WIDER, “W” is displayed at the left of lower line.
When PG setting = NARROW, “N” is displayed at the left of lower line.
*2: Ink remaining / available rate of maintenance tank are displayed with indicator.
*3: Suction is displayed with indicator.
*4: Character strings on the second line resulting from line feed above are displayed on
the second line of LCD panel.
*5: It is displayed only for page delay.
NOTE: For details of error display, refer to “3.2.1 Errors (p.123)”.
Table 1-27. Indications (in Normal Mode)
Functions LCD panel display Indicator PG
setting
Ready to print READY *2 *1
Processing data PRINTING *2 *1
In power OFF sequence POWER OFF
In ink sequence WAIT *1
Initial filling INK CHARGING nnn%
Pause PAUSE *2
Reset RESET
Initializing WAIT
Waiting for paper initialize start
trigger
PRESS PAUSE BUTTON
Initializing paper WAIT
Out of paper PAPER OUT
Difference with roll paper and
sheet
LOAD XXX PAPER
Paper set lever is released LOAD PAPER *3
Paper jam PAPER JAM
Cover open COVER OPEN
Paper set lever is released during
operation
SECURE PAPER LEVER
Paper cutting error PAPER NOT CUT
Paper not straight PAPER NOT STRAIGHT
Paper check error RELOAD PAPER
End of roll PAPER OUT
Problem with paper output (sheet) RELOAD PAPER
Ink out INK OUT
Ink low INK LOW *1
No ink cartridge NO INK CARTRIDGE
Defective ink cartridge SET INK CARTRIDGE
Wrong cartridge WRONG CARTRIDGE
Command error COMMAND ERROR
Type B interface error OPTION I/F ERROR
Fatal error SERVICE. REQ. nn
Maintenance request MAINTENANCE REQ. nn *1
Timer IC reset/NVRAM clear WAIT
After replacing ink cartridge
Ink cover open CLOSE INK CART. COVER
Wrong ink cartridge (dye/
pigment)
WRONG CARTRIDGE
Non-genuine cartridge INVALID CARTRIDGE
Maintenance tank almost full
warning
MAINTENANCE TANK
ALMOST FULL
Maintenance tank full MAINTENANCE TANK FULL
No maintenance tank NO MAINTENANCE TANK
Unable to print error UNABLE TO PRINT
Paper is too thick for cleaning REMOVE PAPER
Ink is not enough for cleaning NOT ENOUGH INK
Ink cartridge replacing SET INK CARTRIDGE
Ink drying INK DRY nn MIN *5
Restart request TURN PRINTER PWR OFF AND
THEN ON
Restarting request TURN PWR OFF AND ON
Table 1-27. Indications (in Normal Mode) (continued)
Functions LCD panel display Indicator PG
setting
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 35
1.4.3 SelecType
1.4.3.1 Outline
Startup
The SelecType mode is selected by pressing the SelecType button during print
ready, warning, or maintenance call status. The printer is then automatically
incapable of printing.
Operation
1. The Printer setting menu can be entered by pushing the SelecType button
during menu shift available state (Print ready, no paper). It is shifted to setting
menu select mode, and the setting menu is displayed on the left side of the
LCD upper line.
2. Each setting menu is displayed one after another by pressing Paper Feed ∆∇
buttons in the setting menu select mode. It is shifted to setting item select
menu by pressing the SelecType button. [Setting menu] is displayed on the
upper line, and [Setting item] is displayed on the lower line.
3. The setting menu is displayed one after another by pressing Paper Feed ∆∇
buttons in the setting item select mode. It is shifted to setting value select
mode of the setting item by pressing the SelecType button. [Setting item] is
displayed on the upper line, and [Setting value] is displayed on the lower line.
The ‘*’ represents the current setup value.
4. Setting value is displayed on the lower line one after another by pressing
Paper Feed ∆∇ buttons in the setting value select mode if the setting value can
be changed. The ‘*’ represents the current setup value.
5. When the Enter button is pressed in the setting value select mode, the
displayed setting value is entered as the current setting value. If it has a
corresponded operation, it is started. No operation occurs if ‘*’ is already
displayed.
6. It returns to the setting item select menu by pressing the Paper Source button
in the setting value select mode. It returns to the setting menu select mode by
pressing the Paper Source button in the setting item select menu.
Termination
•The printer enters the menu shift available status when the Pause button is
pressed in the SelecType mode.
•The printer enters the menu shift available status when the Paper source
button is pushed once in setting menu select mode.
•The printer enters the menu shift available status when setting initialization is
executed.
•The printer enters the print ready status after the nozzle check pattern or the
status sheet is printed.
•The printer enters the menu shift available status after black ink is replaced.
•The printer enters the menu shift available status after the cutter is replaced.
•The printer returns to the menu shift available status when Pause button is
pressed in any modes.
NOTE: Under the special condition, it sometimes can not return to the status.
Panel display
Character strings on the second line in the following list are displayed on the
second line of LCD panel. Setup values are displayed on the second line of LCD
panel.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 36
1.4.3.2 Panel Setting Menu Item
Table 1-28. Panel setting menu item
Top menu
(Panel display) Item menu Panel display Setup value (Underlined: Default) See
Printer setting menu
(PRINTER SETTING MENU)
PG setting PLATEN GAP AUTO, NARROW, WIDE, WIDER p.40
Page line PAGELINE ON OFF p.41
Interface switching INTERFACE AUTO PARALLEL, USB, OPTION p.41
Code page switching CODEPAGE PC437, PC850 p.41
Roll paper margin ROLL MARG T/B 15MM, 3MM,15MM p.41
Detect paper width PAPERSIZECHK ON OFF p.42
Detect skew error PAPERALIGNCHK ON OFF p.42
Job timeout setting TIMEOUT OFF, 30sec, 60sec, 180sec, 300sec p.42
No margin print setting NO MARGIN L / R ONLY, 1 CUT, 2 CUTS p.43
Cutter adjustment CUTTER ADJ EXEC p.44
Auto margin refresh REFRESH MRGN ON, OFF p.44
Initialize setting value INITSETTING EXEC. p.45
Test print menu
(TESTPRINTMENU)
Nozzle check pattern print NOZZLECHECK PRINT p.45
Status print STATUSCHECK PRINT p.46
Job information print JOBINFO PRINT p.48
Printer status menu
(PRINTERSTATUS MENU)
Firmware version VERSION BXxxxx (D or P) p.49
Printable pages of ink
cartridge
Black1
PRINTABLEPG
K1 xxxxxxxPG* p.49
Black2 K2 xxxxxxxPG*
Cyan C xxxxxxxPG*
Magenta M xxxxxxxPG*
Light Cyan LC xxxxxxxPG*
Light Magenta LM xxxxxxxPG*
Yellow Y xxxxxxxPG*
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 37
Printer status menu
(PRINTERSTATUS MENU) Ink remaining
Black1
INKLEFT
K1 XXXXX (XXXXX is one of followings)
(0%,nn%,E* F,E** F,E*** F,E**** F,E*****F) p.49
Black2 K2 XXXXX (XXXXX is one of followings)
(0%,nn%,E* F,E** F,E*** F,E**** F,E*****F)
Cyan C XXXXX (XXXXX is one of followings)
(0%,nn%,E* F,E** F,E*** F,E**** F,E*****F)
Magenta M XXXXX (XXXXX is one of followings)
(0%,nn%,E* F,E** F,E*** F,E**** F,E*****F)
Light Cyan LC XXXXX (XXXXX is one of followings)
(0%,nn%,E* F,E** F,E*** F,E**** F,E*****F)
Light Magenta LM XXXXX (XXXXX is one of followings)
(0%,nn%,E* F,E** F,E*** F,E**** F,E*****F)
Yellow Y XXXXX (XXXXX is one of followings)
(0%,nn%,E* F,E** F,E*** F,E**** F,E*****F)
Printer status menu
(PRINTERSTATUS MENU)
Maintenance tank count MAINT TANK E F,E* F,E** F,E*** F,E**** F,E*****F p.49
Use counter Ink counter USECOUNT INK xxxxx.x ml p.50
Paper counter PPR xxxxx.x cm
Use counter clear Ink counter clear USECOUNTCLR INK EXEC p.50
Paper counter clear PAPER EXEC
Job history (10 jobs) JOBHISTORY No.0-No.9 p.50
Job history clear JOB HSTRY CLR EXEC p.50
Total print pages TOTAL PRINTS nnnnnnPG (Max. 6 figures) p.50
Use life
Cutter life
SERVICELIFE
CUTTER XXXXXXX (XXXXX is one of followings)
(0%,nn%,E* F,E** F,E*** F,E**** F,E*****F) p.51
CR motor life monitor CR MOTOR XXXXXXX (XXXXX is one of followings)
(0%,nn%,E* F,E** F,E*** F,E**** F,E*****F) p.51
PF motor life monitor PF MOTOR XXXXXXX (XXXXX is one of followings)
(0%,nn%,E* F,E** F,E*** F,E**** F,E*****F) p.52
Head unit life monitor HEAD UNIT XXXXXXX (XXXXX is one of followings)
(0%,nn%,E* F,E** F,E*** F,E**** F,E*****F) p.52
Cleaning unit life monitor CL UNIT XXXXXXX (XXXXX is one of followings)
(0%,nn%,E* F,E** F,E*** F,E**** F,E*****F) p.53
Table 1-28. Panel setting menu item (continued)
Top menu
(Panel display) Item menu Panel display Setup value (Underlined: Default) See
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 38
User Paper Setup Menu
(PAPERCONFIG. MENU)
Paper select PAPERNUMBER STD, 1~10 p.56
Print paper thickness detection pattern THICKNESS PAT PRINT*4
Select paper thickness number THICKNESS NUM 1~17 *5
Cutting pressure CUTPRESSURE 0%~100%
Cutting method CUTMETHOD 3STEPS, 4STEPS
Paper feed adjustment PPRFEEDADJ -1.00%~1.00%
Ink drying time DRYINGTIME 0.0sec~5.0sec
Vacuum SUCTION NORM, LOW
Print adjustment (MW) PRINTADJ 0 ~ 5 ~ 9
Maintenance menu
(MAINTENANCE)
Powerful cleaning PWRCLEANING EXEC p.60
Black ink replacement
(only for pigment printer)
Replace BK ink BLKINKCHNG EXEC p.64
Release ink lever RELEASE INKLEVER -
Remove all ink cartridges REMOVE ALL INKCARTRIDGES -
Select ink set after change SELECTINKSET
* Select 2 types from following depending on the situation
#1 PHOTO:#2 LGT
#1 MAT:#2 MAT
#1 MAT:#2 LGT
#1 PHOTO:#2LGT (2 cartridges change)
#1 MAT:#2 LGT
#1 MAT:#2 MAT (2 cartridges change)
Set draining cartridge INSERTDRAINING CARTRIDGEIN#X -
Ink draining DRAINING xxx%
Set cleaning cartridge INSERTCLEANING CARTRIDGEIN#X -
Cleaning CLEANING xxx%
Cleaning solution draining DRAINING xxx%
Set draining cartridge INSERTDRAINING CARTRIDGEIN#X -
* Repeat operation after “SELECT INK SET” for 2 cartridges change.
Ink charging INKCHARGING xxx%
Set all ink cartridges INSERTALLINK CARTRIDGES -
CSIC information * See “ BK ink cartridge replacement (p64)” for details
Cutter Replacement
Replace cutter CUT.REPLACE EXEC. p.60
Cover open guide OPENLOWERCOVER -
Cutter replacement guide REPLACECUTTER -
Cover close guide CLOSE LOWER COVER -
Table 1-28. Panel setting menu item (continued)
Top menu
(Panel display) Item menu Panel display Setup value (Underlined: Default) See
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 39
Gap adjustment menu
(HEADALIGNMENT MENU)
Paper thickness (in 0.1mm units) PAPERTHKNS STD, 0.0MMÅ`1.6MM p.60
Adjustment pattern select and print ALIGNMENT BI-D BLACK, BI-D ALL, UNI-D ALL
Bi-D adjustment Black
240CPS #1 K1 1~5~9
240CPS #2 K1 1~5~9
190CPS #3 K1 1~5~9
Bi-D adjustment All color
240CPS VSD1 Total 7 colors #1 K1 ~ #1 Y 1~5~9
240CPS VSD2 Total 7 colors #2 K1 ~ #2 Y 1~5~9
190CPS VSD4 Total 7 colors #3 K1 ~ #3 Y 1~5~9
Head gap adjustment
(Uni-D)
240CPS VSD1 Total 6 colors
(K1 is standard)
#1 K2 1~5~9
::
#1 Y 1~5~9
240CPS VSD2 Total 6 colors
(K1 is standard)
#2 K2 1~5~9
: :
#2 Y 1~5~9
190CPS VSD4 Total 6 colors
(K1 is standard)
#3 K2 1~5~9
::
#3 Y 1~5~9
Table 1-28. Panel setting menu item (continued)
Top menu
(Panel display) Item menu Panel display Setup value (Underlined: Default) See
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 40
1.4.3.3 PG Setting
Selecting this mode allows the user to set the platen gap. The relationship between
panel setting, command setting (SN command), and actual platen gap position is shown
below.
Note 1: Only in this case, SN command is ignored. When paper thickness is 0.15mm, it is
operated with minimum Bi-D value and minimum SN(PG).
2: When “Wide” or “Wider” is set, “W” is displayed on the left side of LCD lower line.
3: When “Narrow” is set, “N” is displayed on the left side of LCD lower line.
Table 1-29. PG Setting Values
Paper thickness
sensor
PH
command Panel SN command Actual PG
position Note
Less than 0.3mm 00H Narrow - Minimum *1
Standard Minimum *1
Wide Small
Wider Middle
01H-06H Narrow Minimum Minimum
Small Minimum
Middle Small
Big Middle
Standard Minimum Minimum
Small Small
Middle Middle
Big Big
Wide Minimum Small
Small Middle
Middle Big
Big Big
Wider Minimum Middle
Small Big
Middle Big
Big Big
07H-12H - - Big
More than 0.3mm
Less than 0.7mm
00H-06H Narrow Minimum Small
Small Small
Middle Small
Big Middle
Standard Minimum Small
Small Small
Middle Middle
Big Big
Wide Minimum Small
Small Middle
Middle Big
Big Big
Wider Minimum Middle
Small Big
Middle Big
Big Big
07H-12H - - Big
More than 0.7mm - - - Big
Table 1-29. PG Setting Values (continued)
Paper thickness
sensor
PH
command Panel SN command Actual PG
position Note
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 41
The actual platen gap may be set to any of the following
1.4.3.4 Page Lines
Selecting this mode allows the user to set the page line print mode. Setup is the same as
horizontal lines ON command (AC 02H 00H 00H 02H) in the automatic cutting setup.
The solid line type is used.
1.4.3.5 Interface Select
Selecting this mode allows selection of the parallel, USB, or optional interface, or
automatic interface selection.
1.4.3.6 Code Page Switching
Selecting this mode allows switching between PC437 and PC850 for the code page.
1.4.3.7 Roll Paper Margin
Setting this panel allows switching roll paper margin, all sides 3 mm / all sides 15 mm
/ top and bottom 15 mm, right and left 3 mm. This setting is only valid for roll paper. It’
s not valid for sheets. This setting change only margin, and doesn’ t change image size.
If margin = 3 mm is set
Printing positions of vertical line and horizontal line are same as the theoretical
paper size.
If margin = 15 mm, or Top/Bottom15 mm is set
Printing positions of vertical line and horizontal line are widened by 12 mm for all
sides or only top and bottom. (See Figure 1-8)
If printable area is more than X = 15 mm from the right edge of paper, the portion is
clipped.
Vertical line is not printed. (See Figure 1-9)
NOTE 1: The top margin is also set with “Set the top margin” (SN command).
Actual top margin is decided as follows:
•Panel setup value (top margin)>Paper top margin
(Panel setup value is used as the top margin)
•Panel setup value (top margin)<Paper top margin
(Paper top margin is used as the top margin)
2:
Under special conditions, the right / left margin can be set to 0.
Table 1-30.
Position Gap width Application
Wide 2.6 mm Thick paper
Medium 2.2 mm Reduce the smearing on the printed image
of thin paper.
Narrow 1.2 mm Thin paper (Default)
Minimum 0.7 mm Thin film (Film, glossy media)
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 42
Figure 1-8. Roll Paper Margin (1)
Figure 1-9. Roll Paper Margin (2)
1.4.3.8 Detect Paper Width
When the paper width detection function is OFF, the printer can print on the platen if
the image to be printed is bigger than the set paper (larger than borderless print area).
Therefore the user must bear responsibility in selecting this function OFF setting. At
paper initial feeding or print starting, the paper is fed by the distance between grid
roller and #1 nozzle unconditionally. The print starts from that position. (No back-feed
in the other sequences) Even when paper has too low reflection to be detected, the
paper is fed so as not to print on the platen.
The same specifications are applied to sheets and auto loading.
The above-mentioned paper width detection OFF sequence is just for the first page in
the case of roll paper.
The paper auto cutting function does not check whether paper is cut successfully or
not.
1.4.3.9 Detect Skew Error
With PAPER NOT STRAIGHT = OFF setting, the “PAPER NOT STRAIGHT” error
will not be displayed and printing will be continued.
With this setting, even if the printing image is out of paper because the paper is not
straight, the printer will not inform the user of such an error. Therefore, the user must
bear responsibility in selecting this function OFF setting.
1.4.3.10 Job Timeout Setting
When print data is interrupted longer than setting time although data receiving is
available, the print job is regarded as the end, and the printer runs paper feeding
operation.
Roll Paper Width X
Printable Area
X (*)
X
X
X
Vertical
Line
Cut Position or Border
Roll Paper Width X
Printable Area
X (*)
X
X
X
Clipped Area
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 43
1.4.3.11 No margin print setting
No margin print mode can be switched with these settings.
Following 3 modes can be selected;
*1. When 4 sides no margin / 2 cuts is selected, vertical length will be 2mm shorter than actual
print size after cutting.
*2. When roll paper cutter OFF and page line print ON, page line is printed for each cutting
position including page top cutting.
*3. We recommend 6cm for glossy paper, and 10cm for other papers.
No margin setting
Table 1-31.
Mode Operation
Left/right no margin (default) Only right/left margin can be set to 0. Top/bottom margin is
set with roll paper margin setting.
4 sides no margin / 1 cut Left/right and top/bottom margin can be set to 0. Cutting
methods are following;
• After JOB is started, it cuts off the paper edge with the
minimum margin during printing.
• There is no margin between pages during JOB. It cuts off
paper on the border of image.
• After JOB is completed, it cuts off paper at the end of
image.
4 sides no margin / 2 cuts Left/right and top/bottom margin can be set to 0. Cutting
methods are following;
• After JOB is started, it cuts off the paper edge with the
minimum margin during printing.
• It cuts off paper at the end of image each page.
• It cuts off paper after paper feeding with the minimum
margin (*3).
Table 1-32.
No margin mode Right/left no margin
No margin mode
4 sides no margin
(1 cut)
4 sides no margin
(2 cuts)
Printer operation
Driver setting No margin print No margin print
Auto cut
No margin print
Auto cut
Panel setting
(Printer setting menu)
NO MARGIN L/R
ONLY
NO MARGIN
1 CUT
NO MARGIN
2 CUTS
Notes Default • Uneven coloring
may occur for some
image, because top
edge is cut with
print interruption.
• Continuous data
may be left slightly
on the top/bottom
because of cutter
position gap.
• Uneven coloring
may occur for some
image, because top
edge is cut with
print interruption.
• The top/bottom is
cut inside of border
to prevent margin
from leaving on
paper. Vertical
length will be 2mm
shorter than actual
print size after
cutting.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 44
1.4.3.12 Cutter position adjustment
Cutter position can be adjusted with this mode. Cutter position adjustment pattern is
printed, and the cutter is adjusted with cutter position number entered by users.
NOTE: This adjustment is effective for top/bottom no margin print.
Setting procedure
1. Set paper.
2. Enter Cutter position adjustment menu with the panel.
3. Print cutter position adjustment pattern.
4. Select the best pattern number and enter the number.
NOTE 1: When “1 cut” is selected with panel, it is not operated.
2:
Setting value can be selected from 1 to 17 with “Paper Feed” button.
Level structure of Cutter position adjustment menu
Cutter position adjustment pattern
Output paper size : A4
Font : Built-in font
Print sample : See following picture.
Figure 1-10. Cutter position adjustment pattern
Number in print pattern and cutter position
1.4.3.13 Auto margin refresh
When this setting is ON, paper edge is automatically cut to prevent print dirt after 4
sides no margin print. The cutting length is depends on the minimum cut length at this
time.
Enter
CUTTER ADJ
*8
CUTTER ADJ
EXEC
PRINTING ALGNMNT
PATTERN
SelecType
PRINTER SETUP
CUTTER ADJ
Paper Source
SelecType
PRINTER SETUP
Paper Source
SelecType
READY
 
Paper Source
Pause
Number in print pattern 1 2 3 ... ... 15 16 17
Adjustment value ... ...
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 45
1.4.3.14 Panel Setup Value Initialization
Selecting this mode allows the user to return all the values set on the panel to the
default values.
Initializing items are following;
1.4.3.15 Nozzle Check Pattern Printing
Selecting this mode allows the user to print the firmware version, the waste ink
counter, and the nozzle check pattern.
Order of colors from left
Black1, Cyan, Magenta, LightCyan, LightMagenta, Yellow - Black2
Each parameter indicates the following;
<Z>: N for Stylus Pro 7600, W for Stylus Pro9600
<xxxx>: firmware version
<I>: D for dye, P for pigment
<yyy>: Maintenance tank available quantity
<aaaaaaa>: total ink counter just before print the last nozzle check
pattern (7 figures)
<bbbbbbb>: total ink counter just before print the nozzle check pattern
(7 figures)
<ccccccc>: value of <aaaaaaa>-<bbbbbbb> (7 figures)
<ddddd.d>: total paper counter just before print the last nozzle check
pattern (5.1 figures)
<eeeee.e>: total paper counter just before print the nozzle check pattern
(5.1 figures)
<fffff.f>:
value of <ddddd.d>-<eeeee.e> (5.1 figures)
Figure 1-11. Nozzle Check Pattern Printing
Table 1-33.
Setting item After initialization
PG setting STANDARD
Page line ON
I/F switching AUTO
Code page switching PC437
Roll paper margin setting T/B 15mm
Paper width detection ON
Paper skew detection ON
Job timeout setting 30 sec
No margin print 1 cut
Cutter position adjustment (Manufacture setting)
Ink end warning message ON
Versi n : B<Z><xxxx> <I>
Maintenance Tank : <yyy>%
Current Ink C unt : <aaaaaaa>g Prev.Ink C unt :<bbbbbbb>g C - P:<ccccccc>g
Current Paper C unt: <ddddd.d>cm Prev.Paper C unt:<eeeee.e>cm C - P:<fffff.f>cm
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 46
1.4.3.16 Status Printing
Selecting this mode allows the user to print the current panel settings.
Print status sheet with the following specifications.
Print paper size:A4
Font: Built-in font
Output procedure:
1. Press the [SelecType] button on the control panel to enter the panel setting
menu.
2. Press the [Paper Feed ∆] or [Paper Feed ∇] to display “TEST PRINT
MENU”.
3. Press the [SelecType] button to enter the item menu select status and then
press the [Paper Feed ∆] or [Paper Feed ∇] again to display [STATUS
CHECK].
4. Select the item by pressing the [SelecType] button again.
5. Press the [Enter] button to execute status sheet printing.
Explanation of contents:
Note *1: Details of display of remaining ink volume in Maintenance Tank
*2: Details of display of remainder of cutter life, CR motor life, PF motor life, Print
Head life or Cleaning Unit life
*3: The ink cartridge information is displayed based on the information inside the CSIC
on the ink cartridge.
*4: This Color Adjust ID information (ID1) is the same as can be checked through the
printer driver.
#1: XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX Color Adjust ID information (ID1) *4
#2: XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX Color Adjust ID information (ID2M)
Type-B Whether optional Type-B I/F is mounted or not
Current Setting Setting contents of “PRINTER SETTING MENU” in SelecType mode
Printer Status
Version Installed firmware version
Total Print Total number of printed sheets
Use Ink Ink consumption counter value (total cumulative
consumption by printing, flushing and cleaning)
Use Paper Paper consumption counter value (total
cumulative paper feed amount by printing)
Mainte Tank Remaining ink volume in Maintenance Tank *1
Cutter Life Remainder of cutter life *2
CR Motor Remainder of CR motor life *2
PF Motor Remainder of PF motor life *2
Head Remainder of Print Head life *2
Cleaner Remainder of Cleaning Unit life *2
Ink Cartridge *3
Manufature Display of manufacturer
Ink Type Display of ink kind
Ink Color Display of ink color
Ink Capacity Display of capacity to contain ink
Ink Left Display of volume of remaining ink *1
Production Date Year and month of manufacture
Expire Date Expiration of guaranteed period for use
Ink Life Guaranteed period for use after unpacking
Passed Time having elapsed after unpacking
Printable Sheet Number of sheets which can be printed with the
remaining ink (calculated value)
100 ~ 81% E∗∗∗∗∗F
80 ~ 61% E∗∗∗∗ F
60 ~ 41% E∗∗∗ F
40 ~ 21% E∗∗ F
20% ~ 10% E∗F
Less than 10% nn%
0% (End) 0%
100 ~ 81% E∗∗∗∗∗F
80 ~ 61% E∗∗∗∗ F
60 ~ 41% E∗∗∗ F
40 ~ 21% E∗∗ F
20% ~ 1% E∗F
Less than 1% FF
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 47
Figure 1-12. Status Sheet Print Pattern
#1 XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX
#2 XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX
Type B :Uninstalled
- Current Setting +------------------+- Printer Status -+-----------------
Platen Gap :Standard | Version :BWxxxx P
Page Line :On | Total Prints :xxxxxx PG
Interface :Parallel | Use Ink :xxxxxx.x ml
Code Page :PC437 | Use Paper :xxxxxx.x cm
Margine :T/B15mm | Mainte. Tank :E[*****]F
No Margine :1 Cut | Cutter Life :E[*****]F
Refresh :On | CR Motor :E[*****]F
Paper Size Check :ON | PF Motor :E[*****]F
Paper Align Check :ON | Head :E[*****]F
Time Out :30sec | Cleaner :E[*****]F
- Ink Cartridge --+------------------+-----------------+-----------------
Manufacturer : EPSON GENUINE INK EPSON GENUINE INK EPSON GENUINE INK
Ink Type : Pigment Pigment Pigment
Ink Color : Photo Black LightBlack Cyan
Ink Capacity : 110ml 110ml 110ml
Ink Left : E[*****]F E[*****]F E[*****]F
Production Date : `02/03 `02/03 `02/03
Expire Date : `03/10 `03/10 `03/10
Ink Life : 06 months 06 months 06 months
Passed : 02 months 02 months 02 months
Printable Sheet : 120 pages 120 pages 120 pages
------------------+------------------+-----------------+-----------------
EPSON GENUINE INK EPSON GENUINE INK EPSON GENUINE INK EPSON GENUINE INK
Pigment Pigment Pigment Pigment
Magenta LightCyan LightMagenta Yellow
110ml 110ml 110ml 110ml
E[*****]F E[*****]F E[*****]F E[*****]F
`02/03 `02/03 `02/03 `02/03
`03/10 `03/10 `03/10 `03/10
06 months 06 months 06 months 06 months
02 months 02 months 02 months 02 months
120 pages 120 pages 120 pages 120 pages
------------------+------------------+-----------------+-----------------
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 48
1.4.3.17 Job Information Print
With this mode, users can print job information saved in the printer. (Max. 10Job)
Definition of job is followings;
Adjustment patterns and test patterns
(Gap adjustment, Nozzle check pattern, Status print, Cutter position, Paper
thickness detection)
Print data from host
Job information print
The printer prints job information print pattern in the following specifications;
Print paper size:A4
Font: Built-in font
Print sample: See the chart at right.
NOTE:
For details of Job Information, see
“1.4.3.30 Job information (p55)”.
Figure 1-13. Job information print pattern
No.0
Doc Name :
User Name : I/F Type : Unknown Job State : Complete
UsedInk : 123.456 ml Used Paper : 12345 mm (w) x 12345 mm (h)
Print Start Time : 00/00/0000 : 00 Used Time : 12345678 min
No.1
Doc Name :
User Name : I/F Type : Unknown Job State : Complete
UsedInk : 123.456 ml Used Paper : 12345 mm (w) x 12345 mm (h)
Print Start Time : 00/00/0000 : 00 Used Time : 12345678 min
No.2
Doc Name :
User Name : I/F Type : Unknown Job State : Complete
UsedInk : 123.456 ml Used Paper : 12345 mm (w) x 12345 mm (h)
Print Start Time : 00/00/0000 : 00 Used Time : 12345678 min
No.3
Doc Name :
User Name : I/F Type : Unknown Job State : Complete
UsedInk : 123.456 ml Used Paper : 12345 mm (w) x 12345 mm (h)
Print Start Time : 00/00/0000 : 00 Used Time : 12345678 min
No.4
Doc Name :
User Name : I/F Type : Unknown Job State : Complete
UsedInk : 123.456 ml Used Paper : 12345 mm (w) x 12345 mm (h)
Print Start Time : 00/00/0000 : 00 Used Time : 12345678 min
No.5
Doc Name :
User Name : I/F Type : Unknown Job State : Complete
UsedInk : 123.456 ml Used Paper : 12345 mm (w) x 12345 mm (h)
Print Start Time : 00/00/0000 : 00 Used Time : 12345678 min
No.6
Doc Name :
User Name : I/F Type : Unknown Job State : Complete
UsedInk : 123.456 ml Used Paper : 12345 mm (w) x 12345 mm (h)
Print Start Time : 00/00/0000 : 00 Used Time : 12345678 min
No.7
Doc Name :
User Name : I/F Type : Unknown Job State : Complete
UsedInk : 123.456 ml Used Paper : 12345 mm (w) x 12345 mm (h)
Print Start Time : 00/00/0000 : 00 Used Time : 12345678 min
No.8
Doc Name :
User Name : I/F Type : Unknown Job State : Complete
UsedInk : 123.456 ml Used Paper : 12345 mm (w) x 12345 mm (h)
Print Start Time : 00/00/0000 : 00 Used Time : 12345678 min
No.9
Doc Name :
User Name : I/F Type : Unknown Job State : Complete
UsedInk : 123.456 ml Used Paper : 12345 mm (w) x 12345 mm (h)
Print Start Time : 00/00/0000 : 00 Used Time : 12345678 min
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 49
1.4.3.18 Firmware version
Firmware version is displayed as following,
Note 1: xxxx:interface controller version (4 letters)
2: N=Narrow machine: Stylus Pro 7600
W=Wide machine: Stylus Pro 9600
3: The character on the right of lower line represents Dye/Pigment mode.
P: Pigment mode, D: Dye mode
1.4.3.19 Printable pages of each ink cartridge
Printable sheets (estimation) of installed each ink cartridge are displayed.
The formula is following;
Printable sheets = ink remain after print / ink used
Note 1: Printable pages within IR command range are calculated and displayed.
2: When there is no value to be displayed, the panel displays “---”.
1.4.3.20 Ink remaining
Note 1: After ink remaining is near end, the ink remaining is displayed with % on the panel. 0%
is displayed on the panel for ink end.
2: When initial filling is done by user after the package opened, ink consumption for initial
filling is subtracted, and ink remaining of each ink cartridge is displayed as 100%. Ink
use count is started at that time. When ink cartridge is replaced, ink use is counted/
displayed according to “Ink system specifications.”
1.4.3.21 Maintenance tank count
How to calculate
Present available rate of maintenance tank is displayed.
Display
Available rate
Note : When initial filling is done by user after the package opened, maintenance tank
indicator is displayed with E*****F for 100~71% remaining and E**** F for 70~61%.
Table 1-34.
Model Display
Stylus Pro 7600 VERSION
BNxxxx P(orD)
Stylus Pro 9600 VERSION
BWxxxx P(orD)
Table 1-35.
Ink remaining Panel display Ink end LED
100 ~ 81% remaining E∗∗∗∗∗FOff
80 ~ 61% remaining E∗∗∗∗ FOff
60 ~ 41% remaining E∗∗∗ FOff
40 ~ 21% remaining E∗∗ FOff
20% ~ just before near end E∗FOff
After near end ~ just before ink end nn% Blink
ink end 0% On
100 ~ 81% E∗∗∗∗∗F
80 ~ 61% E∗∗∗∗ F
60 ~ 41% E∗∗∗ F
40 ~ 21% E∗∗ F
20% ~ 10% E∗F
Less than 10% remaining nn%
0% 0%
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 50
Warning
When available rate is less than 10% (Total capacity 1300g), Maintenance tank
almost full warning occurs. The Maintenance Tank LED blinks.
Error
When available rate becomes 0, Maintenance tank full error occurs.
The Maintenance Tank LED lights up.
Counter clear
It is cleared with replacing maintenance tank.
1.4.3.22 Use counter
Ink used
Ink used with following operations is counted;
•Print operation (irrespective of completion/discontinuation of printing)
•All flushing operation
•All cleaning operation
NOTE 1: Ink used within IR command range is accumulated and displayed.
2:
When there is no value to be displayed, the panel displays “---”.
Paper used
Paper used (paper fed) with print operation is displayed in centimeter. Manual
paper feeding is not counted.
NOTE 1: Paper used within JS ~ JE command range is accumulated and
displayed.
2:
When there is no value to be displayed, the panel displays “---”.
1.4.3.23 Clear use counter
Clear ink used counter
Reset “Ink used” to 0.
Clear paper used counter
Reset “Paper used” to 0.
1.4.3.24 Job history display
Job NO.
It is a Job number saved in the printer. The latest job is NO.0.
Paper use
Paper use of each job is displayed. (Area in m2)
NOTE: Paper use is counted from JS command to JE command.
Ink use
Ink use of each job is displayed.
NOTE 1: Ink use is counted within IR command or it is counted from JS command
to JE command.
2:
When IR command is not set, ink use is not counted, and display value is not
changed.
3:
When there is no value to display, “---” is displayed.
1.4.3.25 Job history clear
With this menu, job history saved in the printer is cleared.
Ink use and paper use of job history are displayed “---”.
1.4.3.26 Total prints
Total prints are displayed in decimal. (Max. 6 figures)
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 51
1.4.3.27 Consumables life
Cutter life
How to calculate
The number of times the cutter has been used is calculated by counting down
from 2000. The count is reduced by one every time one sheet is cut
irrespective of paper sizes.
The counter is cleared at replacing the cutter with a new one.
Display (Life)
Maintenance Req.
Not happen, because
•Cutter condition can be checked with cutting.
•It doesn’ t cause big obstacles.
•Users can replace a cutter easily.
Fatal error
Not happen.
Counter clear
The counter is cleared at replacing the cutter with a new one.
CR motor life monitor
How to calculate
It is displayed with tube life (B1 width), because tube friction causes CR
motor trouble. The tube life is calculated with the number of CR scan times.
Note : 1 pass = 1 round trip
Display (Life)
Maintenance Req.
It is happened when the life is less than 4%.
Fatal error
When the remainder of the life is judged to be 0 by taking into account
damage to the tube, service call occurs.
Counter clear
When “CLEAR COUNTERS CR MOTOR” or “CLEAR COUNTERS CR
TOTAL” in Maintenance mode 2 is executed, the counter is cleared.
100 ~ 81% E∗∗∗∗∗F
80 ~ 61% E∗∗∗∗ F
60 ~ 41% E∗∗∗ F
40 ~ 21% E∗∗ F
20% ~ 1% E∗F
Less than 1% remaining FF
CHECK
P O I N T
The indication as described above may not be accurate depending
on the conditions of use, thus it is given only as a yardstick.
Table 1-36. Reference value
Printer Model Number of Passes Condition
Stylus Pro 7600 250 million passes B0/ Speed
Stylus Pro 9600 325 million passes A1/ Speed
100 ~ 81% E∗∗∗∗∗F
80 ~ 61% E∗∗∗∗ F
60 ~ 41% E∗∗∗ F
40 ~ 21% E∗∗ F
20% ~ 1% E∗F
Less than 1% remaining FF
CHECK
P O I N T
Information on these values is needed only when service personnel
perform maintenance work. Do not inform users of the meaning of
these indications.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 52
PF motor life monitor
How to calculate
It is calculated for trouble examination in case that it is used beyond
production life, because parts of PF motor and paper feeding drive mechanism
are not supported to exchange within production life. It is displayed with ratio
of PF roller life and driven roller life, because their lives are shorter than PF
motor. PF roller life and driven roller life are calculated with total paper
feeding, because their lives are defined with paper feeding (positive direction/
negative direction).
Display (Life)
Maintenance Req.
Not happen because it is out of service range within product life.
Fatal error
Not happen, because trouble mode is not Fatal.
Counter clear
When “CLEAR COUNTERS PF MOTOR” in Maintenance mode 2 is
executed, the counter is cleared.
Count continuance
Even if remaining is 0, it keeps counting until 32bit register is full, and stops
counting-up at the maximum of positive number. It counts not only with panel
display but also with trouble analysis from NVRAM detailed data.
Head unit life monitor
How to calculate
The numbers of dot injection for each color are added up, the number of
injecting assured dots per nozzle × 96 nozzles is calculated as the life, and it is
calculated with the most number of total dots in each
Display (Life)
Maintenance Req.
Maintenance request happens at 2.8 billion shot/Nozzle.
Fatal error
Not happen as a head unit.
Counter clear
When “CLEAR COUNTERS HEAD” in Maintenance mode 2 is executed,
the counter is cleared.
Count continuance
Same as PF motor.
100 ~ 81% E∗∗∗∗∗F
80 ~ 61% E∗∗∗∗ F
60 ~ 41% E∗∗∗ F
40 ~ 21% E∗∗ F
20% ~ 1% E∗F
Less than 1% remaining FF
CHECK
P O I N T
Information on these values is needed only when service personnel
perform maintenance work. Do not inform users of the meaning of
these indications.
100 ~ 81% E∗∗∗∗∗F
80 ~ 61% E∗∗∗∗ F
60 ~ 41% E∗∗∗ F
40 ~ 21% E∗∗ F
20% ~ 1% E∗F
Less than 1% remaining FF
CHECK
P O I N T
Information on these values is needed only when service personnel
perform maintenance work. Do not inform users of the meaning of
these indications.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 53
Cleaning unit life monitor
How to calculate
Cleaning unit life is same as pump motor life. Cap assembly, pump assembly,
flushing box, and wiper are exchanged at the same time by a service person.
Display (Life)
Maintenance Req.
When the life is TBD%, maintenance request happens.
Fatal error
When the life is 0%, service request happens.
Counter clear
When “CLEAR COUNTERS CLEANER2 in Maintenance mode 2 is
executed, the counter is cleared.
Count continuance
Same as PF motor.
1.4.3.28 Suction adjustment for paper setting and indicator display
Users can adjust paper suction to set paper easily, only when paper set lever is released,
and paper is detected with rear sensor. Followings are displayed on the LCD panel at
that time;
LCD display
Note : : Indicator (3 levels)
Suction display
100 ~ 81% E∗∗∗∗∗F
80 ~ 61% E∗∗∗∗ F
60 ~ 41% E∗∗∗ F
40 ~ 21% E∗∗ F
20% ~ 1% E∗F
Less than 1% remaining FF
CHECK
P O I N T
Information on these values is needed only when service personnel
perform maintenance work. Do not inform users of the meaning of
these indications.
LOAD PAPER
SUCTION
Suction LCD display
High 100%
Middle 60%
Low 0%
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 54
1.4.3.29 Ink remaining indicator display
Ink remaining indicator is displayed on the lower line of LCD panel.
LCD display item and LCD panel display position
Note : It is counted from the left side
Printer status at indicator display
Ink remaining display and font
Note 1: Available quantity is displayed for the maintenance tank.
2: When initial filling is done by user after the package opened, ink consumption for initial
filling is subtracted, and ink remaining of each ink cartridge is displayed as 100%. Ink
use count is started at that time. When ink cartridge is replaced, ink use is counted/
displayed according to “Ink system specifications.”
3: When initial filling is done by user after the package opened, maintenance tank
indicator is displayed with “h01” font for 100~76% remaining and “h03” font for
75~61%.
Ink type Panel display position
Black1 8 th on the lower line
Black2 9 th on the lower line
Cyan 10 th on the lower line
Magenta 11 th on the lower line
Light Cyan 12 th on the lower line
Light Magent 13 th on the lower line
Yellow 14 th on the lower line
Maintenance*1 16 th on the lower line
Status LCD panel display
Ready to print READY
Processing data PRINTING
Ink low INK LOW
Ink end INK OUT
Pause PAUSE
Ink remaining LCD panel display
100 ~ 81% remaining*2
80 ~ 61% remaining*3
60 ~ 41% remaining
40 ~ 21% remaining
20% remaining ~ just before near
end
Ink end
CHECK
P O I N T
After detection of “Ink Low”, the display is changed from a graph
to a% indication.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 55
1.4.3.30 Job information
Definition of Job
The minimum unit of printer operation is defined as “Job” with this printer. The
job print information with character/image can be saved as a record.
Basic print job functions are followings;
Note "*": Cleaning is not defined as a Job, because it can be executed during printing.
Figure 1-14. Printing Job Transition
Job information
This printer saves following job information (68byte × 10job) in NVRAM.
Note "*": 00h 00h fixed as Reserve for now.
Printable Information saving
Printing
CancelNormal end
Information saving
Count Start
JS
Count End
JE (Cancel)
Count End
JE (Complete)
Table 1-37. Job information
Information Explanation Range Capacity
The quantity of saved
job information
The quantity of saved job
information in NVRAM
0~10 1byte
Information No. Saving order 0~9 1byte
ID No. Job ID No. 0~255(•••,255,0,1,•••) 1byte
Using I/F Using I/F type 00:Unknown
01:Parallel
02:USB
03:Option I/F
FF:I/F is not used
1byte
Job status Current job status 00:Unknown
01:Printing
02:Complete
03:Abort
1byte
Character strings code Character code recognizing code *2byte
Job ID Job name consisting of host
name and document name
User name 16byte
Document name 32Byte
48byte
Ink used Ink used quantity for intended
job [ml]
0~65.535 ml 2byte
Paper used Paper used
quantity for
intended job
Vertical [mm] 0~65535 2byte
Horizontal [mm] 0~65535 2byte
Print start time Print start time
[Year/month/date/hour/minute]
2255/12/31/24/59[MAX] 5byte
Time used for print Time used for print [sec] 0~65535 2byte
Total 68byte
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 56
1.4.3.31 User Paper Setting
Selecting this mode allows detection of the thickness of the available paper, and
registration of up to four user-defined paper.
Paper feeding adjustment, ink drying time, cutting method, MW print adjustment and
suction may be registered for each paper format.
Setting
1. Select user paper setting menu from the panel.
2. Select the paper number (‘STD’, ‘1’~‘10’)
3. Print the paper thickness detection pattern.
4. Check the printed adjustment patterns and enter the number of the pattern
with the least displacement for each adjustment item. (See p.58)
5. Enter cutting pressure.
6. Select cutting method.
7. Enter the paper feeding adjustment value.
8. Enter the ink dying time for each pass.
9. Select paper suction.
10. Select MW print quality adjustment.
NOTE 1: Paper setting can be made independently for any paper number.
2:
For details of patterns, refer to
“Print paper thickness detection pattern (p.
58)”
.
Paper setting and corresponding operation are as follows.
Details of each setting item are following;
Note 1: When “STD” is selected for Paper selection, Paper thickness detection pattern print,
Paper thickness number selection, Paper feeding adjustment setting items are not
displayed. Only when Paper “1” ~ “10” is selected, they are displayed.
2: During pattern printing, “PRINTING ALGNMNT PATTERN” is displayed.
(<\n> is new line)
3: Default display of paper thickness number selection is the number same as gap
adjustment.
Note *1: See “MW Printing Adjustment / Setting Values and Printing Modes (p.88)” for
selectable MW mode at MW print adjustment.
*2: It prints with PG small or PG big depending on detection result of paper thickness
sensor.
Table 1-38. Relationship between Pattern Numbers and Paper Thickness
Number1234567891011121314151617
Paper
thickness 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6
Table 1-39.
Paper setup Operation
Standard When settings of cutting pressure ~ print quality are set with
commands, it follows the settings.
1 ~ 10 User definition paper. Even when cutting pressure ~ print quality are
set with commands, user setting value is used.
Table 1-40.
Setting Operation
Paper thickness Print paper thickness detection pattern and enter the paper thickness
number. (When “STD” is selected, it is not executed.) *1
Cutting pressure Paper cutting pressure is set. Lower the pressure for thin and soft
paper. Manufacture setting value (75%) is displayed as 100%, which is
the maximum setting value to be assured. Setting available range is
110%~0%.
Cutting method Cutting method is selected, 4 step cutting for thin and soft paper. Paper
feed adjustment Paper feeding is adjusted. When 0.00% is not selected
for paper feed adjustment, it ignores driver command (SN 03H 00H
00H 04H m2) and setting value with SN menu of Maintenance mode1,
and uses this setting value.
Ink drying time Ink drying time for each pass is set.- The carriage stops at the right/left
sides of paper for setting time.
Paper suction Paper suction is set to make paper stable on the platen. Select “LOW”
for thin paper (film), which is difficult to feed.
MW print adjustment Micro weave mode is adjusted. When print speed has priority, lower
the setting value. When quality has priority, raise the setting value.*2
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 57
Figure 1-15. Level Structure of User Setting Menu
Displays the paper number currently selected.
STD, A1 ~ 10
READY
 
PAPER CONFIG
PAPER CONFIG
PAPER NUMBER STD
Paper Source
Paper Source
SelecType
SelecType
PAPER CONFIG
THICK. PAT.
Paper Feed
PAPER NUMBER
STD
No.1
Paper Feed
No.10
Paper Feed
SelecType
Paper Source
It is displayed only when paper number 1~10 is selected.
PAPER CONFIG
CUT PRESSURE
Paper Feed
CUT PRESSURE
00%
SelecType
Paper Source
00%
~
99%
Paper Feed
PAPER CONFIG
CUT METHOD
CUT METHOD
3 STEP
SelecType
CUT PRESSURE
00%
00%
~
100%
CUT METHOD
3 STEP
4 STEP
PRINTING ALGNMENT
PATTERN
THICKNESS NUM
1
1
~
17
SUCTION
NORM
LOW
PRINT ADJ
5
1
~
5
~
9
PPR FEED ADJ
0.00%
-1.00
~
1.00
DRYING TIME
00.0sec
10.0
~
00.0
THICKNESS PAT
PRINT
Paper Source
4 STEP
Paper Feed
PAPER CONFIG
PPR FEED ADJ
PPR FEED ADJ
0.00%
SelecType
Paper Source
-1.00
~
1.00
Paper Feed
PAPER CONFIG
DRYING TIME
DRYING TIME
00.0sec
SelecType
Paper Source
10.0
~
00.0
Paper Feed
PAPER CONFIG
SUCTION
SUCTION
NORM
SelecType
Paper Source
LOW
Paper Feed
PAPER CONFIG
PRINT ADJ
PRINT ADJ
5
SelecType
Paper Source
1
~
5
~
9
Enter
Enter
It is entered with Enter button in order. Enter
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 58
PRINT PAPER THICKNESS DETECTION PATTERN
Printing Specifications
Relationship between numbers in print pattern and paper thickness.
Figure 1-16. Paper Thickness Detection Pattern
Table 1-41.
Head speed 240 cps
Pattern height 96 dots
Color Black
Print direction Upper patterns: Leftward
Lower patterns: Rightward
Pattern interval Upper patterns: Equal intervals
Lower patterns:Centered on base position for gap adjustment
value, and displaced by an equal distance left and right.
Details are described in next clause.
Table 1-42.
Numbers in print pattern 1 2 3 ... ... 15 16 17
Paper thickness (mm) 0.0 0.1 0.2 ... ... 1.4 1.5 1.6
10 mm 9.0 mm (64dot)
feeding
13.5mm(96dot)
13.5mm(96dot)
A4 width
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 59
Displacement of bottom pattern
If the displacement in the gap adjustment value with a change of 0.1 mm in paper
thickness is assumed to be X microns, the following applies.
AB:Gap adjustment value with paper thickness +0.1 mm
AC:Current gap adjustment value
AD:Gap adjustment value with paper thickness -0.1 mm
A fixed displacement is assumed with changes in paper thickness.
X = AC–AB = AD–AC
This adjustment value is saved into NVRAM and can be changed.
Example: With 0.2 mm gap adjustment paper thickness.
Figure 1-17. Displacement of Paper Thickness Detection Pattern
Table 1-43.
Pattern
number
Displacement of
bottom pattern relative to
top pattern
Pattern
number
Displacement of
bottom pattern relative to
top pattern
1 +2X 10 –7X
2+1X 11 –8X
3± 012–9X
4–1X 13 –10X
5 –2X 14 –11X
6–3X 15 –12X
7 –4X 16 –13X
8–5X 17 –14X
9–6X
Head
ABCD
Paper thickness +0.1mm at gap
adjustment.
Paper thickness at gap adjustment.
Paper thickness -0.1 mm at gap
adjustment.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 60
1.4.3.32 Power cleaning
With this mode, the printer has more power cleaning than normal cleaning.
1.4.3.33 Cutter Blade Replacement
Selecting this mode allows the user to replace the cutter blade.
The procedure for cutter blade replacement is as follows:
1. Select the cutter replacement menus from the panel. (The cutter replacement menu
can be selected by pressing the SelecType button for 5 sec.)
2. Open the cover following cover open guide.
3. Replace the cutter blade following cutter replacement guide.
4. Close the cover following cover close guide.
1.4.3.34 Gap Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment, Uni-D Adjustment)
Selecting this mode allows the user to adjust Bi-D and Uni-D depending on paper
thickness.
Setting
1. Set the paper.
2. Select the gap adjustment menu from the panel.
3. Set to 'STD' for 0.2mm or 1.2mm EPSON paper. When other paper is set
individually, set thickness in units of 0.1mm.
4. Select the adjustment pattern to be printed (Bi-D Black, Bi-D all or Uni-D
individual), and print. (“PRINTING ALGNMNT PATTERN” is displayed.)
5. Check the printed adjustment patterns and enter the number of the pattern
with the least displacement for each adjustment item.
6. Repeat (4)~(5) until adjustment of all items is completed.
NOTE: For details of patterns, refer to “Gap Adjustment Print Pattern (TBD) (p.
63)”.
Adjustment
The adjustment values set above are saved in NVRAM as 4 types of adjustment
value depending on PG height (0.7mm/1.2mm/2.2mm/2.6mm). To calculate
adjustment value, PG height and paper thickness are necessary. Saving place of
adjustment value is selected as following list. Adjustment value saved in NVRAM
is updated when the value is adjusted again;
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 61
Note 1: Paper thickness is saved to adjust with 0.1mm unit for paper thickness setting command
PH.
2: Paper thickness is firstly entered to reduce operation with the closest pattern print of
adjustment value saved in the printer.
3: Select "STD" when authentic EPSON dedicated paper is to be used. Then the paper
thickness sensors detect the paper thickness and make automatic setting.
(Thin paper = 0.2mm / Thick paper = 1.2mm)
4: When the following paper is to be used, select [0S] or [3S].
[0S] = Films and special thin paper
[3S] = Recommended thick RC paper for borderless printing
5: When any paper other than authentic EPSON dedicated paper is to be used, set paper
thickness in increments of 0.1 mm.
Note *1: Adjustment values calculated with PG1.2mm for PG 0.7mm, 2.2mm, 2.6mm are
saved except adjustment value saved for PG 1.2mm at that time.
*2: In this case, adjustment value is saved into PG0.7mm area as a special setting for
film media (paper thickness 0.15mm). This is used when special setting for film
media (00h) is set with PH command.
*3: In this case, adjustment value is saved into PG0.7mm area as a special setting for
glossy media (paper thickness 0.3mm). This is used when glossy media is specified
with paper adjustment value of paper feed adjustment setting command.
*4: Even when paper thickness sensor detects thin paper (less than 0.7mm), PG is set as
2.6mm if paper thickness setting is more than 0.7mm.
*5: When paper thickness sensor detects thick paper (more than 0.7mm), PG is set as
2.6mm regardless of PG setting and paper thickness setting.
*6: It is saved into saving place for paper thickness 0.0mm.
*7: It is saved into saving place for paper thickness 0.3mm.
Table 1-44.
Paper thickness sensor Paper thickness
setting PG setting Saving place Notes
Less than 0.7mm STD - For PG1.2mm *1
More than 0.7mm -PG2.6mm
Less than 0.3mm 0S - For film media
(PG0.7mm)
*2
More than 0.3mm *6
Less than 0.3mm 3S - For glossy media
(PG0.7mm)
*3
More than 0.3mm *7
Less than 0.3mm 0.0mm Narrow For PG0.7mm
Standard For PG0.7mm
Wide For PG1.2mm
Wider For PG2.2mm
0.1~0.6mm Narrow For PG0.7mm
Standard For PG1.2mm
Wide For PG2.2mm
Wider For PG2.6mm
0.7~1.6mm - For PG2.6mm *4
More than 0.3mm
Less than 0.7mm
0.0~0.6mm Narrow For PG1.2mm
Standard For PG1.2mm
Wide For PG2.2mm
Wider For PG2.6mm
0.7~1.6mm -For PG2.6mm *4
More than 0.7mm 0S/3S/
0.0~1.6mm
- For PG2.6mm *5
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 62
Figure 1-18. Level Structure of Gap Adjustment Menu
Enter
#1 K2
5
#1 Y
5
Enter
#2 K2
5
Enter
#2 Y
5
Enter
#3 K2
5
Enter
#3 Y
5
Enter
Enter
Head gap
adjustmen
ALIGNMENT
Bi -D BLACK
Enter
PAPER THKNS
STD
Paper Source
PRINTING ALGNMNT
PATTERN
SelecType
HEAD ALIGNMENT
PAPER THKNS
Paper Source
SelecType
HEAD ALIGNMENT
Paper Source
SelecType
Ready
 
Paper Source
Paper Feed
ON
Pause
ALIGNMENT
Uni-D
Paper Feed
Paper Source
Paper Feed
Paper Feed
Paper Feed
Paper Feed
Paper Feed
SelecType
Paper Source
#1 K2
#1 Y
#2 K2
#2 Y
#3 K2
#3 Y
Enter
#1 K1
5
#1 Y
5
Enter
#2 K1
5
Enter
#2 Y
5
Enter
#3 K1
5
Enter
#3 Y
5
Enter
Enter
ALIGNMENT
Bi -D ALL
Paper Feed
Paper Source
Paper Feed
Paper Feed
Paper Feed
Paper Feed
Paper Feed
SelecType
Paper Source
#1 K1
#1 Y
#2 K1
#2 Y
#3 K1
#3 Y
Enter
#1 K1
5
#2 K1
5
Enter
#3 K1
5
Enter
Paper Feed
Paper Source
Paper Feed
Paper Feed
SelecType
#1 K1
#2 K1
#3 K1
3N 0.0mm 1.6mm
Paper Source
Enter
* Setting value 1~5~9 is selected with the Paper Feed button.
It returns to a status before pattern print with the Paper Source bottom.
* It always returns to “Ready” status with the Pause.
* Same sequence
* Paper thickness sensor affects it.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 63
GAP ADJUSTMENT PRINT PATTERN (TBD)
Print specifications
Print specifications of gap adjustment print pattern
Each adjustment item
Note *1: For Uni-D All (between-row compensation), make each adjustment with the K1 row
as the reference.
The adjustment pattern printing method for each adjustment item is as
follows:
The relationship between print pattern and adjustment gap is shown below.
Adjusting items 3 items (Refer to next clause for details)
Adjustment pattern height Bi-D Black (#1, #2, #3) 90mm
Bi-D All (#1, #2, #3) 220mm
Uni-D All (#1, #2, #3) 145mm
Adjustment pattern width Bi-D Black 65mm (24” 3set, 44” 5set)
Bi-D All 190mm (24” 3set, 44” 5set)
Uni-D All 185mm (24” 3set, 44” 5set)
Others When it prints from paper edge, it feeds 100mm for roll paper,
50mm for sheet, and starts printing.
Table 1-45. Adjustment Item List
Adjusting item Parameter
Dot size Head speed (CPS) Nozzle No.
Bi-D All
#1
K1 VSD1 240 1
K2 VSD1 240 2
C VSD1 240 3
MVSD1 240 4
LC VSD1 240 5
LM VSD1 240 6
Y VSD1 240 7
#2
K1 VSD2 240 1
K2 VSD2 240 2
CVSD2 240 3
M VSD2 240 4
LC VSD2 240 5
LM VSD2 240 6
YVSD2 240 7
#3
K1 VSD4 190 1
K2 VSD4 190 2
C VSD4 190 3
MVSD4 190 4
LC VSD4 190 5
LM VSD4 190 6
Y VSD4 190 7
Uni-D All*1
#1
K2 VSD1 240 2
C VSD1 240 3
MVSD1 240 4
LC VSD1 240 5
LM VSD1 240 6
Y VSD1 240 7
#2
K2 VSD2 240 2
C VSD2 240 3
MVSD2 240 4
LC VSD2 240 5
LM VSD2 240 6
Y VSD2 240 7
#3
K2 VSD4 190 2
C VSD4 190 3
MVSD4 190 4
LC VSD4 190 5
LM VSD4 190 6
Y VSD4 190 7
Bi-D Black
#1 K1 VSD1 240 1
#2 K1 VSD2 240 1
#3 K1 VSD4 190 1
Print direction Bar: Going back and forth every 4dot
Block: Upper patterns: Leftward Lower patterns: Rightward
Pattern interval Upper patterns: equal interval
Lower patterns:Print No.5 to be always current setup value. No.5
is standard, and others have adjustment gap as
following;
Print pattern number 123456789
Adjustment gap N/1440 inch
(VSD1, VSD2, VSD4)
-4 -3 -2 -1 0+1 +2 +3 +4
Table 1-45. Adjustment Item List (continued)
Adjusting item Parameter
Dot size Head speed (CPS) Nozzle No.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 64
1.4.3.35 BK ink cartridge replacement
1. Select “BK INK CHANGE” in “MAINTENANCE” of panel setting menu and
start with “EXEC”.
2. Select changing ink and push the Enter button. (The panel message is depended on
installed ink combination at that time.)
LCD panel message: “SELECT INK SET”
3. The printer checks available quantity of all color ink remaining for initial filling
except changing slot.
1. When ink remaining is enough, go to (4). When ink remaining is not enough,
following message is displayed, and corresponded slot LED blinks.
LCD panel message: “NOT ENOUGH INK”
“RELEASE INK LEVER”
2. Following message is indicated, and corresponded slot LED blinks until lever
is released, and new ink cartridge is installed.
LCD panel message: “REPLACE WITH NEW CARTRIDGE”
3. Following message is displayed, when new ink cartridge is installed, and
CSIC is contacted.
LCD panel message: “SET INK LEVER”
4. The printer reads CSIC of installed cartridge after the lever is locked.
a) When all ink remaining except changing slot is enough for initial filling,
go to step 4.
b) When wrong ink cartridge is installed, following message is displayed
every 1 second, corresponded slot LED blinks, and go back to step 3-2.
LCD panel message: “WRONG CARTRIDGE”
“RELEASE INK LEVER”
c) When installed ink cartridge is not enough for initial filling, following
message is displayed every 1 second, corresponded slot LED blinks, and
go back to step 3-2.
LCD panel message: “NOT ENOUGH INK”
“RELEASE INK LEVER”
4. Following messages are displayed every 1 second repeatedly, and all slot LEDs
are OFF, after necessary ink remaining for initial filling is checked,
LCD panel message: “REMOVE ALL INK CARTRIDGES”
“RELEASE INK LEVER”
5. Following message is displayed after the lever is released.
LCD panel message: “REMOVE ALL INK CARTRIDGES”
NOTE: The message is indicated until all ink cartridges are removed. LED turns
to ON after corresponded cartridge is removed. LEDs except changing
slot are ON until cartridges are installed.
6. The printer checks available quantity of maintenance tank, after all cartridges are
removed.
NOTE: When 2 cartridges are selected to be changed for procedure (2), it counts
available quantity of maintenance tank for 2 cartridges.
1. The printer checks CSIC of maintenance tank. When available quantity is
enough, go to step 7. When available quantity is NOT enough, following
messages are displayed every 1 second, and maintenance tank LED blinks
until maintenance tank is replaced with new one.
LCD panel message: “NOT ENOUGH SPACE IN MAINTE TANK”
“REPLACE WITH NEW MAINTENANCE TANK”
CHECK
P O I N T
This menu is only displayed for pigment model. It is not displayed
for dye model.
The printer is not turned off during sequence even if Power button
is pushed.
Installed ink set Panel message
MATTE-K+LIGHT-K #1 PHOTO:#2 LBK
#1 MAT:#2 MAT
MATTE-K+MATTE-K #1 MAT:#2 LBK
#1 PHOTO:#2 LBK (2 cartridges)
PHOTO-K+LIGHT-K #1 MAT:#2 LBK
#1 MAT:#2 MAT (2 cartridges)
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 65
2. The printer checks CSIC after maintenance tank is replaced. When CSIC
detects that the maintenance tank have enough available quantity, got to step
7. When available quantity is NOT enough, repeat Procedure step 6-1 and step
6-2.
7. Following messages are displayed every 1 second, and #1 slot LED blinks, after
available quantity of maintenance tank is checked.
LCD panel message: “READY FOR DRAINING”
“INSERT DRAINING CARTRIDGE IN #X”
8. The printer starts ejecting ink from corresponded ink tube.
1. Following message is displayed, and XX slot LED blinks, after draining
cartridge is installed, and CSIC is connected.
LCD panel message: “SET INK LEVER”
2. The printer checks CSIC after ink lever is set. When the cartridge is correct,
go to step 8-3. When the cartridge is wrong, go to step 8-2-1. When the slot is
wrong, go to step 8-2-2.
1. When a cartridge except draining cartridge is installed, following
messages are displayed every 1 second, and XX slot LED blinks until the
cartridge is removed. Go back to step 8-1.
LCD panel message: “WRONG CARTRIDGE”
“RELEASE INK LEVER”
2. When the cartridge is installed in a slot except XX, following messages
are displayed every 1 second, and XX slot LED blinks until the cartridge
is removed. Go back to step 8-1.
LCD panel message: “INSERT CARTRIDGE IN CORRECT SLOT”
“RELEASE INK LEVER”
3. Ink ejection starts and following message is displayed.
LCD panel message: “DRAINING XXX%” (0%~100%)
4. Following messages are displayed every 1 second, and XX slot LED blinks,
after corresponded ink tube ejection is completed.
LCD panel message: “REMOVE DRAINING CARTRIDGE”
“RELEASE INK LEVER”
9. Repeat step 8 when 2 cartridges are replaced. Slot [XX] changes to [K2], and LED
shifts to #2.
10. Following message is displayed, and all slots LEDs blink, after the draining
cartridge is removed.
LCD panel message: “INSERT ALL INK CARTRIDGES”
NOTE: Ink remaining for initial filling and wrong cartridge are checked as same
as procedure step3
11. Following message is displayed and all slot LEDs blink after all cartridges are
installed, and CSIC is connected.
LCD panel message: “SET INK LEVER”
12. Ink filling starts automatically after all ink installation.
LCD panel message: “INK CHARGING XXX%”
13. Ink filling completed.
The manufacture logo, ink remaining, and printable pages, which are recorded in
replaced ink cartridge CSIC, are displayed.
14. Paper is fed, and cleaning (CL2) is done only for the first printing after ink
replacement.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 66
1.4.4 Maintenance Mode 1
OUTLINE
Startup
The maintenance mode 1 is selected by switching power ON while pushing the
Pause button.
Operation
1. The setting menu select mode is selected after power ON.
2. Each setting menu is displayed one after another by pressing Paper Feed ∆∇
buttons in the setting menu select mode. It is shifted to setting item select
menu by pressing the SelecType button.
[Setting menu] is displayed on the upper line, and [Setting item] is displayed
on the lower line.
3. The setting menu is displayed one after another by pressing Paper Feed ∆∇
buttons in the setting item select mode. It is shifted to setting value select
mode of the setting item by pressing the SelecType button. [Setting item] is
displayed on the upper line, and [Setting value] is displayed on the lower line.
The '*' represents the current setup value.
4. Setting value is displayed on the lower line one after another by pressing
Paper Feed ∆∇ buttons in the setting value select mode if the setting value
can be changed. The '*' represents the current setup value.
5. When the Enter button is pressed in the setting value select mode, the
displayed setting value is entered as the current setting value. If it has a
corresponded operation, it is started.No operation occurs if '*' is already
displayed.
6. It returns to the setting item select menu by pressing the Paper Source button
in the setting value select mode. It returns to the setting menu select mode by
pressing the Paper Source button in the setting item select menu.
Termination
1. The printer is ready for printing following reset after selecting the panel
display language.
2. Switch power OFF > ON.
Panel display
Character strings on the second line in “Panel message translation” are displayed
on the second line of LCD panel. Setup values are displayed on the second line of
LCD panel.
MAINTENANCE MODE 1 SETUP ITEMS
Table 1-46. Maintenance mode 1 setup items
Top menu
(Panel display)
Item menu 1
(Panel display)
Item menu 2
(Panel display) Setup value
Print hexadecimal dump
HEX DUMP
-
(-)
-
(PRINT) EXEC *1
Panel display language
select
LANGUAGE
-LANGUAGE
-
(-)
-
(-) ENGLISH, JAPANESE
Unit change
UNIT
-
(-)
-
(-) METER, FEET/INCH
Parallel interface mode
PARALLEL I/F
-
(-)
-
(-) ECP, COMPAT
Set IEEE1284.4
IEEE1284.4
-
(-)
-
(-) ON, OFF
Initialize panel setting
DEFAULT PANEL
-
(-)
-
(-) EXEC
Ink information menu
(CRTG INFO MENU)
Ink information (K1)
(K1 CARTRIDGE)
Manufacture logo
(MANUFACT K1) EPSON
Ink color
(CARTRIDGE K1)
BLACK / MATTE K /
GRAY
Ink type
(INK TYPE K1) PIGMENT, DYE
Ink capacity
(INK CAP K1) 110ml/220ml
Ink remaining
(INK LEFT-K1)
E*****F, E**** F, E***
F,E** F, E* F, E F
Product date
(PROD DATE K1) <YY>/<MM>
Expire date
(EXPIR DATE K1) <YY>/<MM>
Ink life after open
(INK LIFE K1) <MM> Month
Passed time after open
(AGE K1) <MM> Month
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 67
Ink information menu
(CRTG INFO MENU)
Ink information (K2)
(K2 CARTRIDGE)
Manufacture logo
(MANUFACT K2) EPSON
Ink color
(CARTRIDGE K2)
BLACK / MATTE K /
GRAY
Ink type
(INK TYPE K2) PIGMENT, DYE
Ink capacity
(INK CAP K2) 110ml/220ml
Ink remaining
(INK LEFT-K2)
E*****F, E**** F, E*** F,
E** F, E* F, E F
Product date
(PROD DATE K2) <YY>/<MM>
Expire date
(EXPIR DATE K2) <YY>/<MM>
Ink life after open
(INK LIFE K2) <MM> Month
Passed time after open
(AGE K2) <MM> Month
Ink information (C)
(C CARTRIDGE)
Manufacture logo
(MANUFACT C) EPSON
Ink color
(CARTRIDGE C) CYAN
Ink type
(INK TYPE C) PIGMENT, DYE
Ink capacity
(INK CAP C) 110ml/220ml
Ink remaining
(INK LEFT-C)
E*****F, E**** F, E*** F,
E** F, E* F, E F
Product date
(PROD DATE C) <YY>/<MM>
Expire date
(EXPIR DATE C) <YY>/<MM>
Ink life after open
(INK LIFE C) <MM> Month
Passed time after open
(AGE C) <MM> Month
Table 1-46. Maintenance mode 1 setup items (continued)
Top menu
(Panel display)
Item menu 1
(Panel display)
Item menu 2
(Panel display) Setup value
Ink information menu
(CRTG INFO MENU)
Ink information (M)
(M CARTRIDGE)
Manufacture logo
(MANUFACT M) EPSON
Ink color
(CARTRIDGE M) MAGENTA
Ink type
(INK TYPE M) PIGMENT, DYE
Ink capacity
(INK CAP M) 110ml/220ml
Ink remaining
(INK LEFT-M)
E*****F, E**** F, E*** F,
E** F, E* F, E F
Product date
(PROD DATE M) <YY>/<MM>
Expire date
(EXPIR DATE M) <YY>/<MM>
Ink life after open
(INK LIFE M) <MM> Month
Passed time after open
(AGE M) <MM> Month
Ink information (Lc)
(Lc CARTRIDGE)
Manufacture logo
(MANUFACT Lc) EPSON
Ink color
(CARTRIDGE Lc) LGT. CYAN
Ink type
(INK TYPE LC) PIGMENT, DYE
Ink capacity
(INK CAP LC) 110ml/220ml
Ink remaining
(INK LEFT-LC)
E*****F, E**** F, E*** F,
E** F, E* F, E F
Product date
(PROD DATE LC) <YY>/<MM>
Expire date
(EXPIR DATE LC) <YY>/<MM>
Ink life after open
(INK LIFE LC) <MM> Month
Passed time after open
(AGE LC) <MM> Month
Table 1-46. Maintenance mode 1 setup items (continued)
Top menu
(Panel display)
Item menu 1
(Panel display)
Item menu 2
(Panel display) Setup value
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 68
Note *1: When hexadecimal dump mode is executed, “PRINT” is displayed.
HEXADECIMAL DUMP
The hex dump function allows data sent to the printer to be printed and displayed in
hexadecimal format. One line contains 16 data items in hexadecimal format, with the
equivalent characters printed at the right of each line. If no equipment characters exist
(control codes, etc.), a period is printed. It prints every 16 data. It prints the last data
with pressing the Pause button, when it is less than 16. Panel setting is not available in
the hex dump mode. Using this function, users can check that data has been sent
correctly from the computer to the printer. To terminate this mode, stop printing with
Pause button and shut off the power.
PANEL DISPLAY LANGUAGE SELECTION
Users can select English, French, Italian, German, Spanish, and Portuguese for display
on the LCD with this mode.
Ink information menu
(CRTG INFO MENU)
Ink information (Lm)
(Lm CARTRIDGE)
Manufacture logo
(MANUFACT Lm) EPSON
Ink color
(CARTRIDGE Lm) LGT. MAGENTA
Ink type
(INK TYPE LM) PIGMENT, DYE
Ink capacity
(INK CAP LM) 110ml/220ml
Ink remaining
(INK LEFT-LM)
E*****F, E**** F, E*** F,
E** F, E* F, E F
Product date
(PROD DATE LM) <YY>/<MM>
Expire date
(EXPIR DATE LM) <YY>/<MM>
Ink life after open
(INK LIFE LM) <MM> Month
Passed time after open
(AGE LM) <MM> Month
Ink information (Y)
(Y CARTRIDGE)
Manufacture logo
(MANUFACT Y) EPSON
Ink color
(CARTRIDGE Y) YELLOW
Ink type
(INK TYPE Y) PIGMENT, DYE
Ink capacity
(INK CAP Y) 110ml/220ml
Ink remaining
(INK LEFT-Y)
E*****F, E**** F, E*** F,
E** F, E* F, E F
Product date
(PROD DATE Y) <YY>/<MM>
Expire date
(EXPIR DATE Y) <YY>/<MM>
Ink life after open
(INK LIFE Y) <MM> Month
Passed time after open
(AGE Y) <MM> Month
Table 1-46. Maintenance mode 1 setup items (continued)
Top menu
(Panel display)
Item menu 1
(Panel display)
Item menu 2
(Panel display) Setup value
SN Menu
(SN MENU)
Paper feeding adjustment
conversion table 1 (User
table pigment)
(XX1=<nn>:<mm>)
-
(-)
<nn> :00H~C9H <mm>
:00H~C9H,FFH
Paper feeding adjustment
conversion table 2 (User
table dye)
(XX2=<nn>:<mm>)
-
(-)
<nn> :00H~C9H <mm>
:00H~C9H,FFH
The whole paper feeding
adjustment offset (Pigment)
(XXO=<nn>)
-
(-) <nn> :-32~0~+32
The whole paper feeding
adjustment offset (Dye)
(XXP=<nn>)
-
(-) <nn> :-32~0~+32
System table version
(XXS=<mmmmm>)
-
(-) <mmmmm> : F/W Version
User table version
(XXU=<nn>)
-
(-) <nn> :00H~FFH
Initialize user table
(XXI)
-
(-) EXEC
Table 1-46. Maintenance mode 1 setup items (continued)
Top menu
(Panel display)
Item menu 1
(Panel display)
Item menu 2
(Panel display) Setup value
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 69
UNIT CHANGE
Users can change length unit of LCD panel / pattern print with this mode.
METER: meter (m)
FEET/INCH: Feet(ft)/Inch(in)
Unit of following messages can be changed;
Note : This function is available only for English.
PARALLEL I/F MODE
Users can switch parallel I/F receiving speed with this mode; ECP/compatibility
1284.4 SETTING (D4)
Users can set 1284.4mode with this mode ON.
INK INFORMATION MENU
It displays ink information recorded in CSIC.
•Manufacture logo: Manufacture information saved in CSIC of each ink
cartridge is displayed.
•Ink Color: Ink color information saved in CSIC of each ink cartridge is
displayed.
•Ink Type: Ink type information saved in CSIC of each ink cartridge is
displayed.
•Ink capacity: Ink capacity information saved in CSIC of each ink cartridge is
displayed.
•Ink remaining: Ink remaining of each ink cartridge is displayed.
•Product date: Product date information saved in CSIC of each ink cartridge is
displayed with <YY>/<MM> form.
•Expire date: Ink expire date information saved in CSIC of each ink cartridge
is displayed.
•Ink life after open: Ink life information saved in CSIC of each ink cartridge is
displayed.
•Passed time after open: Passed time after opened of each ink cartridge is
displayed.
NOTE: These are displayed every color (K~Y).
SSN MENU
Paper feed adjustment table
m2 value set by mechanism sequence command “Paper feed adjustment” is converted
to the actual paper feed adjustment value with paper feed adjustment table saved in
NVRAM.
(The conversion is valid when mechanism sequence command “Paper feed adjustment
mode = ON”.)
Users can change following conversion table with this maintenance mode.
•User table for dye media
•User table for pigment media
Change of paper feed adjustment table by users
Format
“XXx=nn:mm”
Table 1-47.
Item Message
Meter Feet/Inch
Panel LCD display Paper counter xxxxx.xcm xxxxft xxin
Job information display (Paper used) xxxxxxxcm2 xxxxxx.xsqft
Nozzle check pattern Current Paper Count xxxxx.xcm xxxxft xxin
Previous Paper Count xxxxx.xcm xxxxft xxin
Status sheet Use Paper xxxxxx.xcm xxxxft xxin
Job information print Paper used (vertical) xxxxxx.xcm xxxxft xxin
Paper used (horizontal) xxxxxx.xcm xxxxft xxin
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 70
<mm> indicates conversion value of <nn> designated with mechanism
sequence command
•Conversion tables are XX1 ~ XX2.
•When <mm> = FFh, applicable input value is not converted.
Operation
•The cursor shifts between <nn> and <mm> with SelecType button and Paper
Source button.
•The value pointed with the cursor increases/decreases with Paper Feed ∆∇
buttons.
•Setting value is saved into NVRAM with “Enter” button.
Paper feed adjustment offset
Offset value is set to add to the actual paper feed adjustment value. The setup
value is always valid regardless of mechanism sequence command “Paper feed
adjustment mode” setting.
Format
“XX0=<nn>” Bias value is set for pigment.
Operation
•The value increases/decreases with Paper Feed ∆∇ buttons.
•Setting value is saved into NVRAM with Enter button.
System table version
It displays version No. of paper feed adjustment conversion table saved in the
printer.
Format:
“XXS=<mmmmm><n>”
NOTE 1: <mmmmm> is 5 letters indicating version of engine controller.
(e.g. “0270C”)
2:
<n> is 1-figure hexadecimal number indicating change history of conversion
table. (e.g.”0”)
User table version
When a user change the table, the version No. is added 1 optionally.
Format:
“XXU=nn” *<nn> is 2-figure hexadecimal number
User table initializing
Users can initialize user table to system table with this mode.
1.4.5 Maintenance Mode 2
OUTLINE
Startup
The maintenance mode 2 is selected by switching power ON while pushing the
Paper source, Cut/Eject, and Paper Feed ∇ buttons.
Operation
1. The setting menu select mode is selected after power ON.
2. Each setting menu is displayed one after another by pressing Paper Feed ∆∇
buttons in the setting menu select mode. It is shifted to setting item select
menu by pressing the SelecType button.
[Setting menu] is displayed on the upper line, and [Setting item] is displayed
on the lower line.
3. The setting menu is displayed one after another by pressing Paper Feed ∆∇
buttons in the setting item select mode. It is shifted to setting value select
mode of the setting item by pressing the SelecType button. [Setting item] is
displayed on the upper line, and [Setting value] is displayed on the lower line.
The '*' represents the current setup value.
4. Setting value is displayed on the lower line one after another by pressing
Paper Feed ∆∇ buttons in the setting value select mode if the setting value can
be changed. The '*' represents the current setup value.
5. When the Enter button is pressed in the setting value select mode, the
displayed setting value is entered as the current setting value. If it has a
corresponded operation, it is started. No operation occurs if '*' is already
displayed.
6. It returns to the setting item select menu by pressing the Paper Source button
in the setting value select mode. It returns to the setting menu select mode by
pressing the Paper Source button in the setting item select menu.
Termination
Switch power OFF > ON.
Panel display
Character strings on the second line in “Panel message translation” are displayed
on the second line of LCD panel. Setup values are displayed on the second line of
LCD panel.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 71
MAINTENANCE MODE 2 SETUP ITEMS
Table 1-48. Maintenance mode 2 setup items
Top menu
(Panel display) Item menu 1 (Panel display) Item menu 2 Panel display Setup value
Counter view menu
(VIEW COUNTERS)
Cutter life counter value (CUTTER) - - 0~4294967295 (Decimal)
Cutter life total counter value (CUTTER TOTAL) - - 0~4294967295 (Decimal)
Total prints counter value (TOTAL PAGES) - - 0~4294967295 (Decimal)
Waste ink counter value (MAINTE TANK) - - 0~4294967295 (Decimal)
CR motor life counter value (CR MOTOR) - - 0~4294967295 (Decimal)
CR motor life total counter value (CR TOTAL) - - 0~4294967295 (Decimal)
PF motor life counter value (PF MOTOR) - - 0~4294967295 (Decimal)
Head unit (K1) life counter value (HEAD K1) - - 0~4294967295 (Decimal)
Head unit (K2) life counter value (HEAD K2) - - 0~4294967295 (Decimal)
Head unit (C) life counter value (HEAD C) - - 0~4294967295 (Decimal)
Head unit (M) life counter value (HEAD M) - - 0~4294967295 (Decimal)
Head unit (LC) life counter value (HEAD LC) - - 0~4294967295 (Decimal)
Head unit (LM) life counter value (HEAD LM) - - 0~4294967295 (Decimal)
Head unit (Y) life counter value (HEAD Y) - - 0~4294967295 (Decimal)
Flashing box (FL BOX) - - 0~4294967295 (Decimal)
Cleaning unit life counter value (CLEANER) - - 0~4294967295 (Decimal)
Sponge for borderless print counter (SPONGE) - - 0~4294967295 (Decimal)
Counter initialize menu
(CLEAR COUNTERS)
Initialize NVRAM, timer, life counter, mechanical
counter (INIT ALL) - - EXEC
Initialize NVRAM (NVRAM) - - EXEC
Initialize RTC (RTC) - - <YY>/<MM>/<DD>/<HH>
Initialize cutter life total (CUTTER) - - EXEC
Initialize CR motor life (CR MOTOR) - - EXEC
Initialize total CR motor life (CR TOTAL) - - EXEC
Initialize total PF motor life (PF MOTOR) - - EXEC
Initialize head unit (HEAD) - - EXEC
Initialize cleaning unit (CLEANER) - - EXEC
Initialize total printed pages counter (TOTAL
PAGES) --EXEC
Initialize waste ink capacity (MAINTE TANK) - - EXEC
Initialize flashing box (FL BOX) - - 0~4294967295 (Decimal)
Initialize sponge for borderless print counter
(SPONGE) - - 0~4294967295 (Decimal)
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 72
Adjustment / setup menu
(SERVICE CONFIG)
Paper feeding adjustment conversion table 3 (System
table pigment) (XX1=<nn>:<mm>) --
<nn> :00H~C9H
<mm> :00H~C9H,FFH
Paper feeding adjustment conversion table 4 (System
table dye) (XX2=<nn>:<mm>) - - <nn> :00H~C9H
<mm> :00H~C9H,FFH
System table version (XXS=<mmmmm>) - - <mmmmm> : F/W version
Parameter backup (BACKUP) - - EXEC
Device ID change (D-ID) - -
For R4C803P
StylusPro7600
StylusPro7600D
PX-7000
For R4C825P
StylusPro9600
StylusPro9600D
PX-9000
nk cartridge type setting (NPD) - - 0,1,2
CSIC detection level (ED MODE) - - O/N/X
Maintenance information
menu
(MAINTINFO)
Operation time, environment (MENUE)
RTC date E1 <YY><MM><DD><HH>
RTC initialized date E2 <YY><MM><DD><HH>
Environment temperature E3 <nn>
First power ON date E4 <YY><MM><DD>
Printer total energization time E5 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Energy star non-sleep mode total time E6 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Paper sensor total energization time E7 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Suction fan total energization time E8 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Front cover open/close times E9 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Temperature at print less than 15°C E10 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Temperature at print 15°C ~ 20°C E11 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Temperature at print 20°C ~ 25°C E12 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Temperature at print 25°C ~ 30°C E13 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Temperature at print 30°C ~ 35°C E14 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Temperature at print more than 35°C E15 <nnnnnnnnnn>
The highest temperature at print E16 <nn>
The lowest temperature at print E17 <nn>
Carriage (MENUR)
Carriage total turning times (190~240cps) R1 <nnnnnnnnn>
Carriage total turning times (240cps) R2 <nnnnnnnnn>
Carriage durable parts replacement date R3 <YY><MM><DD>
Carriage turning times after durable parts replacement (190~240cps) R4 <nnnnnnnnn>
Carriage turning times after durable parts replacement (240cps) R5 <nnnnnnnnn>
Table 1-48. Maintenance mode 2 setup items (continued)
Top menu
(Panel display) Item menu 1 (Panel display) Item menu 2 Panel display Setup value
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 73
Maintenance information
menu
(MAINTINFO)
Ink system (MENUS)
Total waste ink counter (sponge) S1 <nnnnnnn.n>
Total waste ink counter (flushing box) S2 <nnnnnnn.n>
Manual cleaning times S3 <nnnnnnnnn>
Cleaning times (CL1) S4 <nnnnnnnnn>
Cleaning times (CL2) S5 <nnnnnnnnn>
Cleaning times (CL3) S6 <nnnnnnnnn>
Cleaning times (CL4) S7 <nnnnnnnnn>
Cleaning times (CL5PowerCL) S8 <nnnnnnnnn>
Final CL5 cleaning date S9 <YY><MM><DD>
Cleaning times (TCL1) S10 <nnnnnnnnn>
Cleaning times (TCL2) S11 <nnnnnnnnn>
Cleaning times (TCL3) S12 <nnnnnnnnn>
Cleaning times (TCL4) S13 <nnnnnnnnn>
Ink type replacement times S14 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Ink replacement date (last time) S15 <YY><MM><DD>
Ink replacement date (2 times before) S16 <YY><MM><DD>
Ink type replacement times S17 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Ink replacement date (last time) S18 <YY><MM><DD>
Ink replacement date (2 times before) S19 <YY><MM><DD>
Ink type replacement times S20 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Ink replacement date (last time) S21 <YY><MM><DD>
Ink replacement date (2 times before) S22 <YY><MM><DD>
Ink type replacement times S23 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Ink replacement date (last time) S24 <YY><MM><DD>
Ink replacement date (2 times before) S25 <YY><MM><DD>
Ink type replacement times S26 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Ink replacement date (last time) S27 <YY><MM><DD>
Ink treplacement date (2 times before) S28 <YY><MM><DD>
Ink type replacement times S29 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Ink type replacement (last time) S30 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Ink type replacement (2 times before) S31 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Maintenance tank replacement times S32 <nnnnnnnnn>
Maintenance tank replacement date (this time) S33 <YY><MM><DD>
Maintenance tank replacement date (last time) S34 <YY><MM><DD>
Maintenance tank replacement date (2 times before) S35 <YY><MM><DD>
Table 1-48. Maintenance mode 2 setup items (continued)
Top menu
(Panel display) Item menu 1 (Panel display) Item menu 2 Panel display Setup value
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 74
Maintenance information
menu
(MAINTINFO)
Ink 1 (MENUA)
Total ink use EPSON genuine ink P.K(K in slot 1 for dye model) A1 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Total ink use EPSON genuine ink L.K(K in slot 2 for dye model) A2 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Total ink use EPSON genuine ink M.K A3 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Total ink use Others Slot 1 A4 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Total ink use Others Slot 2 A5 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Total ink use EPSON genuine ink CA6 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Total ink use Others C A7 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Total ink use EPSON genuine ink MA8 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Total ink use Others M A9 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Total ink use EPSON genuine ink LC A10 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Total ink use Others LC A11 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Total ink use EPSON genuine ink LM A12 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Total ink use Others LM A13 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Total ink use EPSON genuine ink YA14 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Total ink use Others Y A15 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Ink cartridge replacement times P.K(K in slot 1 for dye model) 110ml A16 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Ink cartridge replacement times P.K(K in slot 1 for dye model) 220ml A17 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Ink cartridge replacement times L.K(K in slot 2 for dye model) 110ml A18 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Ink cartridge replacement times L.K(K in slot 2 for dye model) 220ml A19 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Ink cartridge replacement times M.K 110ml A20 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Ink cartridge replacement times M.K 220ml A21 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Ink cartridge replacement times C 110ml A22 <nnnnnnnnn>
Ink cartridge replacement times C 220ml A23 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Ink cartridge replacement times M 110ml A24 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Ink cartridge replacement times M 220ml A25 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Ink cartridge replacement times LC 110ml A26 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Ink cartridge replacement times LC 220ml A27 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Ink cartridge replacement times LM 110ml A28 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Ink cartridge replacement times LM 220ml A29 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Ink cartridge replacement times Y 110ml A30 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Ink cartridge replacement times Y 220ml A31 <nnnnnnnnnn>
Table 1-48. Maintenance mode 2 setup items (continued)
Top menu
(Panel display) Item menu 1 (Panel display) Item menu 2 Panel display Setup value
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 75
Maintenance information
menu
(MAINTINFO)
Ink 2 (MENUB)
Each color ink replacement date (Black1, this time) B1 <YY><MM><DD>
Each color ink vendor (Black1, this time) B2 <xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx>
Each color ink replacement date (Black1, last time) B3 <YY><MM><DD>
Each color ink vendor (Black1, last time) B4 <xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx>
Each color ink replacement date (Black1, 2 times before) B5 <YY><MM><DD>
Each color ink vendor (Black1, 2 times before) B6 <xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx>
Each color ink replacement date (Black2, this time) B7 <YY><MM><DD>
Each color ink vendor (Black2, this time) B8 <xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx>
Each color ink replacement date (Black2, last time) B9 <YY><MM><DD>
Each color ink vendor (Black2, last time) B10 <xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx>
Each color ink replacement date (Black2, 2 times before) B11 <YY><MM><DD>
Each color ink vendor (Black2, 2 times before) B12 <xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx>
Each color ink replacement date (Cyan, this time) B13 <YY><MM><DD>
Each color ink vendor (Cyan, this time) B14 <xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx>
Each color ink replacement date (Cyan, last time) B15 <YY><MM><DD>
Each color ink vendor (Cyan, last time) B16 <xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx>
Each color ink replacement date (Cyan, 2 times before) B17 <YY><MM><DD>
Each color ink vendor (Cyan, 2 times before) B18 <xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx>
Each color ink replacement date (Magenta, this time) B19 <YY><MM><DD>
Each color ink vendor (Magenta, this time) B20 <xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx>
Each color ink replacement date (Magenta, last time) B21 <YY><MM><DD>
Each color ink vendor (Magenta, last time) B22 <xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx>
Each color ink replacement date (Magenta, 2 times before) B23 <YY><MM><DD>
Each color ink vendor (Magenta, 2 times before) B24 <xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx>
Each color ink replacement date (LgtCyan, this time) B25 <YY><MM><DD>
Each color ink vendor (LgtCyan, this time) B26 <xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx>
Each color ink replacement date (LgtCyan, last time) B27 <YY><MM><DD>
Each color ink vendor (LgtCyan, last time) B28 <xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx>
Each color ink replacement date (LgtCyan, 2 times before) B29 <YY><MM><DD>
Each color ink vendor (LgtCyan, 2 times before) B30 <xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx>
Each color ink replacement date (LgtMagenta, this time) B31 <YY><MM><DD>
Each color ink vendor (LgtMagenta, this time) B32 <xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx>
Each color ink replacement date (LgtMagenta, last time) B33 <YY><MM><DD>
Each color ink vendor (LgtMagenta, last time) B34 <xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx>
Each color ink replacement date (LgtMagenta, 2 times before) B35 <YY><MM><DD>
Each color ink vendor (LgtMagenta, 2 times before) B36 <xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx>
Each color ink replacement date (Yellow, this time) B37 <YY><MM><DD>
Table 1-48. Maintenance mode 2 setup items (continued)
Top menu
(Panel display) Item menu 1 (Panel display) Item menu 2 Panel display Setup value
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 76
Maintenance information
menu
(MAINTINFO)
Ink 2 (MENUB)
Each color ink vendor (Yellow, this time) B38 <xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx>
Each color ink replacement date (Yellow, last time) B39 <YY><MM><DD>
Each color ink vendor (Yellow, last time) B40 <xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx>
Each color ink replacement date (Yellow, 2 times before) B41 <YY><MM><DD>
Each color ink vendor (Yellow, 2 times before) B42 <xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx>
Table 1-48. Maintenance mode 2 setup items (continued)
Top menu
(Panel display) Item menu 1 (Panel display) Item menu 2 Panel display Setup value
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 77
Maintenance information
menu
(MAINTINFO)
Paper (MENUP)
Roll paper setting times P1 <nnnnnnnnn>
Sheets setting times P2 <nnnnnnnnn>
Print length of each paper size (Roll paper width 1) P3 <nnnnnnnnn>
Paper ejection times of each paper size (Roll paper width 1) P4 <nnnnnnnnn>
Print length of each paper size (Roll paper width 2) P5 <nnnnnnnnn>
Paper ejection times of each paper size (Roll paper width 2) P6 <nnnnnnnnn>
Print length of each paper size (Roll paper width 3) P7 <nnnnnnnnn>
Paper ejection times of each paper size (Roll paper width 3) P8 <nnnnnnnnn>
Print length of each paper size (Roll paper width 4) P9 <nnnnnnnnn>
Paper ejection times of each paper size (Roll paper width 4) P10 <nnnnnnnnn>
Print length of each paper size (Roll paper width 5) P11 <nnnnnnnnn>
Paper ejection times of each paper size (Roll paper width 5) P12 <nnnnnnnnn>
Print length of each paper size (Roll paper width 6) P13 <nnnnnnnnn>
Paper ejection times of each paper size (Roll paper width 6) P14 <nnnnnnnnn>
Print length of each paper size (Roll paper width 7) P15 <nnnnnnnnn>
Paper ejection times of each paper size (Roll paper width 7) P16 <nnnnnnnnn>
Print length of each paper size (Roll paper width 8) P17 <nnnnnnnnn>
Paper ejection times of each paper size (Roll paper width 8) P18 <nnnnnnnnn>
Print length of each paper size (Roll paper width 9) P19 <nnnnnnnnn>
Paper ejection times of each paper size (Roll paper width 9) P20 <nnnnnnnnn>
Print length of each paper size (Roll paper width 10) P21 <nnnnnnnnn>
Paper ejection times of each paper size (Roll paper width 10) P22 <nnnnnnnnn>
Print length of each paper size (Sheet width 1) P23 <nnnnnnnnn>
Paper ejection times of each paper size (Sheet width 1) P24 <nnnnnnnnn>
Print length of each paper size (Sheet width 2) P25 <nnnnnnnnn>
Paper ejection times of each paper size (Sheet width 2) P26 <nnnnnnnnn>
Print length of each paper size (Sheet width 3) P27 <nnnnnnnnn>
Paper ejection times of each paper size (Sheet width 3) P28 <nnnnnnnnn>
Print length of each paper size (Sheet width 4) P29 <nnnnnnnnn>
Paper ejection times of each paper size (Sheet width 4) P30 <nnnnnnnnn>
Print length of each paper size(Sheetwidth5) P31 <nnnnnnnnn>
Paper ejection times of each paper size (Sheet width 5) P32 <nnnnnnnnn>
Print length of each paper size (Sheet width 6) P33 <nnnnnnnnn>
Table 1-48. Maintenance mode 2 setup items (continued)
Top menu
(Panel display) Item menu 1 (Panel display) Item menu 2 Panel display Setup value
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 78
Maintenance information
menu
(MAINTINFO)
Paper (MENUP)
Paper ejection times of each paper size (Sheet width 6) P34 <nnnnnnnnn>
Print length of each paper size (Sheet width 7) P35 <nnnnnnnnn>
Paper ejection times of each paper size (Sheet width 7) P36 <nnnnnnnnn>
Print length of each paper size (Sheet width 8) P37 <nnnnnnnnn>
Paper ejection times of each paper size (Sheet width 8) P38 <nnnnnnnnn>
Print length of each paper size (Sheet width 9) P39 <nnnnnnnnn>
Paper ejection times of each paper size (Sheet width 9) P40 <nnnnnnnnn>
Print length of each paper size (Sheet width 10) P41 <nnnnnnnnn>
Paper ejection times of each paper size (Sheet width 10) P42 <nnnnnnnnn>
Print mode (MENUM)
Print mode setting times 2880-1440 Uni-D M1 <nnnnnnnnn>
Print mode setting times 1440-0720 Uni-D M2 <nnnnnnnnn>
Print mode setting times 720-720 Uni-D M3 <nnnnnnnnn>
Print mode setting times 720-360 Uni-D M4 <nnnnnnnnn>
Print mode setting times 360-720 Uni-D M5 <nnnnnnnnn>
Print mode setting times Others Uni-D M6 <nnnnnnnnn>
Print mode setting times 2880-1440 Bi-D M7 <nnnnnnnnn>
Print mode setting times 1440-720 Bi-D M8 <nnnnnnnnn>
Print mode setting times 720-720 Bi-D M9 <nnnnnnnnn>
Print mode setting times 720-360 Bi-D M10 <nnnnnnnnn>
Print mode setting times 360-720 Bi-D M11 <nnnnnnnnn>
Print mode setting times Others Bi-D M12 <nnnnnnnnn>
Borderless print times Sponge 1 M13 <nnnnnnnnn>
Borderless printing times Sponge 2 M14 <nnnnnnnnn>
Borderless print times Sponge 3 M15 <nnnnnnnnn>
Borderless print times Sponge 4 M16 <nnnnnnnnn>
Borderless print times Sponge 5 M17 <nnnnnnnnn>
Borderless print times Sponge 6 M18 <nnnnnnnnn>
Borderless print times Sponge 7 M19 <nnnnnnnnn>
Borderless print times Sponge 8 M20 <nnnnnnnnn>
Borderless print times Sponge 9 M21 <nnnnnnnnn>
Borderless print times Sponge 10 M22 <nnnnnnnnn>
Borderless print times Sponge 11 M23 <nnnnnnnnn>
Borderless print times Sponge 12 M24 <nnnnnnnnn>
Borderless print (four edges) Operation times (1 cut) M25 <nnnnnnnnn>
Borderless print (four edges) Operation times (2 cuts) M26 <nnnnnnnnn>
Table 1-48. Maintenance mode 2 setup items (continued)
Top menu
(Panel display) Item menu 1 (Panel display) Item menu 2 Panel display Setup value
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 79
Maintenance information
menu
(MAINTINFO)
Panel setting (MENUO)
PC setting O1 <nnnnnnnnn>
Roll paper margin O2 <nnnnnnnnn>
Borderless print setting O3 <nnnnnnnnn>
Cutter position adjustment O4 <nnnnnnnnn>
Final cutter position adjustment O5 <YY><MM><DD>
Nozzle check pattern print O6 <nnnnnnnnn>
Final nozzle check pattern print O7 <YY><MM><DD>
Bi-D BLACK Adjustment times O8 <nnnnnnnnn>
Bi-D BLACK Final adjustment date O9 <YY><MM><DD>
Bi-D COLOR Adjustment times O10 <nnnnnnnnn>
Bi-D COLOR Final adjustment times/date O11 <YY><MM><DD>
Uni-D Adjustment times O12 <nnnnnnnnn>
Uni-D Final adjustment date O13 <YY><MM><DD>
Cutting pressure O14 <nnnnnnnnn>
Cutting method O15 <nnnnnnnnn>
Paper feeding adjustment O16 <nnnnnnnnn>
Paper suction O17 <nnnnnnnnn>
Print adjustment O18 <nnnnnnnnn>
Table 1-48. Maintenance mode 2 setup items (continued)
Top menu
(Panel display) Item menu 1 (Panel display) Item menu 2 Panel display Setup value
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 80
Maintenance information
menu
(MAINTINFO)
Fatal error (MENUF)
Service call history1 (Type) F1 <xxxxxxxx>
Service call history1 (Date) F2 <YY><MM><DD>
Service call history2 (Type) F3 <xxxxxxxx>
Service call history2 (Date) F4 <YY><MM><DD>
Service call history3 (Type) F5 <xxxxxxxx>
Service call history3 (Date) F6 <YY><MM><DD>
Service call history4 (Type) F7 <xxxxxxxx>
Service call history4 (Date) F8 <YY><MM><DD>
Service call history5 (Type) F9 <xxxxxxxx>
Service call history5 (Date) F10 <YY><MM><DD>
Service call history6 (Type) F11 <xxxxxxxx>
Service call history6 (Date) F12 <YY><MM><DD>
Service call history7 (Type) F13 <xxxxxxxx>
Service call history7 (Date) F14 <YY><MM><DD>
Service call history8 (Type) F15 <xxxxxxxx>
Service call history8 (Date) F16 <YY><MM><DD>
Service call history9 (Type) F17 <xxxxxxxx>
Service call history9 (Date) F18 <YY><MM><DD>
Service call history10 (Type) F19 <xxxxxxxx>
Service call history1 0(Date) F20 <YY><MM><DD>
Table 1-48. Maintenance mode 2 setup items (continued)
Top menu
(Panel display) Item menu 1 (Panel display) Item menu 2 Panel display Setup value
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 81
Maintenance information
menu
(MAINTINFO)
Normal error (MENUN)
Normal error history 1 (Type) N1 <xx>
Normal error history 1 (Date) N2 <YY><MM><DD>
Normal error history 2 (Type) N3 <xx>
Normal error history 2 (Date) N4 <YY><MM><DD>
Normal error history 3 (Type) N5 <xx>
Normal error history 3 (Date) N6 <YY><MM><DD>
Normal error history 4 (Type) N7 <xx>
Normal error history 4 (Date) N8 <YY><MM><DD>
Normal error history 5 (Type) N9 <xx>
Normal error history 5 (Date) N10 <YY><MM><DD>
Normal error history 6 (Type) N11 <xx>
Normal error history 6 (Date) N12 <YY><MM><DD>
Normal error history 7 (Type) N13 <xx>
Normal error history 7 (Date) N14 <YY><MM><DD>
Normal error history 8 (Type) N15 <xx>
Normal error history 8 (Date) N16 <YY><MM><DD>
Normal error history 9 (Type) N17 <xx>
Normal error history 9 (Date) N18 <YY><MM><DD>
Normal error history 10 (Type) N19 <xx>
Normal error history 1 (0Date) N20 <YY><MM><DD>
Error times (Roll paper width) N21 <nnnnnnnnn>
Error times (Sheet) N22 <nnnnnnnnn>
Parts counter clear at replacement (MENUX)
Carriage unit clear at replacement X1 EXEC
Cleaning unit clear at replacement X2 EXEC
Head clear at replacement X3 EXEC
Cutter solenoid clear at replacement X4 EXEC
Table 1-48. Maintenance mode 2 setup items (continued)
Top menu
(Panel display) Item menu 1 (Panel display) Item menu 2 Panel display Setup value
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 82
Note 1: The panel display is English that is common for Japanese / English / French / German / Spanish / Portuguese.
2: Roll paper widths XX are following,
Stylus Pro 7600: 610mm and over ~ 160mm and under is classified at 50mm intervals.
Stylus Pro 9600: 1018mm and over ~ 10mm and under is classified at 100mm intervals.
3: However, if the witdth of the installed paper is smaller than set width, the latter will be used.
Maintenance information
initializing menu
(INITINFO)
Operation time, environment information counter
clear (INIT.MENUE) - - EXEC
Carriage information counter clear (INIT.MENUR) - - EXEC
Ink system information clear (INIT.MENUS) - - EXEC
Head information counter clear (INIT.MENUH) - - EXEC
Cutter information counter clear (INIT.MENUC) - - EXEC
Ink information 1 counter clear (INIT.MENUA) - - EXEC
Ink information 2 counter clear (INIT.MENUB) - - EXEC
Paper information counter clear (INIT.MENUP) - - EXEC
Print mode information counter clear (INIT.MENUM) - - EXEC
Panel setting information counter clear
(INIT.MENUO) --EXEC
Fatal error information counter clear (INIT.MENUF) - - EXEC
Normal error information counter clear
(INIT.MENUN) --EXEC
Table 1-48. Maintenance mode 2 setup items (continued)
Top menu
(Panel display) Item menu 1 (Panel display) Item menu 2 Panel display Setup value
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 83
INITIALIZE NVRAM, TIMER, LIFE COUNTER, MECHANICAL COUNTER
Selecting this mode allows the user to initialize the NVRAM, timer, life counter, and
mechanical counter.
INITIALIZE NVRAM
Selecting this mode allows the user to initialize the NVRAM.
INITIALIZE RTC
Selecting this mode allows the user to set RTC initialized time to NVRAM.
The panel display is following;
RTC INIT = <YY>/<MM>/<DD>/<HH>
NOTE: <YY>: year, <MM>: month, <DD>: day, <HH>: hour
The cursor shifts “year → month → day → hour → year···.” with SelecType button.
Time is adjusted with Paper Feed ∆∇ buttons. RTC initialized time is set to NVRAM
with Enter button, and RTC is initialized.
NOTE: “RTC backup battery end” maintenance call is reset when RTC is
initialized.
INITIALIZE CR MOTOR LIFE
Selecting this mode allows the user to initialize the CR motor life counter.
INITIALIZE CR MOTOR LIFE TOTAL
Selecting this mode allows the user to initialize the CR motor life total counter.
INITIALIZE PF MOTOR LIFE
Selecting this mode allows the user to initialize the PF motor life counter.
INITIALIZE HEAD UNIT LIFE
Selecting this mode allows the user to initialize the head unit life counter.
INITIALIZE CLEANING UNIT LIFE
Selecting this mode allows the user to initialize the cleaning unit life counter.
INITIALIZE TOTAL PRINTS
Selecting this mode allows the user to initialize the total printed page counter.
INITIALIZE INK CAPACITY
Selecting this mode allows the user to initialize the ink capacity counter.
NVRAM COUNTER VALUE INDICATION
Selecting this mode allows the user to indicate each life counter in decimal.
PARAMETER BACKUP
Selecting this mode allows the user to move to parameter backup mode. In parameter
backup mode, NVRAM responses and changes to manufacture setting commands are
possible with minimal chance of error. When an error occurs, NVRAM contents are
acquired and can be analyzed.
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION MENU
Read information for printer maintenance.
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION INITIALIZING MENU
Initialize information for printer maintenance. (Counter clear)
PARAMETER BACKUP MODE MENU
When this mode is selected, you can execute NVRAM backup or writing.
This mode does not support any printing data. In case printing data is sent, normal
operation is not guaranteed.
Only turning off the power works to terminate this mode. (Transition to any other
menu is not allowed.)
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 84
1.4.6 Paper feeding adjustment conversion table
The adjustment conversion table has four 256byte screens in NVRAM. The details are
as follows.
Use during printing
User table
When the conversion mode is ON in the paper feeding adjustment conversion
mode (SN 0A), the paper feeding adjustment setting (SN 04) m2 parameter
will be media ID and indicate user table address. The value stored in this
address is used as the paper feeding adjustment value. However, if the stored
value is FFh, the table is divided into three parts as shown below. The m2
parameter of the paper feeding adjustment setting (SN 04) to be used as the
paper feeding adjustment value changes depending on the corresponding ID
value.
1. 01h ~ 40h Use the value of ID+50h as the paper feeding adjustment
value.
2. 41h ~ C0h Use ID as the paper feeding adjustment value.
3. C1h ~ FFh Use the value of ID-64h as the paper feeding adjustment
value.
NOTE: Designation of pigment/dye depends on ink type setting (NPD setting/IK).
System table
This table is not used during printing. The manufacture setting value is stored
to use as backup for user table.
How to change correction values
User table
The user table can be changed from the SN menu of Maintenance mode 1.
(See “1.4.4 Maintenance Mode 1 (p.66)” for details.)
It can be changed by registering the remote commands paper feeding
adjustment offset value commands (SN83). It is necessary to save changes
(SV).
System table
The system table can be changed from the Maintenance mode 2 adjustment
menu. (See “1.4.5 Maintenance Mode 2 (p.70)” for details.)
User table initialization
Maintenance mode 1
Selecting “User table initialization” in SN menu allows the user to initialize
Maintenance mode 1.
Remote commands
Setting m2=00h in paper feeding adjustment offset value registration (SN 83)
allows the user to initialize remote commands.
Table 1-49.
Table name Description
1 Pigment user table For pigment ink media, can be changed by user, 256byte
2 Dye user table For dye inku media, can be changed by user 256byte
3 Pigment system table For pigment ink media, cannot be changed by user, 256byte
4 Dye system table For dye ink media, user cannot be changed by user, 256byte
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 85
1.4.7 Firmware Reload
1.4.7.1 Reload from ROM-DIMM
Reload method from ROM-DIMM is following;
1. Write RCC format F/W file into ROM-DIMM (C309type).
2. Switch power OFF and unplug the cable.
3. Remove the rear cover and insert “1.” ROM-DIMM into the exclusive slot.
4. Switch power ON.
5. Installation starts and finishes automatically.
6. Switch power OFF and unplug the cable.
7. Remove ROM-DIMM from exclusive slot.
8. Switch power ON.
1.4.7.2 Reload with F/W DOWNLOAD mode
Reload method via parallel interface is following;
1. Connect the printer to the host with a parallel cable.
2. Switch power ON pushing Enter + Paper Source + Cleaning buttons.
3. Check the printer panel displays “F/W DOWNLOAD”.
4. Send UPG format F/W file from the host.
5. Installation is completed.
6. Restart the printer (Power Off → Power On)
1.4.7.3 Installation with service utility (F/W Update function)
Installation via parallel interface is following;
1. Connect the printer to the host with a parallel cable.
2. Switch power ON.
3. Check that the printer panel displays “READY”.
4. Send UPG format F/W file from the host service utility.
5. Installation is completed.
6. The printer restarts automatically.
1.4.7.4 Compulsory start F/W DOWNLOAD mode
When F/W installation fails for some reasons and start up from begins the backup area,
F/W DOWNLOAD mode is automatically selected. See above for more information
about F/W DOWNLOAD mode.
NOTE: This mode is released when F/W installation is completed properly.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 86
1.4.8 Function to prevent irregular printing
Strong cancel data
When 16KB DC1 is sent to the head of each job, the printer performs a special
initialization operation.
Refer to “1.4.9 Initialization (p.86)” for this initialization operation.
Skip reading of irregular data
Unprintable characters
It doesn't print characters including ASCII code with text print mode.
NOTE: 0Ah, 0Ch, 0Dh, 11h, and 1Bh are ESCP command supported by the
printer. The printer judges the command and decides to print it.
Job timeout
Refer to “1.4.3.10 Job Timeout Setting (p.42)”.
1.4.9 Initialization
There are three kinds of initialization method.
1.4.9.1 Hardware initialization
This printer is initialized when power to the printer is turned on.
For initialization, printer operates as follows:
Initializes printer mechanism.
Clears input data buffer.
Clears print buffer.
Sets default values.
1.4.9.2 Software initialization
The printer is initialized also by the ESC @ command.
For initialization, printer operates as follows:
•Clears print buffer.
•Sets default values.
Cancel enhancement data(DC1×16kbyte) initializes the printer.
For initialization, printer operates as follows:
•Clears print buffer.
•Sets default values.
•Immediately cut only when some printing remain on the paper.
1.4.9.3 Panel initialization
The printer is initialized when the Pause button is pressed for more than 3 seconds, or
the printer recognizes the -INIT signal.
For initialization, printer operates as follows:
Eject a paper. (If roll paper, it cuts paper skipping print part when Paper
Source = Auto Cut, it doesn’t cut when Paper Source = Cutter Off with
SelecType)
Cap the print head.
Clears input data buffer.
Clears print buffer.
Sets default values.
Table 1-50. Unprintable hexadecimal code (Control character code)
Code Character Code Character Code Character
00h NULL 10h DLE 7Fh DEL
01h SOH 11h DC1 - -
02h STX 12h DC2 - -
03h ETX 13h DC3 - -
04h EOT 14h DC4 - -
05h ENQ 15h NAK - -
06h ACK 16h SYN - -
07h BEL 17h ETB - -
08h BS 18h CAN - -
09h HT 19h EM - -
0Ah NL (LF) 1Ah SUB - -
0Bh VT 1Bh ESC - -
0Ch NP (FF) 1Ch FS - -
0Dh CR 1Dh GS - -
0Eh SO 1Eh RS - -
0Fh SI 1Fh US - -
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 87
1.4.10 Default Setup Values
1.4.10.1 Initial Setting for Operation
Default setup values are as follows. The parameters for items that may be saved for
panel setup, default setup, and remote commands are used as default values.
Page position: Current paper position as page start position
Line feed: 1/6 inch
Left margin
: Stylus Pro 7600 237th character
: Stylus Pro 9600 437th character
Right margin: 1st character
Character pitch: 10 cpi
Print mode: Text mode
(non-raster graphics mode)
1.4.10.2 Ink Type Setting
In ink type setting during initial operation, dye ink will not be recognized if the switch
No. 6 of the DIP Switches (SWD600) on the Main Board of the printer.
There may be a case where "Ink Type" is not set (NPD=0) by ink detection at power on
(with the cartridges installed and without any other error). In such a case, check the
position of the switch No. 6 of the DIP Switches.
NOTE: When the power is turned off without the cartridges installed, NPD=0
will be maintained.
When switch No. 6 is OFF (dye prohibited)
When pigment has been installed
•Sets "Ink Type" for the printer to "Pigment".
•Initial charge is started if the initial charge flag has been set.
•Every time the power is turned on after that, the printer will start as the
Pigment machine.
When dye has been installed
•Displays "INVALID CARTRIDGE".
(The LEDs for all colors flash even when dye for only one color has been
installed.)
•Does not set "Ink Type" for the printer. (NPD=0 is maintained)
•NPD=0 even at the next start of the printer.
When switch No. 6 is ON
•Determines the ink type from the ink set that has been installed properly.
•If the printer is currently used as the dye machine (NPD=2), the printer does
not make judgment at power on. Therefore, the printer can be used as the dye
machine the same way as before.
•Even when "Ink Type" is changed to "Dye" directly in NPD mode, the printer
can be used as the dye machine.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 88
1.4.10.3 MW Printing Adjustment / Setting Values and Printing
Modes
Table below indicates the relationship between the setting values by MW printing
adjustment (setting on panel) and the printing mode numbers.
Note : For printing modes (Nos.), see “1.4.10.4 Printing Mode Combination Table (p.89)”.
Table 1-51. MW Printing Adjustment / Setting Values and Printing Modes
No. ESC(K n1 n2 ESC(D Setting on Panel
123456789
4 03h – – 360×360 No.4
5 – Non-MW/FOL –360×360 5 6 7 8
6 – MW 20h 360×360 5 6 7 8
7 – MW –360×360 5 6 7 8
8–FOL –360
×360 5 6 7 8
9 – Non-FOL 50h 360×720 9 10 11 12
10 – Non-FOL – 360×720 9 10 11 12
11 –Non-FOL B0h 360×720 9 10 11 12
12 – FOL – 360×720 9 10 11 12
13 –Non-FOL2/MW2 –720×360 13 14
14 – FOL2/MW2 – 720×360 13 14
15 – – 01h 720×720 15 16 17 18
16 – – – 720×720 15 16 17 18
17 – – 66h 720×720 15 16 17 18
18 – – 68h 720×720 15 16 17 18
19 –Non-8PASS – 1440×720 19 20
20 – 8PASS – 1440×720 19 20
21 – – – 2880×720 21
22 – – – 2880×1440 22
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Operating Panel 89
1.4.10.4 Printing Mode Combination Table
Valid print mode combination is following;
Note : When an improper combination is set, it prints with default of setting resolution
(designated dot size).
Table 1-52.
No. ESC ( K ESC( i ESC ( D ESC ( e Output
resolution Output dot size Pass Nozzle Nozzle # POL
nozzle Feeding CR speed
[CPS] Notes
n1 n2
1 - - - 180×180 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 180×180 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 - - - - Specified by
ESC(v command 240 DMW
2 - - - 360×180 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 360×180 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 - - - - Specified by
ESC(v command 240 DMW
3 - - - 720×180 VSD4 720×180 VSD4 - - - - Specified by
ESC(v command 190 DMW
4 03H - - 360×360 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 360×360 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 1 192 #1~#96 0 192/360” 240 Pseudo 4 color high-
speed color mode
5 - Non-MW/FOL - 360×360 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 360×360 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 1 95 #1~#95 0 1-189/360” 240 Color skip supported
6 - MW 20H 360×360 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 360×360 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 195 #1~#95 0 95/360” 240
7 - MW - 360×360 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 360×360 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 1 96 #1~#96 35 61/360” 240
8 - FOL - 360×360 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 360×360 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 296 #1~#96 22 37/360” 240
9 - Non-FOL 50H 360×720 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 360×720 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 1 96 #1~#96 21 75/720” 240
10 - Non-FOL - 360×720 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 360×720 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 196 #1~#96 35 61/720” 240
11 - Non-FOL B0H 360×720 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 360×720 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 1 96 #1~#96 43 53/720” 240
12 - FOL - 360×720 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 360×720 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 296 #1~#96 14 41/720” 240
13 - Non-FOL2/MW2 - 720×360 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 720×360 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 2 96 #1~#96 22 37/360” 240
14 - FOL2/MW2 - 720×360 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 720×720 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 296 #1~#96 14 41/720” 240 V resolution conversion
15 - - 01H 720×720 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 720×720 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 2 96 #1~#96 0 2-93/720” 240 Color skip supported
16 - - - 720×720 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 720×720 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 296 #1~#96 14 41/720” 240
17 - - 66H 720×720 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 720×720 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 2 96 #1~#96 26 35/720” 240
18 - - 68H 720×720 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 720×720 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 296 #1~#96 30 33/720” 240
19 - Except 8PASS - 1440×720 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 1440×720 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 4 96 #1~#96 4 23/720” 240
20 - 8PASS - 1440×720 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 1440×720 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 896 #1~#96 8 11/720” 240
21
22 - - - 2880×1440 VSD4 2880×1440 VSD4 492 #3~#94 0 23/1440” 190
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Controller 90
1.5 Controller
CPU: Hitachi SH7709S 100MHz
Code ROM: External, 2MB
Font ROM: None
RAM:
Stylus Pro 7600: 32MB (Mounted RAM: IC4/6)
Stylus Pro 9600:64MB (Mounted RAM: IC4/6, IC600/604)
Interface
IEEE 1284 interface
USB (HS, FS)
Type B interface
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Interfaces 91
1.6 Interfaces
1.6.1 Parallel Interface
1.6.1.1 Compatibility Mode
SPECIFICATION
Transmission mode: 8 bit parallel
Synchronization: By STROBE pulse
Handshaking: By BUSY and ACKNLG signal
Signal level: TTL level (IEEE1284Level 1 device)
Adaptable connector: 57-30360(amphenol) 36 pin or equivalent
NOTE: It is recommended to use as short an interface cable as possible.
CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENT AND SIGNALS
For these signals, twist-pair wires are used, with the return side connected to the signal
ground.
Note 1: “-” is prefixed to each signal which is active at “LOW” level.
2: In/Out refers to the direction of signal flow from the printer's point of view.
3: The “return side” means twist-pair return, which is connected to the signal GND. For
interface, each signal is connected with a twist-pair wire and the return side is also
connected. For protection against noise, this cable is shielded and connected to the
chassis GND for each of the center machine and the printer.
4: All the interface conditions are based on the TTL level standard. Each of the rise time
and fall time is 0.2 µs or less.
5: See Figure 1-19 for details of signal timing.
Table 1-53. Connector Pin Assignment and Signals (Compatibility)
Pin No. Return
GND pin Signal Name In/Out Function
119-STROBEIn
The strobe pulse. This signal is normally “HIGH” and
read-in of data is executed after turning “LOW”. The
pulse width required at the receive end is 0.5 µs or
more.
2 20 DATA0 In
The DATA0 through DATA7 signals represent data
bits 0 to 7, respectively. Each signal is at high level
when data is logical 1 and low level when data is
logical 0.
3 21 DATA1 In
4 22 DATA2 In
5 23 DATA3 In
6 24 DATA4 In
7 25 DATA5 In
8 26 DATA6 In
9 27 DATA7 In
10 28 -ACKNLG Out
This signal, when the signal level is “Low”, indicates
that the printer has received data and is ready to accept
the next data. The pulse width is 1 µs or 3 µs. (See
Figure 1-19)
11 29 BUSY Out
This signal, when the level is “HIGH”, indicates that
the printer can not receive data. When the level is
“LOW”, the signal indicates that the printer can
accept data. This signal turns “HIGH” in one of the
following cases:
During data entry
In error status
12 28 PE Out This signal, when the level is “HIGH”, indicates
paper-out error. (Valid when ERROR = “LOW”)
13 28 SLCT Out Always at “HIGH” level when the power to the printer
is on. Pulled up to +5 V via 1.0 kΩ.
14 30 -AFXT In Not used
31 30 -INIT In The printer is initialized by input of a “LOW” pulse
whose width is 50 µs or more.
32 29 -ERROR Out The “LOW” signal indicates that the printer is in error
status.
36 30 -SLIN In Not used
18 -- Logic H Out Always at “HIGH” level. Pulled up to +5 V via 3.9
KΩ.
35 -- +5V Out Always at “HIGH” level. Pulled up to +5 V via 1.0
kΩ.
17 -- Chassis GND -Chassis GND.
16,33
19-30 -- GND - Signal GND.
15,34 -- NC -Not used
Table 1-53. Connector Pin Assignment and Signals (Compatibility) (continued)
Pin No. Return
GND pin Signal Name In/Out Function
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Interfaces 92
6: Do not perform data transfer by ignoring the -ACKNLG signal or BUSY signal. (Data
transfer to this printer must be executed by checking the level of the -ACKNLG signal
or when the BUSY signal is “LOW”.)
7: Assign appropriate character codes to DATA0 ~ 7 of the interface connector (“1” for
open to GND and “0” for short to GND) and connect the BUSY signal line and the -
STROBE signal line. Then without using any external equipment, you can conduct
printing test of the printer including the interface circuit
PARALLEL INTERFACE TIMING CHART
Figure 1-19. Timing Chart
Note *1: Rise and fall time of every output signals
*2: Rise and fall time of every input signals
Table 1-54.
Parameter Minimum Maximum
tsetup 500 ns -
thold 500 ns -
tstb 500 ns -
tready 0 -
tbusy - 500 ns
tt-out*1-120 ns
tt-in*2-200 ns
treply 0 -
tack Typical 2us
tnbusy 0 -
tnext 0 -
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Interfaces 93
1.6.1.2 Nibble Mode
SPECIFICATION
Transmission mode: 8 bit parallel
Synchronization: By STROBE pulse
Handshaking: By BUSY and ACKNLG signal
Signal level: TTL compatible (IEEE1284Level 1 device)
Data trans. timing: Refer to the IEEE-1284 specification
Extensibility Request:
The printer responds affirmatively when the extensibility request values are 00H
or 04H, that mean,
00H Request Nibble Mode Reverse Channel Transfer.
04H Request Device ID; Return Data Using Nibble Mode Rev Channel
Transfer.
Device ID:
When IEEE1284.4 is valid
•<xx><xx>
(Character strings, depending on <Model Name>)
•MFG: EPSON;
•CMD: ESCPL2,BDC,D4;
•MDL: <Stylus Pro 7600-DYE/Stylus Pro 9600-DYE>;
•CLS: PRINTER;
•DES: EPSON<SP><Stylus Pro 7600-DYE/Stylus Pro 9600-
DYE>;(<SP>:space)
When IEEE1284.4 is not valid
•<xx><xx>
(Character strings, depending on <Model Name>)
•MFG: EPSON;
•CMD: ESCPL2,BDC;
•MDL: <Stylus Pro 7600-DYE/Stylus Pro 9600-DYE>;
•CLS: PRINTER;
•DES: EPSON<SP>T<Stylus Pro 7600-DYE/Stylus Pro 9600-DYE>;
(<SP>:space)
CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENT AND SIGNALS
Note "*": In/Out refers to the direction of signal flow from the printer's point of view.
Table 1-55. Connector Pin Assignment and Signals (Nibble)
Pin
No.
Return
GND Pin Signal Name In/Out * Function
1 19 HostClk In Host clock signal.
2 20 DATA0 In
The DATA0 through DATA7 signals
represent data bits 0 to 7, respectively. Each
signal is at high level when data is logical 1
and low level when data is logical 0.
3 21 DATA1 In
4 22 DATA2 In
5 23 DATA3 In
6 24 DATA4 In
7 25 DATA5 In
8 26 DATA6 In
9 27 DATA7 In
10 28 PtrClk Out Printer clock signal.
11 29
PtrBusy
/DataBit-3,7 Out Printer busy signal and reverse channel
transfer data bit 3 or 7.
12 28 AckDataReq
/DataBit-2,6 Out Acknowledge data request signal and reverse
channel transfer data bit 2 or 6.
13 28
Xflag
/DataBit-1,5 Out X-flag signal and reverse channel transfer
data bit 1 or 5.
14 30 HostBusy In Host busy signal.
31 30 -INIT In Not used.
32 29 -DataAvail
/DataBit-0,4 Out Data available signal and reverse channel
transfer data bit 0 or 4.
36 30 1284-Active In 1284 active signal.
18 -- Logic H Out Always “HIGH”. Pulled up to +5 V via 3.9 K
ohm resistor.
35 -- +5V Out Always “HIGH”. Pulled up to +5 V via 1.0 K
ohm resistor.
17 -- Chassis GND -- Chassis GND.
16,33,
19-30 -- GND -- Signal GND.
15,34 -- NC -- Not used
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Interfaces 94
1.6.1.3 ECP Mode
SPECIFICATION
Transmission mode: IEEE-1284ECP mode
Synchronization: IEEE-1284 specification
Handshaking: IEEE-1284 specification
Signal level: TTL compatible (IEEE1284Level 1 device)
Data trans. timing: IEEE-1284 specification
Extensibility Request:
The printer responds affirmatively when the extensibility request values are 10H
or 04H, that mean,
10H Request ECP Mode Reverse Channel Transfer.
14H Request Device ID; Return Data Using ECP Mode Rev Channel
Transfer.
Device ID:
When IEEE1284.4 is valid
•<xx><xx>
(Character strings, depending on <Model Name>)
•MFG: EPSON;
•CMD: ESCPL2,BDC,D4;
•MDL: <Stylus Pro 7600-DYE/Stylus Pro 9600-DYE> ;
•CLS: PRINTER;
•DES: EPSON<SP>T<Stylus Pro 7600-DYE/Stylus Pro 9600-DYE>;(<SP>:
space)
When IEEE1284.4 is not valid
•<xx><xx>
(Character strings, depending on <Model Name>)
•MFG: EPSON;
•CMD: ESCPL2,BDC;
•MDL: <Stylus Pro 7600-DYE/Stylus Pro 9600-DYE>;
•CLS: PRINTER;
•DES: EPSON<SP>T<Stylus Pro 7600-DYE/Stylus Pro 9600-DYE>;
(<SP>: space)
CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENT AND SIGNALS
Note "*": In/Out refers to the direction of signal flow from the printer's point of view.
Table 1-56. Connector Pin Assignment and Signals (ECP)
Pin
No.
Return
GND Pin Signal Name In/Out* Function
119HostClk In
Data or address information are transferred from a host to a
printer.
220 DATA0 In
The DATA0 through DATA7 signals represent data bits 0
to 7, respectively. Each signal is at high level when data is
logical 1 and low level when data is logical 0.
3 21 DATA1 In
422 DATA2 In
5 23 DATA3 In
624 DATA4 In
7 25 DATA5 In
826 DATA6 In
9 27 DATA7 In
10 28 PeriphClk Out Data is transferred from a printer to a host.
11 29 PeriphAck Out
A printer uses this signal for a flow control of forward
direction. Also this signal offers the data bit 9 that use it to
judge whether or not it is information command
information or data to be output on the data signal of
reverse direction.
12 28 nAckReverse Out A printer does drive to Low and approve nReverseRequest.
13 28 Xflag Out X-flag signal and reverse channel transfer data bit 1 or 5.
14 30 HostAck In
A host uses this signal for a flow control of reverse
direction. Also this signal offers the data bit 9 that use it to
judge whether or not it is information command
information or data to be output on the data signal of
forward direction.
31 30 nReverseRequest In This signal is made a low, to change a channel toward
reverse.
32 29 nPeriphReques Out This signal uses to produce a host interrupt.
36 30 1284-Active In 1284 active signal. “HIGH” in ECP mode
18 -- PeriphLogic Out Always “HIGH”. Pulled up to +5 V via 3.9 K ohm resistor.
35 -- +5V Out Always “HIGH”. Pulled up to +5 V via 1.0 K ohm resistor.
17 -- Chassis GND -- Chassis GND.
16,33
19-30 -- GND -- Signal GND.
15,34 -- NC -- Not connected.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Interfaces 95
1.6.2 USB interface
SPECIFICATION
Standard: “Universal Serial Bus Specifications Revision 2.0”
“Universal Serial Bus Specifications Revision 1.1”
“Universal Serial Bus Devices Class Definition for
Printing Devices Version 1.1”
Bit rate: 480Mbps (High Speed Mode)
12Mbp (Full Speed Device)
Data format: NRZI
Adaptable connector: USB Series B
Acceptable cable length: 2m
Device ID:
When IEEE1284.4 is valid
•<xx><xx>
(Character strings, depending on <Model Name>)
•MFG : EPSON;
•CMD : ESCPL2,BDC,D4;
•MDL : <Stylus Pro 7600-DYE/Stylus Pro 9600-DYE>;
•CLS : PRINTER;
•DES : EPSON<SP>T<Stylus Pro 7600-DYE/Stylus Pro 9600-
DYE>;(<SP>: space)
When IEEE1284.4 is not valid
•<xx><xx>
(Character strings, depending on <Model Name>)
•MFG : EPSON;
•CMD : ESCPL2,BDC;
•MDL : <Stylus Pro 7600-DYE/Stylus Pro 9600-DYE>;
•CLS : PRINTER;
•DES : EPSON<SP>T<ModeStylus Pro 7600-DYE/Stylus Pro 9600-
DYE>;(<SP>: space)
CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENT AND SIGNALS
Figure 1-20. Pin Assignment
Table 1-57. Connector Pin Assignment and Signals (USB(FS)
Pin No Signal name In/Out Function description
1 VCC - Cable power. Maximum power consumption is
100mA
2-Data bi-directional data
3 +Data bi-directional data, pull up to +3.3V via 1.5K ohm resistor
4Ground -Cable ground
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Interfaces 96
1.6.3 Optional Interface
Type-B interface (level 2, 1200mA type) is supported.
REPLY MESSAGE
(Case of using Type-B I/F card except above)
Card in Type-B slot 1:
Main-Type
Stylus Pro 7600:
MT48p,PW240cl10cpi,PRG(BNxxxx)rev,AP800ma,SPD0fast,GDI
Stylus Pro 9600:
MT48p,PW440cl10cpi,PRG(BWxxxx)rev,AP800ma,SPD0fast,GDI
NOTE: xxxx is F/W version.
Product-Name: <Stylus Pro 7600-DYE/Stylus Pro 9600-DYE>
Emulation-Type : ESCPL2-00
Entity-Type : EPSONLQ2
REPLY FOR OPTION COMMAND
Table 1-58. Reply List
Option command
number Command name Reply-A Reply-B
00h No-operation Accept None
01h Start Hardware Reset Accept Execute OK
02h Start Software Reset Reject
03h Send Main System Type Accept
04h Send Name Data Reject
05h Inquire Name Data Accept
06h Send Product Name Accept
07h Send Software Emulation Type Accept
08h Complete Buffered Data Accept Check Condition
09h Stop Procedure Reject Execute OK
0Ah Return Buffered Data Reject
0Bh Send Entity Type Accept
0Ch Send Status Accept
0Dh Quit Procedure Reject
0Eh Inquire ASCII Message Reject
0Fh Send ASCII Message Accept None
10h-13h Unknown None
14h Inquire Emergency Message Accept Execute OK
15h Send Emergency Reply Accept
16h-1Fh Unknown None
20h-FFh Reserved None
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Interfaces 97
SUPPORTED MAIN COMMAND AND SENDING TIMING
Sending BDC-ST through DBIN register
When State-Reply is set “ON” by ST from Type-B I/F, sending BDC-ST through
DBIN register is started. When State-Reply is started, “Start” and “End” of BDC-ST
characters are announced by sending the Main command 0Eh.
Emergency command (BGJC):
“0x00”: Get device ID
“0x01”: Get all status
“0x08”:LFP Bi-D command (For acquisition of job information)
1.6.4 Supplements
PREVENTION HOSTS FROM DATA TRANSFER TIME-OUT
When data is received from the parallel interface or the type B interface while no error
has occurred (including the pause condition), the printer receives data a rate of 2 byte/
second while buffer free space is less than 16 kbytes in order to prevent host timeout.
When buffer free space is more than 32kbytes, the 2 byte/second receive rate is cleared,
and receive is halted when free space reaches 16 bytes, and returns to the 2 byte/second
rate when free space reaches 512 kbyte or more.
INTERFACE SELECTION
The printer has the parallel interface, the USB interface, the optional interface. These
interfaces are selected manually by the default setting mode or selected automatically.
Manual selection
One of 3 interfaces can be selected; the parallel interface, the USB interface, the
optional interface.
Automatic selection
Select a interface which the printer received data first after power ON. If it passes
10 seconds after interruption of data receiving, it will be idle status (any interface
is not selected) and will select a interface which the printer received data first.
Interface state and interface selection
When the parallel interface is not selected, the interface goes into the busy
status.
Only reverse communication can be done at this time.
When the printer is initialized or returned to the idle state, the parallel
interface becomes ready status, the USB interface becomes non NACK reply
status, and the option interface resets OFF-LINE bit of Main Status Register
(MNSTS).
INIT signal on the parallel interface is not effective while that interface is not
selected or nibble Mode , ECP Mode.
Table 1-59. Commands and Sending Timing
Main command
number Command name Sending timing
01h Start Software Reset -Init signal on the std. parallel
-Type B I/F Option command: 01h
-Panel Reset
-Cold start
04h Send Name Data -Type B I/F Option command: 05h
07h Inquire Software Emulation
Type
-Changing Software Emulation type
0Eh Inquire ASCII Message -Writing to DBIN-register
14h Inquire Emergency Reply -Reply for Emergency command
15h Send Emergency Message -Receive Emergency command
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Optional Units and Consumables 98
1.7 Optional Units and Consumables
1.7.1 Ink Cartridge
Selection of ink types, detection of cartridges and the amount of remaining ink are
controlled by CSIC.
SPECIFICATION
Type: Pigment / Dye ink cartridge
Form: Exclusive ink cartridge
Ink capacity:
110ml (Model Number: ICxx24)
220ml (Stylus Pro 9600 only) (Model Number: ICxx25)
Dimension:
110ml: 25.1 mm (W) × 165.8 mm (D) × 105.3 mm (H)
220ml: 25.1 mm (W) × 280.8 mm (D) × 105.3 mm (H)
Total weight:
110ml: approx. 200g
220ml: approx. 385g
Effective ink:
110ml: more than 97.0 g
220ml: more than 205.0 g
Color:
Photo Black, magenta, light magenta, cyan, light cyan, yellow Light Black
(pigment only), Matte black (pigment only)
Environment condition
Temperature: 10°C ~ 40°C
Relative humidity:: 5% ~ 85%
Storage temperature
Ink life: 2 years from production date
Print quality assured: pigment:
6 months after open / dye: 2 years from production date
INSTALLATION LOCATIONS
The locations to install the ink cartridges are assigned from the left side of the ink
cartridge holder as indicated below:
CHECK
P O I N T
When installing the pigment ink cartridges, shake them gently
a couple of times beforehand to ensure the designed print
quality.
The 220 ml ink cartridges are supported only by Stylus Pro
9600.
Condition temperature Remarks
Packed -30°C ~ 40°C Within 1 month when 40°C
Installed -20°C ~ 40°C Within 1 month when 40°C
Packed
transportation
-30°C ~ 60°C Within 1 month when 40°C
Within 120 hours when 0°C
CHECK
P O I N T
If you remove an ink cartridge before it reaches the ink end state,
you should store it under the same ambient conditions as for the
printer body in such a way that the ink discharge opening is
protected from dust intrusion. The ink cartridge stored as such and
installed again can be used if it is within the term of availability.
Table 1-60. Locations to Install Ink Cartridges
Dye Pigment 1 Pigment 2 Pigment 3
1K Photo KMatte KMatte K
2 K Lk Lk Matte K
3CCCC
4MMMM
5LCLCLCLC
6LM LM LM LM
7YYYY
CHECK
P O I N T
Any ink cartridge other than the K and LK ink cartridges is
equipped with a wrong insertion preventing mechanism so that it
can be installed only at its position and in the correct orientation.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Product Description Optional Units and Consumables 99
1.7.2 Cleaning cartridge
Type: Exclusive cleaning cartridge
Dimension: Same as 220ml exclusive ink cartridge
Capacity: Same as 220ml exclusive ink cartridge
Total weight: Same as 220ml exclusive ink cartridge
Effective cleaning solution: Same as 220ml exclusive ink cartridge
Environment condition: Same as 220ml exclusive ink cartridge
Storage temperature: Same as 220ml exclusive ink cartridge
Life: Same as 220ml exclusive ink cartridge
1.7.3 Draining cartridge
Type: Exclusive draining cartridge (no ink pack)
Dimension: Same as 110ml exclusive ink cartridge
Capacity: None
Total weight: 75g approx.
Effective cleaning solution: None
Environment condition: Same as 110ml exclusive ink cartridge
Storage temperature: Same as 110ml exclusive ink cartridge
Life: Same as 110ml exclusive ink cartridge
1.7.4 Maintenance Tank
The maintenance tank is located in the lower space at the right side of the printer body
and constructed in such a way that the user can replace it when “maintenance tank full”
is detected.
Type: Exclusive maintenance tank for waste ink
Dimension:Width: 102.5 mm × Depth: 235 mm × Height:
79.5 mm
Capacity: 1000ml approx.
Total weight: TBD
Waste ink permitted limit: 650ml
Environment condition: TBD
CHECK
P O I N T
The cleaning cartridge is the same as the 220-ml ink cartridge in
shape except that it does not have the projection for a color block.
CHECK
P O I N T
The draining cartridge is the same as the 110-ml ink cartridge in
shape except that it does not have the projection for a color block.
CHAPTER
2
OPERATING PRINCIPLES
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Operating Principles Overview 101
2.1 Overview
This chapter explains the print mechanism and operating principles for the EPSON
Stylus Pro 7600/9600.
The explanation is composed as follows:
2.2 Print Mechanism Components (p.102)
2.2.1 Carriage (CR) Mechanism (p.103)
2.2.2 Paper Feed Assembly (p.113)
2.2.3 Cleaning Mechanism (p.115)
2.2.4 Ink Supply Mechanism (p.117)
2.2.5 Others (p.118)
2.3 Outline of Control Circuit Board (p.119)
2.4 Outline of Power Supply Circuit Board (p.120)
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Operating Principles Print Mechanism Components 102
2.2 Print Mechanism Components
The major electrical parts used in the printer mechanism of this printer are as shown
below. Hereafter, we will explain each printer mechanism focusing on these parts.
Table 2-1. Printer Mechanism Components
Part Drive
voltage Description Refer
to
Carriage (CR) Mechanism (p.103)
Print head The number of nozzles: 96
Nozzle x 7 colors p.105
Head thermistor +3.3V Incorporated in the print head
CR motor +42V DC motor p.104
CR_HP sensor
(Carriage origin) +3.3V Transmission type photo-interrupter p.104
CR encoder sensor +5V Linear encoder (180LPI) p.104
Pump motor +42V DC motor p.115
HD_SLID sensor
(Head slide origin) +3.3V Reflection type photo-interrupter p.107
P_EDGE sensor
(Paper edge) +5V Reflection type photo-interrupter p.108
Cutter solenoid +24V DC solenoid p.112
Paper Feed Assembly (p.113)
PF motor +42V DC motor p.113
PF encoder sensor +5V Linear encoder (360LPI) p.113
Paper suction fans +24V
The number of DC blowers
Stylus Pro 7600: 2
Stylus Pro 9600: 3
p.114
P_REAR sensor
(Paper rear) +5V Reflection type photo-interrupter p.114
P_THICK_0.3 sensor
(Paper thickness)
+3.3V/
+5V Transmission type photo-interrupter p.114
P_THICK sensor
(Paper thickness) +5V Transmission type photo-interrupter p.114
Release Sensor
(I/H lever) +5V Limit switch p.114
Ink Supply Mechanism (p.117)
Pump motor +42V DC motor p.115
Cleaning Mechanism (p.115)
Ink ID +5V,
+3.3V CSIC p.117
Maintenance tank +5V,
+3.3V CSIC p.115
Others (p.118)
Cover open sensor
(Cover Open L) +3.3V Limit switch p.118
MAIN board Printer control/drive circuit board p.119
Radiator cooling fan +5V DC brushless fan
Dip swich –Dip swich p.207
Jumper – Jumper
Power supply board –p.120
Table 2-1. Printer Mechanism Components (continued)
Part Drive
voltage Description Refer
to
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Operating Principles Print Mechanism Components 103
2.2.1 Carriage (CR) Mechanism
Stylus Pro 7600/9600 is equipped with a unique carriage mechanism which enables
reliable, high-precision movement of the on-carriage head for high-precision printing
in the printing range (= carriage movement range).
Figure 2-1. Carriage Mechanism
Carriage
CR_HP Sensor and Flag
Encoder Sensor and
Timing Fence
HD-SLID Sensor and
Slide Gear
P_EDGE sensor
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Operating Principles Print Mechanism Components 104
CARRIAGE MOVING UNIT
In place of the carriage holding system in which 2 CR guide shafts extending in the
column direction were used, as in the conventional models, a structure with the
carriage mounted via multiple rollers (bearings) on a CR guide rail made of a square
extruded aluminum pipe is used. Steel rails are incorporated in the roller contact and
running surface, and the result is a reduction in friction in the direction of movement,
reduced vibration and improved durability.
CR motor
A DC motor is used for the CR motor and the slit in the timing fence affixed on the
bottom of and parallel with the CR guide rail is read by the encoder sensor
mounted on the carriage (linear encoder system), and this signal is compared to
logical control values in the control circuit on the MAIN board, which carries out
feedback speed control. Through this control, high print precision is maintained.
Drive transmissions from the CR motor to the carriage use the easy-to-maintain,
durable timing belt.
The sensors used in the carriage moving unit are described below.
CR_HP Sensor (Carriage Home Position)
This is a transmissive photosensor which is mounted on the right end of the printer
mechanism and detects the entry position of the flag (projection) provided on the
carriage as the carriage moving home position. Outputs from this sensor are
“OFF” in the HP range and “ON” outside the HP range.
CR encoder sensor (Linear Encoder)
This encoder is mounted on the back of the carriage and outputs pulses (2
channels) corresponding to the position of the slit on the timing fence that is
incorporated into the CR guide rail which are used for CR motor servo control and
PTS (Print Timing Signal) generation. The resolution is 1/180 inch.
Figure 2-2. Carriage Mechanism Unit, Carriage Moving Unit
C A U T I O N The screws used to fasten the CR guide rail should not be taken out
and the carriage should not be removed. These are adjusted and
assembled to the nearest 1/100 mm at the factory.
Projection on Carriage
CR_HP Sensor
Outside HP range Inside HP Range
Step Ruler (Slit Plate)
CR_HP Sensor
(Mounted on the
mechanism’s right
end.)
Encoder Sensor
(On Carriage)
CR Motor
CR Timing Belt
Encoder Sensor
Carriage
HP Flag
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Operating Principles Print Mechanism Components 105
PRINT HEAD
Stylus Pro 7600/9600 employs a single print head which incorporates both functions
for black and color. (The preceding model has two print heads, namely, head B and
head C.)
The print head incorporates a thermistor. According to the temperature around the head
detected by the thermistor, the CPU on the Main Board controls the ink discharge
speed and the amount of ink to be discharged.
Printing method: On-demand ink-jet
Nozzle configuration: 96 nozzles x 7 rows = 672 nozzles
(See Figure 2-3 for nozzle arrangement.)
Black: 192 nozzles (96 nozzles for each of Black1 and Black2)
Color: 480 nozzles (96 nozzles for each of cyan, magenta,
light cyan, light magenta and yellow)
Nozzle pitch: 0.141mm (1/180 inch) for each color
Figure 2-3. Nozzle Arrangement
Drive waveform:
There are three printing modes (drive waveforms) for each of use of pigment ink
and use of dye ink.
Table 2-2. Relationship between Nozzle Rows and Colors
Ink Type Nozzle Row Color
Pigment A Photo Black or Matte Black
BGray or Matte Black
CC
DLc
EM
FLm
GY
Dye ABk
BBk
C C
DLc
E M
FLm
G Y
Table 2-3. Printing Modes (Drive Waveforms)
Ink Type Waveform
Name
Ink Discharged
(ng) Drive Frequency Print Resolution CR Speed
Pigment ink
VSD1 13.8-27.6-41.5 8.64 KHz H360 x V360
H720 x V360 240 CPS
VSD2 4.5-9.5-23.0 8.64 KHz H720 x V720
H1440 x V720 240 CPS
VSD4 4.5 2 shots at 6.84 KHz H2880 x V1440 190 CPS
Carriage Moving Direction
A Row
B Row
C Row
D Row
E Row
F Row
G Row
Paper Feed Direction
B Row
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Operating Principles Print Mechanism Components 106
PLATEN GAP ADJUSTMENT UNIT
In order to maintain the print precision, it is necessary to maintain the carriage (= head)
mounting position so that it is always a constant distance from the surface of the paper.
In this printer, the print head nozzle surfaces and platen surface are variable
mechanisms so that the gap between the paper printing surface and the head nozzle
surface can be kept constant.
The carriage has a 2-body construction with a sub-carriage on which the print heads are
mounted attached to the carriage which forms the base. The sub-carriage moves in the
vertical direction with respect to the paper surface. This movable system uses a cam.
The sub-carriage to paper surface distance changes linearly from the cam (= PG) home
position. When the carriage is in the HP position (= right end), the pump motor and the
gear mounted on the cam shaft engage, the motor's rotation (reverse) drives the cam
and the sub-carriage is positioned at the proper gap position.
In order to maintain the distance between the print head nozzle surface and the paper
properly, the thicknesses of the paper used are classified into 3 levels for PG setting,
namely, PG small (1.3 mm), PG medium (2.2 mm) and PG large (2.7 mm).
The sensors used in the platen gap adjustment unit are explained below.
Figure 2-4. Carriage Mechanical Unit and PG Adjustment Unit
Dye ink
VSD1-Dye 13.8-27.6-41.5 8.64 KHz H360 x V360
H720 x V360 240 CPS
VSD2-Dye 5.4-9.5-23.0 8.64 KHz H720 x V720
H1440 x V720 240 CPS
VSD4-Dye 2.5 2 shots at 6.84 KHz H2880 x V1440 190 CPS
Table 2-3. Printing Modes (Drive Waveforms)
Ink Type Waveform
Name
Ink Discharged
(ng) Drive Frequency Print Resolution CR Speed
Slide Gear
Sub-carriage
(head mounted)
Bearing
CR Guide Rail
Carriage
PG (Head SLID)
Bearing
HD_SLID
Sensor
Right Side of Carriage
Pump motor driving
force (CCW)
Right Side of Printer Mechanism
HP Detection Flag
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Operating Principles Print Mechanism Components 107
HD_SLID (Head Gap Home Position Detection) Sensor
This sensor detects the mechanical home position when the position of the sub-
carriage (head height from the paper surface) on the carriage undergoes change. A
reflective type photosensor is used and the position of the flag on the gear mounted
on the camshaft is detected.
The cam is so shaped as to realize the four head positions relative to the
mechanical home position.
Detecting distance up to the reflector: 7.5 ± 0.5 mm
NOTE: Error number displayed when the total pulse count has exceeded 1000:
0001000C Head slide origin detection error (Service Call Error)
Figure 2-5. Head Slide (PG Change) Initialization Sequence
Table 2-4. Pulse Positions
Position Gap Width Application
Pulse Count from
Origin (Converted to 2-
2 Phase Excitation)
Large 2.6 mm Platen gap for thick paper 37
Medium 2.2 mm Platen gap for paper which can be
soiled if setting is for thin paper
121
Small 1.2 mm Platen gap for thin paper 204
Minimum 0.7 mm Platen gap for film 287
One round 333
Pump motor runs forward until head slide origin sensor turns
OFF
Slide Sensor OFF
?
Start
Sequence for moving to pseudo-vacuum position
Pump motor runs forward until head slide origin sensor turns
ON
After head slide origin sensor turns ON, pump motor runs
forward by 10 pulses
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Slide Sensor OFF
?
Slide Sensor ON
?
Pump motor runs forward until head slide origin sensor turns
OFF
No Slide Sensor OFF
?
Yes
Pump motor runs forward by 204 pulses (till the “Small”
platen gap position)
Pump motor runs forward by 18 pulses (till epicyclic gear
release)
End
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Operating Principles Print Mechanism Components 108
P_EDGE (Paper Width Detection) Sensor
This sensor, mounted at the left side of the cutter unit of the carriage, detects paper
edges by moving the carriage.
It detects four points of paper edges, namely, left and right points on the front edge
and a front point on the left and right edges of the paper. Each position is
calculated from the difference in reflection value between the platen and the paper.
A reflective type photosensor is used. Each paper edge position (presence or
absence of paper) is determined by an A/D converted value of the output from the
photosensor.
During printing, the sensor monitors the left and right edges of the paper to detect
a skew.
Detecting distance up to the paper surface: 7.0mm ± 0.5
NOTE: It is possible to turn this sensor off by “SelecType” (p.35).
The following pages show paper size detection sequence (left and right edges and front
edge).
Figure 2-6. Carriage Unit Paper Width Detection Sensor
CHECK
P O I N T
It must be ensured that the reflection value of the least
reflective paper is greater than the reflection value of the
platen.
The paper must be free from floating at the detection point.
If external light, such as sunlight, can enter the sensor due to
the construction, mis-detection must be prevented by LED ON/
OFF control.
(Same as with Stylus Pro 7000)
In Stylus Pro 7600/9600, the P_EDGE Sensor works also to
detect the paper front edge. (Stylus Pro 7600/9600 does not
have the P_FRONT Sensor for exclusive use to detect the paper
front edge which is incorporated in the conventional printer
models.)
Left edge
Carriage
HP Side
P_EDGE Sensor
Right edge
Scanning of HP side →
Opposite side
Scanning of opposite side
→ HP side
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Operating Principles Print Mechanism Components 109
Paper size detection sequence (left and right edges)
Error display:
Set the paper correctly
Figure 2-7. Paper Size Detection Sequence (Left and Right Edges)
CHECK
P O I N T
Transition to this sequence is allowed only at paper initial.
At inter-page skew checking, transition to Simplified detection
sequence for left and right edges (skew check) (p.111) takes place.
Solid Line: Paper
Broken Line: Printable
Area
Right edge
detection
position
Left edge
detection
position Paper absence detected
?
Left and right edge
detection start
No
Yes
Return
CR moves to the paper presence position (100CPS).
Flashing during acceleration on Fl_Box
Moving to paper absence position. Threshold value is
calculated during moving to paper presence position. After
determination of threshold value, edge sensor LED is kept on.
*1
While monitoring the edge sensor output, CR moves outward
toward the printing area MAX position (350CPS). *2
From the position where the sensor output has changed, CR
moves by 2 mm toward the home. (240CPS)
While monitoring the edge sensor output, CR moves outward
at 5 cps. The position where paper absence is detected is
judged to be the right edge position of the paper.
While monitoring the edge sensor output, CR moves toward
the home to the printing area MIN position (350CPS). *3
Paper absence detected
?
No
Yes
From the position where the sensor output has changed, CR
moves by 2 mm outward (240CPS).
While monitoring the edge sensor output, CR moves toward
the home at 5 cps. The position where paper absence is
detected is judged to be the left edge position of the paper.
Paper width>210 – 20mm
? *4
No
Yes Edge sensor LED is turned off.
Error
Note "*1": Paper presence position = 215.4 mm
Paper absence position = 132.9 mm
LED turns off upon completion of front
detection.
"*2": Printing area MAX position
Stylus Pro 9600:
1260.5mm + 7.0mm (Reserved width)
Stylus Pro 7600
752.5mm + 7.0mm (Reserved width)
"*3": Printing area MIN position
142.9mm –4.0mm (Reserved width)
"*4": To prevent wrong recognition as paper
presence when there is no paper as a result
of wrong detection of the rib of the platen
by the edge sensor, a paper width detected
to be not greater than A4 size - 20 mm is
judged to be paper absence.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Operating Principles Print Mechanism Components 110
Paper size detection sequence (front edge)
Conditions:
For execution of this processing, the paper level threshold value must be
known. (Execute this processing after detection of the right and left edges.)
Error display:
Set the paper correctly
When the paper width detection function is turned off, use the paper size front
position as the user paper setting position. (On the assumption that detection
is not made by the edge sensors)
Figure 2-8. Paper Size Detection Sequence (Front Edge)
Paper absence detected
?
Front edge detection start
No
CR moves onto Fl_Box. (350CPS)
While monitoring the edge sensor output, PF moves in the
negative direction (picks up paper). (40CPS)
PF stops if paper absence is detected. *2
Paper absence detected by
edge sensor?
No
Note "*1": Paper left upper detection position =
Paper left edge position +27.5mm
"*2": PF maximum travel = –260mm
(Self-diagnostics mode –340mm)
No change in sensor output even
when this travel has been exceeded is
handled as an error.
Stylus Pro 9600: 1260.5mm + 7.0mm
(Reserved width)
Stylus Pro 7600: 752.5mm + 7.0mm
(Reserved width)
"*3": PF moving target position = 1st
nozzle position (0.00 mm)
No change in sensor output even
when this position has been passed is
handled as an error.
"*4": Paper right upper detection position =
Paper right edge pos. –27.5mm
"*5": In the figure below, the left upper
leading edge is handled as the paper
size front position. (On the
assumption that the paper front edge
is not correctly perpendicular to the
paper feed direction)
CR moves to the paper left upper detection position. *1
While monitoring the edge sensor output, PF moves in the
positive direction (gets paper off). (5CPS) The position where
paper presence is detected is judged to be the left front edge
position of the paper. *3
CR moves to the paper right upper detection position.
(350CPS) *4
While monitoring the edge sensor output, PF moves in the
positive direction (gets paper off) (40CPS). PF stops if paper
presence is detected. (Prevention of skew at leading edge) *3
Paper presence detected
?
No
Paper absence detected
?
No
Yes
Edge sensor LED is turned off. Edge sensor LED is turned off.
While monitoring the edge sensor output, PF moves in the
positive direction (gets paper off) (40CPS). The position
where paper absence is detected is judged to be the right front
edge position of the paper. *3
Return Error
Yes
Yes
Yes
The paper left front edge position and the right front edge
position are compared and the one in the positive direction
(upper one) is judged to be the paper size front position. *3
While monitoring the edge sensor output, PF moves in the
negative direction (picks up paper) (40CPS).
PF stops if paper absence is detected. *2
Solid Line: Paper
Broken Line: Printable
Area
Detection
position for
right upper
leading edge
position
Detection
position for left
upper leading
edge position
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Operating Principles Print Mechanism Components 111
Simplified detection sequence for left and right edges (skew check)
When the paper width detection function is turned off, left and right edge
detection (skew check) is not carried out.
Error display:
1: Set the paper correctly
2: PAPER NOT STRAIGHT
a
Figure 2-9. Simplified Detection Sequence for Left and Right Edges
(Skew Check)
CHECK
P O I N T
Transition to this sequence is allowed only at inter-page skew
checking (at cut/eject, etc.) At paper initial, transition to “Paper size
detection sequence (left and right edges)” (p.109) takes place.
Solid Line: Paper
Broken Line: Printable
Area
Right edge
detection position
Left edge
detection position
Previously determined
paper width X mm
Paper absence detected
?
Left and right edge
detection start
No
CR moves to the paper presence position (100CPS).
Flashing during acceleration on Fl_Box
Note "*1": Paper presence position = 215.4 mm
Paper absence position = 132.9 mm
LED turns off upon completion of skew
check.
"*2": Printing area MIN position
=142.9 mm –4.0 mm (Reserved width)
A4 size (210.0 mm) – 20.0 mm = 190.0
mm
Edge sensor LED is turned off.
Error 2
Yes
Moving to paper absence position. Threshold value is
calculated during moving to paper presence position. After
determination of threshold value, edge sensor LED is kept on.
*1
CR moves to the position "printing area MIN position + A4
size - 20 mm = 328.9 mm" (350CPS) *2
While monitoring the edge sensor output, CR moves toward
the home to the printing area MIN position (350CPS).
From the position where the sensor output has changed, CR
moves by 2 mm outward (240CPS).
Paper right edge
position deflected by 3 mm from previously
determined position?
Yes
No
While monitoring the edge sensor output, CR moves toward
the home at 5 cps. The position where paper absence is
detected is judged to be the left edge position of the paper.
The paper width determined by the previously executed left
and right edge detection (at paper initial or skew check) is
added to the left edge position. The resultant position is
regarded as the paper right edge position.
Paper left edge
position deflected by 3 mm from previously
determined position?
Yes
No
Edge sensor LED is turned off.
Error 1
Edge sensor LED is turned off.
Return
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Operating Principles Print Mechanism Components 112
Cutter Solenoid
This DC solenoid controls the cutting pressure of the roll paper cutter. It also
unlock the carriage.
This function can be set On or Off using the Panel buttons.
NOTE: See “1.2.6.3 Cutting Specification” (p.22)
Figure 2-10. Carriage Unit Cutter Solenoid
Carriage
Cutter Solenoid
Roll Paper
Cutter
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Operating Principles Print Mechanism Components 113
2.2.2 Paper Feed Assembly
This printer uses friction feed to carry out highly precise feeding of roll paper and cut
sheets, and comprises a unique paper feed mechanism.
The paper feed mechanism unit is configured from a grid roller (one piece
construction), and pressurizing and follower roller assemblies mounted on the back of
the CR guide rail opposite the front surface.
Figure 2-11. Paper Feed Mechanism Unit 1/2
PF motor
The PF motor is a DC motor. The grid of the loop scale mounted on the Grid
Roller is read by the PF_ENC sensor and the output pulse is fed back to control the
motor. This feedback control ensures high printing accuracy.
Driving of the grid roller is accomplished by the PF motor via the PF timing belt
which attaches to a reduction pulley that is connected to the grid roller.
Figure 2-12. Paper Feed Mechanical Unit PF Rail Unit
Grid Roller
Secondary Roller Assembly
PF Motor
Paper Set Lever
R = Paper width flag
L = Paper Set Lever flag
Secondary Roller Assembly
Grid Roller
CR Guide Rail
Speed-Reduction Gear
Platen
Sub Platen
Paper
Paper Guide L1, L2
PF Motor
Center Frame
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Operating Principles Print Mechanism Components 114
Paper Suction Fans
The printer is equipped with suction fans in the lower space in the rear. The space
in the column direction behind Paper Guide L2 is divided into 2 compartments
(Stylus Pro 7600) or 3 compartments (Stylus Pro 9600), and one fan is mounted in
each compartment. By drawing air through multiple holes punched in Paper Guide
L2 in the back surface of the paper path and blowing it out through the rear of the
printer housing, suction is applied to the surfaces of Paper Guides L1 and L2 and
the paper is stabilized (prevented from flying up) as it passes through the printer.
The suction fans undergo air flow control (fan rotation duty control), which is
carried out by firmware control based on the printer's operating state (when paper
is set and during printing, etc.) and the type of paper used.
NOTE: Fans mounted
Stylus Pro 7600: 2 fans
Stylus Pro 9600: 3 fans
The following sensors aid in the paper feeding process.
P_REAR sensor
This sensor is attached to the Upper Paper Guide and is an optical (photo-
reflective) sensor. This sensor detects the rear edge of the paper and detects the
front edge when the paper is first loaded in the paper path. The position of this
sensor is stored in EEPROM.
Paper set lever, paper thickness detection (P_THICK, P_THICK_0.3)
P_THICK_0.3 Sensor: Transmission type photosensor, left side.
P_THICK Sensor: Transmission type photosensor, right side.
The mechanism is so designed that the threshold values for paper thickness are 0.3 ~
0.4 mm (P_THICK_0.3 sensor) and 0.8 ~ 0.9 mm (P_THICK sensor). The sensors
operate just when the pressure lever is brought down.
The designed detection values of the sensors for the UP and DOWN positions of the
pressure lever are 0.3 mm and 0.8 mm. The pressure lever in the UP position is
detected by a combination of both sensors.
“Thick paper state” occurs when the connections are open.
There is no error processing since this mechanism can not determine whether it has
broke down or not.
Since the mechanism is always in recognition of thick paper, printing on thin paper is
carry out with the platen gap kept large.
Figure 2-13. Paper Feed Mechanical Unit (Stylus Pro 7600) 2/2
Table 2-5. Modes
Paper Thickness Shield Plate Sensor Output
P_THICK_0.3 P_THICK P_THICK_0.3 P_THICK
Below 0.3 mm Absent (Open) Absent (Open) L L
0.3 mm to 0.8 mm incl. Present (Closed) Absent (Open) H L
0.81 mm or above Present (Closed) Present (Closed) H H
Connector not connected - - H H
Pressure release (Hi-Up) - - L H
Paper suction fans
P-Rear sensor
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Operating Principles Print Mechanism Components 115
2.2.3 Cleaning Mechanism
The cleaning mechanism in this printer is compatible with the cleaning mechanism in
the Stylus Pro 5000/9000. The cleaning mechanism is located on the right side of the
printer. The waste ink from the cleaning mechanism is channeled to the waste ink pad
(Maintenance Tank) in the lower right side through the tube.
The cleaning mechanism components are installed above the sub-frame and some are
fixed on the main frame as shown below.
Pump assembly (head cleaner)
When the head is in the capped position (valve closed), the pump motor creates a
vacuum that sucks ink from the nozzles. This is used for removing ink from the
nozzles and nozzle plate, initial ink charge, as well as cleaning. The waste ink
flows through one small tube to the waste ink pads.
Head cleaner
The head cleaner has felt on one side and rubber on the other, and is used to wipe
or rub off ink and foreign materials from the nozzle surface.
Pump motor (stepping motor)
The pump motor runs normally (the pump wheel turns clockwise as viewed from the
pump wheel side) and reverses (the pump wheel turns counterclockwise) to execute the
following functions:
Clockwise rotation (CW):
pump assembly drive for cleaning and so on
(Suction, wiper setting)
Counter clockwise rotation (CCW):
Pump release, wiper reset, HD_SLIDE (head gap adjustment) cam drive. See
“Platen Gap Adjustment Unit” (p.106).
Note : The values for Motor Frequency above, given only for information, are obtained by 2-2
phase drive conversion with a drive system consisting of the pump wheel with P.C.D of
φ
30.4 and motor gear with P.C.D of
φ
6.
Figure 2-14. Cleaning Mechanism Components
Figure 2-15. Cleaning Mechanism Components
Table 2-6. Pump Drive Modes
Suction Speed Name
(Drive Mode)
Pump Wheel
Revolving Speed
Pump Wheel
Revolving Speed
Motor Frequency
(2-2 phase conversion)
Low speed (IS5) 0.46 rev/sec 0.15 ml/sec 186 Hz
Standard (IS4) 1.6 rev/sec 0.6 ml/sec 648 Hz
High speed (IS3) 2.6 rev/sec 0.9 ml/sec 1053 Hz
Super-high speed (IS2) 4.2 rev/sec 1.1 ml/sec 1702 Hz
Super-high speed (IS1) 5 rev/sec 1.2 ml/sec 2026 Hz
Cleaning Mechanism
(Maintenance ASSY)
Maintenance Tank
CR Lock Cap assembly
Head cleaner
Pump motor
Pump assembly
Flushing box
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Operating Principles Print Mechanism Components 116
Cap assembly
When not printing, the print head (should) rest on the cap assembly to ensure that
the nozzles don't clog. Also, the print head is in the capped position during ink
charging, cleaning, and so on.
Flushing box
Flushing (dummy printing) is performed over the flushing box, and the flushed ink
flows through the pipe to the waste ink pads.
CR Lock Mechanism
If the carriage moves from the printable area to beyond the capping (CR_HOME)
position to the right, the carriage moving prevention lock is engaged. The CR lock
mechanism uses the cutter solenoid in common. When the cutter solenoid goes ON
in the capping position, the CR lock is released.
Maintenance Tank (Waste ink absorber)
NOTE: The Ink System Terms used in the above text are explained in the
following table.
Table 2-7. Explanation of Operation
Operation Explanation
Carriage (CR) Lock • This is the carriage stop position when the power is Off.
• The time when the carriage is in the standby position (home position)
with the power On and with no paper loaded and no print data to
print.
Ink Initial Filling • This is the operation where the head is filled with ink for the first
time. When the first ink cartridge is inserted (after all 6 colors have
been inserted), the ink initial filling operation is performed
automatically.
• The initial filling flag is set when the printer is shipped from the
factory, then after this operation, the initial filling flag is reset. The
initial filling flag is also set after the “ Input Rank” (p233) is run.
Flushing • In order to prevent the viscosity of the ink inside the head nozzles
from increasing, the ink inside the flushing box is flushed out.
• Flushing is done when paper is set, when printing from the standby
state, during continuous printing, during paper Eject, during paper
cutting, etc.
Empty Suction
Operation
• After ink is sucked up, the remaining ink inside the cap is sucked up
and the ink adhering to the head nozzle surface is removed.
• Through flushing, etc., the ink that has accumulated in the cap is
sucked up and discharged.
Wiping Operation The carriage is moved from right to left along the rubber side of the
wiper (the right half of the wiper plate) incorporated in the pump unit so
that the head surface is rubbed with the rubber of the wiper.
Purpose:
• Before ink suction, removes the ink and other substances adhering to
the head surface.
• Ensures close contact of the cap.
Rubbing Operation The carriage is moved from left to right along the felt side of the wiper
(the left half of the wiper plate) incorporated in the pump unit so that
the head surface is rubbed with the felt of the wiper.
For easy removal of adhering substances, the nozzle surface is wetted
before rubbing operation by suction of a small amount of ink.
Purpose:
• Removes ink and other substances adhering strongly to the head
surface.
• Ensures close contact of the cap.
Capping In order to prevent the ink viscosity from increasing while it is being
kept, a rubber cap is placed over the print head nozzles when entering a
shutdown operation.
Table 2-7. Explanation of Operation (continued)
Operation Explanation
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Operating Principles Print Mechanism Components 117
2.2.4 Ink Supply Mechanism
Stylus Pro 7600/9600 is so constructed that the 7 cartridges for different colors are
installed in the respective ink holders (I/H) in the left area of the printer. A projection
and unique marking are placed on each color ink cartridge case to prevent wrong
insertion so that the correct cartridge is inserted in the right direction.
Explanation of valve mechanism mounted on the cartridge
The valve automatically opens and closes when the ink cartridge is mounted and
removed.
Figure 2-16. Valve Mechanism
The ink flow is as shown below.
Each color's ink cartridge → Each color's I/H (Ink Holder) → Each color's ink tube →
Each color's head dumper (carriage) → Print Heads
The information in EEPROM of each color ink cartridge is sent through the CSIC
Relay Board in each ink holder and stored in memory on the CSIC Board.
The CSIC Board stores various pieces of information, such as ink colors and remaining
amount of ink. (Refer to “Ink information menu (p.69)”)
Figure 2-17. Ink Supply Mechanism
Ink cartridge
To print head
Ink cartridge holder (Opening/closing)
Ink cartridge (x7)
Ink cartridge holder (I/H: x7)
Ink tube (x7)
To each color head damper
Pump motor (stepping
motor) (p.115)
Maintenance Tank
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Operating Principles Print Mechanism Components 118
2.2.5 Others
COVER SENSOR
In order to detect whether the front cover on the lower front of this printer is open or
closed, a cover sensor is mounted on the printer on the left side where the front cover
opens and closes.
This sensor carries out control of operating and stopping of the CR motor and PF motor
drive circuits via the MAIN board's logic circuit after detecting the cover's status. This
control is the same when the paper support level is in the release state.
CIRCUIT BOARD PLACEMENT
The panel unit is located i the right front of the printer and the AC inlet, power supply
circuit board and the MAIN circuit board are mounted in the compartment on the
printer's rear side.
Figure 2-18. Cover Sensor Panel Unit
Figure 2-19. Circuit Board Layout
Cover Sensor
Panel Unit
Front Cover
Front Cover Flag
Power Supply Circuit Board
MAIN Circuit Board
AC Inlet
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Operating Principles Outline of Control Circuit Board 119
2.3 Outline of Control Circuit Board
This section describes the operation of C472MAIN Board, which controls and drives
the printer mechanism of Stylus Pro 7600/9600.
NOTE: For details of each circuit, refer to Chapter 7 Appendix (p.281).
Explanation of major elements on C472MAIN Board
Note "*": Stylus Pro 7600: IC4/6 only (32MByte)
Stylus Pro 9600: IC4/6 and IC600/601 (64MByte)
Figure 2-20. C472MAIN Board-Circuit Block Diagram
Table 2-8. Major Elements
Name/Code Location Function
SH-3
HD6417709A IC10 32 bit RISC-CPU
• Drive clock frequency = 100 MHz
CY24242PVC IC602
System clock controller
•CPU clock
• SDRAM clock
• Clock for I/O control
E09A42AA IC607
Custom ASIC
1. Print data processing
• Rasterizer
• Head drive control
2. Mechanism control (motors and solenoids)
3. Sensor control
E05B80CD IC35
Custom ASIC
• External I/O control
IEEE1284 (bidirectional parallel) I/F
Type-B port
E09A41RA IC34 Custom ASIC
• Head drive voltage waveform generation control
E05C02BA IC603 Custom ASIC
• USB-I/F (2.0) control
Flash Memory IC9
Flash Memory (16Mbit)
• For storage of control program (firmware)
• Saving of various setting parameters and control
information
SD-RAM IC4/6
IC600/601
System memory *
128mbit x 16
L6203 IC31/32 PF/CR Motor Drivers IC
• PWM constant current drive control
LB11847 IC30 Pump Motor Driver IC
Block01.eps
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Operating Principles Outline of Power Supply Circuit Board 120
2.4 Outline of Power Supply Circuit Board
The 100 V AC power from the wall outlet is supplied via the power cable, an accessory
of Stylus Pro 7600/9600, into the Inlet of the printer and to the Power Supply Circuit
Board.
The power switch constitutes a secondary power switch system. The secondary power
switch system operates as follows: even with the power switch turned off, the Power
Supply Circuit Board is operating by a slight power as long as the power cable is
connected.
The Power Supply Circuit Board is equipped with a fuse for overcurrent protection.
Table 2-9 below indicates the rating of the fuse:
There are three control signals between the C472MAIN Board and the Power Supply
Circuit Board. Table below describes details of the control signals:
C A U T I O N Even after the power switch is turned off, the Power Supply Circuit
Board does not stop operating immediately, but power is kept on
until the ink system ending sequence is completed.
Do not disconnect the power cable or do not shut off power by
turning off any power switch other than that on the printer.
Table 2-9. Fuse Rating
Input Voltage Range [V AC] Fuse Rating
100 +/– 10% 125 V AC / 6.3A
Table 2-10. Control Signals between C472MAIN Board and Power Supply Board
Signal Name Function
REM_ON
(MAIN→
Power Supply)
Operating Turned ON/OFF by C472MAIN Board.
• When these terminals are shorted, the drive system
power supplies 28 VDC and 42 VDC are active.
Off • When these terminals are open (= L), the drive
system power supplies 28 VDC and 42 VDC are 0
VDC.
• The 5 VDC power is not controlled with these
terminals.
AC_OFF
(MAIN←
Power Supply)
Operating
(= H)
When each output from the Power Supply Circuit
Board has become inactive because of turning off of
the power switch or when the input voltage has
dropped below the rated voltage value, “H” signal is
sent to the C472MAIN Board.
Off
(= L)
The power switch is turned on and the Power Supply
Circuit Board Unit starts operating so that each output
becomes active.
“H” signal is sent to the C472MAIN Board.
POW_ON/OFF
(Panel /
MAIN→Power
Supply)
Operating Connected to the power switch on the Panel Unit.
• These terminals are shorted when the switch is ON.
The Power Supply Circuit Board becomes active.
Off • These terminals are open when the switch is
OFF.The Power Supply Unit keeps operating for
about ten and several seconds to a few minutes and
then turns off.
CHAPTER
3
TROUBLESHOOTING
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Troubleshooting Outline 122
3.1 Outline
This section explains procedures for rapid and efficient troubleshooting if trouble
occurs in the printer.
3.1.1 Introduction
First of all, when performing troubleshooting, the following basic parts should be
checked.
1. Look in the printer for any foreign matter and make sure there is nothing there
to hinder normal operation.
2. Carry out printing by setting the printer in the “Pause” state, then press the
[SelecType] button 2 times. Next using the [Paper Feed] switch in the “TEST
PRINT MENU,” select “STATUS CHECK”, then press the [Enter] switch
and print.
From the status sheet, you can Check to see if the cause of the trouble is that
the printer (either the printer unit itself or some major unit) is at the end of its
service life, and check the user inherent panel settings, etc.
3. There should be no market soiling of the outside or the inside of the printer. If
it is extremely soiled, carry out cleaning.
4. Each of the units and parts in the printer should not be missing or damaged,
and should have the normal shape and configuration.
5. Each of the harnesses should be undamaged, and should be correctly
connected to the relevant connector (perpendicularly and in the correct
direction).
6. Each cam and gear in the printer mechanism should have no uneven wear or
be overly worn, and the combinations should be correct.
7. Each type of rubber roller in the printer mechanism should be cleaned and it
should be ascertained whether the cause of the trouble is because of dirt or due
to some other cause.
8. Each type of rubber roller in the printer mechanism should not be unevenly
worn or excessively worn, and their combinations should be correct.
9. As necessary, initialize the NVRAM on the C472MAIN Board (return the
individual customer settings and panel settings to the factory settings).
Carry out initialization by executing “INIT. NVRAM” from the “CLEAR
COUNTERS MENU” in “Maintenance Mode 2."
10. Make certain that the DIP Switches and Jumpers have been set correctly.
(Refer to “DIP Switch and Jumper Setting at Factory before Shipment”
(p.209))
CHECK
P O I N T
When disassembling the printer, turn the printer's power switch
Off, then after making sure that the panel display is off, pull out the
power cable from the outlet and disconnect the interface cable.
C A U T I O N Only the specified printer tools should be used so as to maintain
the printer's quality.
Only the specified lubricants and adhesives should be used.
The specified adjustments should definitely be carried out.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Troubleshooting Error Display 123
3.2 Error Display
The printer displays the relevant error message on the LCD and the error status by
LEDs. At the same time, it stops not only printing operation but also receiving data
from the host PC. (Among the interface signals, the “-ERROR” signal is turned “low”
and the “BUSY” signal is turned “high” to inhibit data input.)
3.2.1 Errors
Errors, Warnings and service call errors (fatal errors) are described below.
3.2.1.1 Error Indications on LCD
Note : The status can't be replied during service call.
Table 3-1. Error Indications on LCD
LCD Panel Message Printer Status Refer to
SERVICE REQ. nnnnnnnn Fatal error*
COVER OPEN Cover open error p.127
LOAD PAPER Paper set lever is released during operation p.126
PAPER JAM Paper jam p.127
INK OUT Ink out error p.130
NO INK CARTRIDGE No ink cartridge p.130
INVALID CARTRIDGE Wrong ink cartridge p.130
SET INK CARTRIDGE Defective ink cartridge p.131
PAPER OUT Paper out error p.126
COMMAND ERROR
• Ink sequence currently executed
• Paper currently initialized
• Timer IC reset
/NVRAM clear
–
LOAD XXX PAPER
• Wrong setting with roll paper and sheet
(Roll paper)
• Wrong setting with roll paper and sheet
(Sheet)
p.126
RELOAD PAPER Problem with paper output (sheet) p.129
MAINTENANCE TANK FULL Maintenance tank full p.131
PAPER NOT CUT Paper cutting error p.128
LOWER PAPER SET LVR Paper set lever is released p.127
REMOVE PAPER Paper is too thick for cleaning
RELOAD PAPER Paper check error p.129
PAPER NOT STRAIGHT Paper not straight p.128
INVALID CARTRIDGE Non-genuine cartridge p.130
SET INK LEVER Ink lever released p.130
NO MAINTENANCE TANK No maintenance tank p.131
COMMAND ERROR Command error p.131
OPTION I/F ERROR Type-B I/F error p.128
Table 3-1. Error Indications on LCD (continued)
LCD Panel Message Printer Status Refer to
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Troubleshooting Error Display 124
3.2.1.2 Warning Indications on LCD
Warning warns the user of the occurrence of a corresponding event by replacing the
“READY” or “PRINTING” message on the LCD with the warning message. But it has
no effect on any other operations of the printer.
The warning message will not be cleared until the cause is resolved.
Table 3-2. Warning Indications on LCD
LCD Panel Message Printer Status Refer to
INK LOW
Photo Black Ink Low
p.132
Cyan Ink Low
Magenta Ink Low
Yellow Ink Low
Light Cyan Ink Low
Light Magenta Ink Low
Light Black Ink Low
Matte Black Ink Low (K1)
Matte Black Ink Low (K2)
MAINTENANCE TANK ALMOST
FULL Maintenance tank full warning p.132
MAINTENANCE REQ. nnnn
Maintenance request (CR motor life)
p.132
Maintenance request (Set RTC date)
Maintenance request (Head life)
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Troubleshooting Error Display 125
3.2.1.3 Service Call (Fatal) Errors
Table 3-3. Service Call (Fatal) Errors
Error Code Description Refer to
00000101 CR motor life p.134
00010000 PF motor encoder check error p.135
00010001 PF motor out of step p.135
00010002 PF motor overcurrent p.136
00010003 PF motor in-position time-out p.136
00010004 CR motor encoder check error p.137
00010005 CR motor out of step p.137
00010006 CR motor overcurrent p.138
00010007 CR motor in-position time-out p.138
00010008 Servo interrupt watchdog time-out p.139
00010009 System interrupt watchdog time-out p.139
0001000A CR home position sensor error p.139
0001000B PF home position sensor error p.139
0001000C Head slide (PG) home position sensor error p.140
0001000F CR motor PWM output faulty p.140
00010010 PF motor PWM output faulty p.141
0001001B Head driver (TG) temperature error p.141
0001001D CR servo parameter error p.142
0001001E PF servo parameter error p.142
00010020 CSIC reed/right error p.143
00010022 Ink type error (setting on printer body side) p.143
00010023 RTC analysis error p.143
00010025 CSIC ROM communication error p.144
00010026 RTC communication error p.144
00010028 Head error p.144
00010029 Unidentified NMI p.144
0001002A CR ASIC ECU error p.144
0001002B PF ASIC ECU error p.144
00020000 NVRAM error p.144
00020002 SDRAM error p.145
00020003 BOOT program SUM error p.145
00020009 Flash memory SUM error p.145
0002000A Program load error p.145
0002000B Internal memory shortage error p.145
0002000C Review error p.146
100000E0 CPU address error (load misalignment) p.146
10000100 CPU address error (storage misalignment) p.146
10000180 CPU reserve command code exception error p.146
100001A0 CPU slot illegal command exception error p.146
100005C0 CPU DMA address error p.146
10000xxx CPU error p.146
Table 3-3. Service Call (Fatal) Errors (continued)
Error Code Description Refer to
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Troubleshooting Error Display 126
3.2.2 Errors
3.2.2.1 Paper End/End of roll
3.2.2.2 Wrong paper source is selected on panel
3.2.2.3 Paper set lever is released during operation
Table 3-4.
Item Description
LCD PANEL
MESSAGE PAPER OUT
LED STATUS “PAPER OUT” LED lights up.
Explanation
The error occurs in following cases.
[A]: Paper is not set.
[B]: The printer detects end of the roll. In this time the paper
feed roller holds and keeps the end of the roll.
[C]: The printer completed a printing on a sheet or detects end
of the sheet. In this time the paper feed roller holds and keeps
the end of the sheet.
Recovery
Set paper.
In the case of [B] and [C] above, remove the paper and set new
paper.
After setting new paper, the error will be cleared. If the printing
data remains in the printer, the printing job will continue on the
newly set paper. When printing job continue, the printer ejects
buffer content, cuts or ejects the paper, and starts printing after
developing new data. Remained data is printed and ejected with
paper length designated with the command.
If the error is not cleared even after paper setting,
Possible causes are problems with the following sensors. Take
corrective action as instructed below.
• P_REAR sensor
• P_EDGE sensor
1. Check for paper dust or foreign matters on the sensor and clean
it.
2. Check the operation of each sensor and make AD adjustment in
the self-diagnostics menu.
(Rear AD Adjustment (p.231) / Edge AD Adjustment (p.232))
Note: Change the location of the printer if there may be an
effect of any strong external light, such as the sunlight.
Table 3-5.
Item Description
LCD PANEL
MESSAGE LOAD xxx PAPER
LED STATUS
“PAPER OUT” LED lights up.
The LED blinks corresponding to paper path set with PP
command of remote command. (See Table 3-6)
Explanation Different paper source is selected on panel from the paper source
that is selected by PP command.
Recovery
Replace the paper into one that is selected by command, or the
error will be also cleared by toggle the paper source setting on
panel, if only the panel setting is wrong. After it is cleared, it is
ready to print.
Table 3-6. LED Indications for Wrong Setting (Roll Paper/Sheet)
PP Command Roll paper auto cut
LED
Roll paper manual cut
LED Sheet LED
Roll Paper Blink Blink Off
Sheet Off Off Blink
Table 3-7.
Item Description
LCD PANEL
MESSAGE SET PAPER LEVER
LED STATUS “PAPER OUT” LED lights up.
Explanation Paper set lever is released during operation
Recovery It is cleared with pushing down the lever, and the printer continues
the operation.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Troubleshooting Error Display 127
3.2.2.4 Paper set lever is released
3.2.2.5 Paper Jam
Note : Errors in the drive system can occur in case of out-of-step, overcurrent or any other
significant deviation from command values to the servo motor.
3.2.2.6 Front Cover Open
Table 3-8.
Item Description
LCD PANEL
MESSAGE LOWER PAPER SET LVR
LED STATUS “PAPER OUT” LED lights up.
Explanation Paper set lever is released during paper set operation.
Recovery
The error display will be cleared after finishing paper set and
pushing down the lever, and message “PRESS PAUSE BUTTON”
will appear.
Refer to user's manuals for paper setting procedure.
Table 3-9.
Item Description
LCD PANEL
MESSAGE PAPER JAM
LED STATUS “PAPER OUT” LED is blinking.
Explanation
While printing, feeding or cutting, a jammed paper prevents the
CR motion. Paper jam is detected if one of rear and front paper
sensor detect paper existing and over drive current or mis-
synchronization of CR motor is detected.
Recovery
After removing the jammed paper, “TURN PWR OFF AND
ON” is displayed and then reboot by turning off and on
according to the message.
Check the paper path for foreign matters or any deformed parts
which can cause a paper jam.
Table 3-10.
Item Description
LCD PANEL
MESSAGE FRONT COVER OPEN
LED STATUS None
Explanation
Front cover is opened. Under this error, all of CR motion and ink
sequences are halted. Therefore it may give damages to printing
head if this situation continues very long time.
Recovery
Close the front cover. If it is happened with print ready status
during printing, it recovers to print ready status automatically. If
it is happened during pause, it recovers to pause status
automatically. If the cover is opened during printing, the
suspended printing pass is never resumed. Therefore there may
appear a stripe on the printout. It is better to make the printer
PAUSE by pressing the Pause button prior to open the cover
while printing, however there may appear a uneven-coloring on
some media because of the difference of printing time.
If the error is not cleared even after cover closing,
Execute Checking Cover Sensor Operation in the self-
diagnostics menu and if any problem is found, take corrective
action.
1. Check that the cover is closed properly.
2. Replace the sensor.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Troubleshooting Error Display 128
3.2.2.7 Type-B I/F error
3.2.2.8 Paper cutting error
3.2.2.9 Paper Not Straight
Table 3-11.
Item Description
LCD PANEL
MESSAGE OPTION I/F ERROR
LED STATUS None
Explanation
A non-supported option Type-B I/F card is installed into the
printer.
This error occurs when the printer is turned on.
Recovery
Turn off the printer, remove the option Type-B I/F card, and then
turn on again.
If the error recurs, repeat checking by installing another Type-B
interface.
Table 3-12.
Item Description
LCD PANEL
MESSAGE PAPER NOT CUT
LED STATUS “PAPER OUT” LED is blinking.
Explanation The paper cannot cut whole paper completely by the cutter, or cut
paper remains over the front paper sensor.
Recovery
Remove the cut paper, or cut manually the paper using scissors
or else. User should lift the paper set lever and reset the paper or
push the Pause button. Thereby the printer will execute paper
initialize operation and will be printable status. In this time, if
the paper is so disarranged that it may cause head friction or
paper jam, user should cut the disarranged part neatly and reset
the paper. User should replace the cutter blade if it becomes
dull.
Checking the operation of the Cutter Solenoid:
Execute “Actuator 2 (p.229)” in the self-diagnostics menu and if
any problem is found, replace the actuator.
Table 3-13.
Item Description
LCD PANEL
MESSAGE PAPER NOT STRAIGHT
LED STATUS “PAPER OUT” LED is blinking.
Explanation
When a skew exceed 3mm between top and end of the paper is
occur, user should confirm the previous printout because it may
not be printed completely. And also smudges on back of following
printouts may occur because of poured ink on the platen.
Recovery
This error is cleared by paper set operation.
• User should set the paper according the description of User's
guide exactly in order to prevent the occurrence of this error.
• The roll edge should be neatly arranged.
• This error can be prevented at following printing by paper set
operation.
This error may also cleared by turning OFF→ ON, but this error
may occur at following printing.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Troubleshooting Error Display 129
3.2.2.10 Paper check error/Paper eject error (sheet) 3.2.2.11 Paper is too thick for cleaning
3.2.2.12 Not enough ink for cleaning
Table 3-14.
Item Description
LCD PANEL
MESSAGE RELOAD PAPER
LED STATUS “PAPER OUT” LED is blinking.
Explanation
This error occur in following cases
1. The top length of ejected paper is too long to be back-fed
when paper is set.
2. Paper's horizontal position exceeds the normally printable area
when paper is set.
3. Paper's horizontal position exceeds the normal cutting
permission area just after printing.
4. Length of sheet exceeds the ejectable length and cannot be
ejected completely.
5. After recovery of cutter error.
See “3.2.2.8 Paper cutting error (p.128)”.
Recovery
In case of 1,2,3, user should set the paper again according the
User's guide exactly. If the top of the paper has indentation, it
should be trimmed. In case of 4,5, the ejected portion of paper top
should be removed and then user set paper again. User can cut the
portion using auto cutter after paper set lever is lifted up (in this
time, it shifts to “RELOAD PAPER”), horizontal position is reset
straight, paper set lever is pushed down, roll paper auto cut is
selected, and “Paper Cut/Eject” button is pushed if the paper
cutting is possible.
Table 3-15.
Item Description
LCD PANEL
MESSAGE REMOVE PAPER
LED STATUS PAPER OUT LED is blinking.
Explanation This error occurs when cleaning is executed although a paper
thickness of with1.2mm is set.
Recovery Cleaning is executed automatically when paper is removed and the
paper set lever is set.
Table 3-16.
Item Description
LCD PANEL
MESSAGE NOT ENOUGH INK
LED STATUS INK OUT LED goes on
Explanation
This error occurs when cleaning is executed although the amount
of ink necessary for cleaning is not left in each ink cartridge. The
amount of ink necessary differs with each cleaning. *Timer CL
and others are excluded.
Recovery
This error clears automatically after about 5 seconds. Error
message appears again during cleaning, unless all the installed
cartridges are replaced with ones with enough ink for cleaning.
The message “NOT ENOUGH INK” is displayed on the panel for
5 seconds. The corresponding “INK OUT” LED goes on for 5
seconds to alert the user to the error. The error is cleared by
pressing Pause button during the 5 second period.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Troubleshooting Error Display 130
3.2.2.13 Ink-related Errors
Ink End (error) : Ink end error occurs when the defined amount of ink
have been consumed after NearEnd is detected. It
occurs when NearEnd cartridge is inserted, whether the
defined amount of ink have been consumed or not.
No Ink Cartridge : There detected any ink cartridge slot without cartridge.
Wrong/Non-genuine Ink Cartridge (dye / pigment):
This error occurs when wrong ink type (dye / pigment)
is installed.
3.2.2.14 Defective ink cartridge
3.2.2.15 Ink lever released
Table 3-17.
Item Description
LCD PANEL
MESSAGE
“INK OUT”, “NO INK CARTRIDGE” or “INVALID
CARTRIDGE“
LED STATUS Corresponding color LED lights up
Recovery
Check the CSIC contact terminal on the I/C Holder and the CSIC
terminal on the ink cartridge. (damage or deformation)
If no problem with the CSIC terminals is found, install a new ink
cartridge.
Table 3-18.
Item Description
LCD PANEL
MESSAGE INK OUT
LED STATUS
This error occurs when the ink cartridge CSIC has some problems
with the contents and has loose connection. Corresponded “INK
OUT” LED goes on.
Explanation There detected some problems with the contents of the ink
cartridge CSIC. Reading/writing into ink cartridge was failed.
Recovery
In case of loose connection, release the ink lever (at this time the
massage “SET INK” is displayed and reload the ink cartridge.
When the error is not recovered, open the ink compartment, and
then replace cartridge with new full one.
Table 3-19.
Item Description
LCD PANEL
MESSAGE SET INK LEVER
LED STATUS None
Explanation It is happen when ink lever is released.
Recovery Set the ink lever.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Troubleshooting Error Display 131
3.2.2.16 Illegal ink cartridge
3.2.2.17 Maintenance tank full
3.2.2.18 No Maintenance tank
3.2.2.19 Wrong IK designation
3.2.2.20 Fatal Error
Table 3-20.
Item Description
LCD PANEL
MESSAGE INVALID CARTRIDGE
LED STATUS Corresponding color LED lights up
Explanation This error occurs when illegal ink cartridge is installed.
Recovery Push the Pause button.
Table 3-21.
Item Description
LCD PANEL
MESSAGE MAINTENANCE TANK FULL
LED STATUS Maintenance tank LED lights up
Explanation This error occurs when maintenance tank is full.
Recovery Replace a maintenance tank.
Table 3-22.
Item Description
LCD PANEL
MESSAGE NO MAINTENANCE TANK
LED STATUS Maintenance tank LED lights up
Explanation This error occurs when maintenance tank is not installed properly.
Recovery Replace a maintenance tank.
Table 3-23.
Item Description
LCD PANEL
MESSAGE COMMAND ERROR
LED STATUS All color LEDs blink
Explanation
This error occurs when ink type (dye / pigment / black ink type)
designated with IK command is different from ink cartridge
installed in the printer, or when non-supported ESC/P3 format
data is received.
Recovery Stop data transmitting from the host and reset the panel.
Table 3-24.
Item Description
LCD PANEL
MESSAGE
SERVICE REQ. nnnnnnnn
nnnnnnnn indicates type of error.
LED STATUS All color LEDs blink
Explanation
This error occurs in following cases
• A serious failure is detected which can not fixed by users.
• A life end of a unit is detected and the continuous operation
may cause a more fatal problems.
• Printer halted by an un-expected operation or command
receiving.
Recovery
Once turn off the printer and on if the error is cleared, then user
can use the printer.
If the fatal error of the same code occurs again and results in
impossible printer operation, find the cause of the trouble by
consulting “3.2.4 Troubleshooting for Service Call Errors
(p.134)” and replace the relevant defective parts.
Fatal error type Refer to “3.2.1.3 Service Call (Fatal) Errors (p.125)”.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Troubleshooting Error Display 132
3.2.3 Troubleshooting for Warning
Warnings warn users the occurrences of corresponding events by replacing “READY”
or “PRINTING” messages into each warning messages on LCD. But it gives no effect
to any other operations. The warning messages will never cleared until the cause is
resolved.
3.2.3.1 Ink Low
3.2.3.2 Maintenance tank full warning
3.2.3.3 Maintenance request
LCD PANEL MESSAGE
“MAINTENANCE REQ. nnnn”
NOTE: The code “nnnn” designates the unit to be maintained.
Maintenance request type
The acquired value with applying exclusive OR process to bits designated as the
following table is displayed on nnnn in hexadecimal form.
Note : In Stylus Pro 7600/9600, Bit0, Bit2, Bit4 are also treated as Reserve.
Table 3-25.
Item Description
LCD PANEL
MESSAGE INK LOW
LED STATUS Corresponding INK OUT LED blinks
Explanation The warring occurs if CSIC detects “Near End”.
Recovery Replace the ink cartridge with new one.
Table 3-26.
Item Description
LCD PANEL
MESSAGE MAINTENANCE TANK ALMOST FULL
LED STATUS Maintenance tank LED blinks
Explanation The warring occurs when the maintenance tank is almost full.
Recovery Replace the maintenance tank with new one.
Table 3-27.
Bit Request object Cause How to recover errors
0Life of discharged ink
tank *-
1CR life Reciprocating time of CR has
reached predetermined amount.
Execute CR motor
initialization in
Maintenance mode 2.
2Continue nozzle check
error *-
3Battery shutoff RTC backup battery shutoff Replace RTC backup
battery.
4White dot detector
AGC error *-
5Head unit Shot time has reached
predetermined amount.
Execute head unit life
initialization in
Maintenance mode 2.
6 Cleaning unit Pump counter has reached
predetermined amount.
Execute cleaning unit life
initialization in
Maintenance mode 2
7Date is not set Date is not set. Set with RTC initialization
in Maintenance mode 2.
8 Battery pressure RTC backup battery pressure is
low temporarily Wait for a while
9Reserved - -
:
31 Reserved - -
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Troubleshooting Error Display 133
LED STATUS
Paper Out LED goes on at intervals of 5 seconds
Explanation
The life of the unit that designated by the code “nnnn” is almost run out. It prompts
users to call the service person to maintain it.
Recovery
This message is cleared only when the printer is maintained by the service person.
*1 Not applicable to the Stylus Pro 7600/9600. *2 “If the same message appears again, replace the RTC backup battery and perform
Maintenance Mode 2 [CLEAR COUNTERS / RTC].”
CHECK
P O I N T
Maintenance requests for head unit occur at the time of 28
billion shots/nozzle.
A cap, pump, pump motor, wiper, flushing box are replaced
together when replacing the cleaning unit.
Table 3-28. “MAINTENANCE REQ nnnn” Message
Assigned bit nnnn Cause How to clear
0123456789-31
(NA) 1(NA)0(NA)0000(RSVD)0002 CR pass count reaches the limit Perform Maintenance Mode 2 [CLEAR COUNTERS / CR
MOTOR]
(NA) 0 (NA) 1(NA)0000(RSVD)0008 RTC backup battery is empty Install the battery and perform Maintenance Mode 2
[CLEAR COUNTERS / RTC]
(NA) 0 (NA) 0 (NA) 1000(RSVD)0020 The number of shots (per nozzle)
reaches the limit Perform Maintenance Mode 2 [CLEAR COUNTERS / HEAD]
(NA) 0 (NA) 0 (NA) 0 100(RSVD)0040 Pump motor operation count
reaches the limit Perform Maintenance Mode 2 [CLEAR COUNTERS / CLEANER]
(NA) 0 (NA) 0 (NA) 0 0 1 0 (RSVD) 0080 Date is not specified Perform Maintenance Mode 2 [CLEAR COUNTERS / RTC]
(NA) 0 (NA) 0 (NA) 0 0 0 1 (RSVD) 0100 RTC backup battery drops
instantaneously (Wait for a while) *2
ex. (NA) 0 (NA) 1 (NA) 0 0 1 0 (RSVD) 0088 RTC backup battery is not
installed
Install the battery and perform Maintenance Mode 2
[CLEAR COUNTERS / RTC]
Conditions
(Maintenance Tank life-end) *1
CR Motor - Life end
(Nozzle check error - Continue) *1
Battery empty
(Dot missing detector - AGC error) *1
Print head - Life end
Cleaning unit - Life end
Date not specified
Abnormal battery voltage
(Reserved: Not used)
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Troubleshooting Error Display 134
3.2.4 Troubleshooting for Service Call Errors
If any service call error has occurred, Stylus Pro 7600/9600 inhibits interruption,
restores the actuators to their respective initial positions, writes the NVRAM values as
a rule, and makes all the LEDs on the panel flash.
Description:
Occurrence of any error from which the user can not recover the printer.
Life expiration of a long-life part which can cause secondary problems if the
part is further used.
The printer has been brought into malfunction by unexpected operation or by
receiving an unexpected command.
Solution:
Turn the power off once and turn it on again. If the error display is cleared, try to
continue using the printer.
If the error of the same code has occurred again, the service technician must
replace the relevant part with a new one. Then the error display will be cleared.
NOTE: See “3.2.1.3 Service Call (Fatal) Errors (p.125)”.
3.2.4.1 CR motor life (00000101)
Problem:
The number of carriage round trips has reached the specified value.
Specified value:
Stylus Pro 9600: 2,500,000 passes (B0/Speed)
Stylus Pro 7600: 3,250,000 passes (A1/Speed)
NOTE: 1 Pass = 1 round trip
Remedy:
1. Replace the CR Motor and Driven Pulley.
2. Check the Head FFC for breakage, scratches on the surface or damage.
3. Check the ink supply tube for cracks, breakage or ink leakage.
4. Check the CR motor life by “SelecType” (p.35).
([SelecType] key → “PRINTER STATUS MENU”
→ “SERVICE LIFE”)
When the life of the CR motor has been almost expired:
•Replace the CR Motor ASSY (p.180).
When the CR motor has still an adequate life remaining.:
•Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).
CHECK
P O I N T
After replacing the CR Motor, execute “ Initialize CR motor
life” (p83) in “Maintenance Mode 2".
Do not initialize the CR Motor cumulative counter value (“CR
TOTAL”).
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Troubleshooting Error Display 135
3.2.4.2 PF motor encoder check error (00010000)
Explanation:
During initial operation at power on or during PF Motor operation, there may be a
case where the encoder pulse signal can not be recognized at specified intervals. In
such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops operating.
Cause of trouble:
Broken wire for the PF motor encoder, inverted wiring for A and B pulses,
disconnected connector for the encoder or motor, or inverted wiring for the motor.
Points to be checked:
1. The PF Encoder and the PF Loop Scale must be free from dust and dirt or any
other foreign matters.
2. The PF Timing Belt must be free from any defects and the belt must be in
proper tension.
3. The grid roller must rotate smoothly, free from undue load.
4. Measure the resistance value of the PF Motor (5.8 Ω).
If the PF Motor is found in short mode, replace the C472MAIN Board at the
same time.
5. Execute encoder checking by “5.2.2.4 Encoder ”(p225) in the self-
diagnostics menu.
6. All the harness must be connected properly and free from short circuit or
broken wire.
Remedy:
•Replace the PF Encoder Sensor ASSY (p.186).
(Refer to PF Encoder Sensor Installation Position Adjustment (p.272))
•Replace the PF Motor (p.185).
(Refer to PF Timing Belt Tension Adjustment (p.264))
•Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).
3.2.4.3 PF Motor out of step (00010001)
Explanation:
During PF Motor operation, there may be a case where the encoder pulse signal
within the specified range is not input within a specified period of time or the pulse
width is extremely long. In such a case, the PF Motor is judged to be out-of-step,
so that this message is displayed and the printer stops operating.
Cause of trouble:
•During paper feed operation, the error counter has reached the out-of-step
pulse count.
•Defective motor.
Points to be checked:
1. The PF Encoder and the PF Loop Scale must be free from dust and dirt or any
other foreign matters.
2. The PF Timing Belt must be free from any defects and the belt must be in
proper tension.
3. The grid roller must rotate smoothly, free from undue load.
4. Measure the resistance value of the PF Motor (5.8Ω)
If the PF Motor is found in short mode, replace the C472MAIN Board at the
same time.
5. Execute encoder checking by “5.2.2.4 Encoder ”(p225) in the self-
diagnostics menu.
6. All the harness must be connected properly and free from short circuit or
broken wire.
Remedy:
•PF Timing Belt Tension Adjustment (p.264)
•Replace the PF Motor (p.185).
•Replace the PF motor extension cable
•Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Troubleshooting Error Display 136
3.2.4.4 PF motor overcurrent (00010002)
Explanation:
During PF Motor operation, there may be a case where an abnormal current out of
the specified limits is detected in the PF Motor drive circuit on the C472MAIN
Board or a current exceeding the specified value is required. In such a case, this
message is displayed and the printer stops operating.
Cause of trouble:
Hardware has detected overcurrent in the PF motor circuit.
Points to be checked:
1. Measure the resistance value of the PF Motor (5.8Ω)
If the PF Motor is found in short mode, replace the C472MAIN Board at the
same time.
2. By visual inspection, check the PF Loop Scale for any defect, such as damage
or soiling, which can cause faulty reading by the sensor.
3. By visual inspection, check the harness of the PF Motor for any problem
causing a short circuit to the frame.
Remedy:
•Replace the PF Motor (p.185).
•Replace the PF motor extension cable
•Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).
3.2.4.5 PF motor in-position time out (00010003)
Explanation:
At PF stop processing in PF Motor control, there may be a case where the paper
can not move to the final target position within a specified period of time. In such
a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops operating.
Cause of trouble:
There are pulses smaller than out-of-step pulse remaining without completing
paper feed.
Points to be checked:
1. The PF Encoder and the PF Loop Scale must be free from dust and dirt or any
other foreign matters.
2. The PF Timing Belt must be free from any defects and the belt must be in
proper tension.
3. The grid roller must rotate smoothly, free from undue load.
4. Measure the resistance value of the PF Motor (5.8Ω)
If the PF Motor is found in short mode, replace the C472MAIN Board at the
same time.
5. Execute encoder checking by “5.2.2.4 Encoder ”(p225) in the self-
diagnostics menu.
6. All the harness must be connected properly and free from short circuit or
broken wire.
Remedy:
•Replace the PF Encoder Sensor ASSY (p.186).
(Refer to PF Encoder Sensor Installation Position Adjustment (p.272))
•Replace the PF Motor (p.185).
(Refer to PF Timing Belt Tension Adjustment (p.264))
•Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).
•Replace the PF motor extension cable
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Troubleshooting Error Display 137
3.2.4.6 CR motor encoder check error (00010004)
Explanation:
During initial operation at power on or during CR Motor operation, there may be a
case where the encoder pulse signal is not input at specified intervals. In such a
case, this message is displayed and the printer stops operating.
Cause of trouble:
Broken wire for the CR motor encoder, inverted wiring for A and B pulses,
disconnected connector for the encoder or motor, or inverted wiring for the motor.
Points to be checked:
1. The CR Encoder and the T Fence must be free from dust and dirt or any other
foreign matters.
2. The CR Timing Belt must be free from any defects and the belt must be in
proper tension.
3. The carriage must slide smoothly, free from undue load.
4. Measure the resistance value of the CR Motor. (5.8Ω)
5. Execute encoder checking by “5.2.2.4 Encoder ”(p225) in the self-
diagnostics menu.
6. All the harness must be connected properly and free from short circuit or
broken wire.
Remedy:
•Replace the CR Encoder Sensor ASSY (p.178).
(Refer to “CR Encoder Sensor Mounting Position Adjustment” (p.268))
•Replace the CR Motor ASSY (p.180).
(Refer to “CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment” (p.263))
•Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).
•Check to see if the timing fence for detection of the encoder pulse is removed
•Check for dirt, paper dust or damage to the timing fence
3.2.4.7 CR motor out of step (00010005)
Explanation:
During CR Motor operation, there may be a case where the encoder pulse signal
within the specified range is not input within a specified period of time or the pulse
width is extremely long. In such a case, the CR Motor is judged to be out-of-step,
so that this message is displayed and the printer stops operating.
Cause of trouble:
•The error counter has reached the out-of-step pulse count because of
impossible movement of the carriage, bumping of the carriage or dirty timing
fence.
•Defective motor.
Points to be checked:
1. The CR Encoder and the T Fence must be free from dust and dirt or any other
foreign matters.
2. The CR Timing Belt must be free from any defects and the belt must be in
proper tension.
3. The carriage must slide smoothly, free from undue load.
4. Measure the resistance value of the CR Motor. (5.8Ω)
5. Execute encoder checking by “5.2.2.4 Encoder ”(p225) in the self-
diagnostics menu.
6. All the harness must be connected properly and free from short circuit or
broken wire.
7. Check the carriage home position sensor.
Remedy:
•Replace the CR Motor ASSY (p.180).
(Refer to “CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment” (p.263))
•Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).
•Replace the CR_HP Sensor ASSY (p.183).
•Replace the CR Encoder Sensor ASSY (p.178).
(Refer to “CR Encoder Sensor Mounting Position Adjustment” (p.268))
•Replace the CR Encoder Scale (Timing Fence) (p.184).
•Check to see if the timing fence for detection of the encoder pulse is not
installed correctly.
•Check for dirt, paper dust or damage to the timing fence
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Troubleshooting Error Display 138
3.2.4.8 CR motor overcurrent (00010006)
Explanation:
During CR Motor operation, there may be a case where an abnormal current out of
the specified limits is detected in the CR Motor drive circuit on the C472MAIN
Board or a current exceeding the specified value is required. In such a case, this
message is displayed and the printer stops operating.
Cause of trouble:
Hardware has detected overcurrent in the CR motor circuit.
Points to be checked:
1. Measure the resistance value of the CR Motor. (5.8Ω)
If the CR Motor is found in short mode, replace the C472MAIN Board at the
same time.
2. By visual inspection, check the T Fence for any defect, such as damage or
soiling, which can cause faulty reading by the sensor.
3. By visual inspection, check the harness of the CR Motor for any problem
causing a short circuit to the frame.
Remedy:
•Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).
•Replace the CR Motor ASSY (p.180).
(Refer to “CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment” (p.263))
•Correct the carriage home position.
•Remove the foreign matters. Clean the timing fence.
3.2.4.9 CR motor in-position time-out (00010007)
Explanation:
At carriage stop processing in CR Motor control, there may be a case where the
carriage can not move to the final target position within a specified period of time
(as per pulse detection). In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer
stops operating.
Cause of trouble:
There are pulses smaller than out-of-step pulse remaining without completing
paper feed.
Points to be checked:
1. The CR Encoder and the T Fence must be free from dust and dirt or any other
foreign matters.
2. The CR Timing Belt must be free from any defects and the belt must be in
proper tension.
3. The carriage must slide smoothly, free from undue load.
4. Measure the resistance value of the CR Motor. (5.8Ω)
5. Execute encoder checking by “5.2.2.4 Encoder ”(p225) in the self-
diagnostics menu.
6. All the harness must be connected properly and free from short circuit or
broken wire.
Remedy:
•Replace the CR Encoder Sensor ASSY (p.178).
(Refer to “CR Encoder Sensor Mounting Position Adjustment” (p.268))
•Replace the CR Motor ASSY (p.180).
(Refer to “CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment” (p.263))
•Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).
•Replace the CR_HP Sensor ASSY (p.183).
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Troubleshooting Error Display 139
3.2.4.10 Servo interrupt watchdog time-out (00010008)
Explanation:
During the CR Motor or PF Motor operation, there may be a case where watch dog
time-out is detected in the DC motor control circuit or on the ASIC. In such a case,
this message is displayed and the printer stops operating.
Cause of trouble:
System trouble.
Remedy:
Since the cause is deemed to be a defective CPU or ASIC, replace the MAIN
Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).
3.2.4.11 System interrupt watchdog time-out (00010009)
Explanation:
In the data processing stage on the C472MAIN Board, there may be a case where
runaway or defective cash occurs on CPU or ASIC. In such a case, this message is
displayed and the printer stops operating.
Cause of trouble:
System trouble.
Remedy:
Since the CPU or ASIC is deemed defective, take the following action:
If this error is not cleared even when the power is turned off once and on again, replace
the
MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207)
.
3.2.4.12 CR home position sensor error (0001000A)
Explanation:
During initial operation at power on or during printing operation, there may be a
case where the home position can not be detected at the home position detection
timing or within a specified period of time. In such a case, this message is
displayed and the printer stops operating.
Cause of trouble:
Shield plate detection error due to no change in the signal from the CR home
position sensor.
Points to be checked:
1. Check that the sensor functions properly.
(Refer to “5.2.2.3 Sensors ”(p224) in the self-diagnostics menu.)
2. Check that the sensor is free from adhesion of any foreign matters.
Remedy:
•Replace the CR_HP Sensor ASSY (p.183).
•Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).
3.2.4.13 PF home position sensor error (0001000B)
Does not occur (there is no function to detect PF home position).
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Troubleshooting Error Display 140
3.2.4.14 Head slide (PG) home position sensor error (0001000C)
Explanation:
During initial operation at power on or during head platen gap fluctuation (change)
operation after paper setting, there may be a case where the head slide home
position can not be detected. In such a case, this message is displayed and the
printer stops operating.
Cause of trouble:
•Home position detection error due to head slide out-of-step
•Defective head slide home position sensor
•Defective head slide motor, disconnected connector or broken cable
•Gears not engaged properly
Points to be checked:
Head Slide Detection Sensor
•Check that the sensor functions properly.
•Check that the sensor and the head platen gap drive gear are free from
obstruction by adhesion of foreign matters or soiling.
Head Slide Motor (Pump Motor)
•Measure the resistance value. (9.2Ω)
If the motor is found in short mode, replace the C472MAIN Board at the same
time.
•Check that the motor operates properly.
(Refer to “5.2.2.4 Encoder ”(p225) in the self-diagnostics menu.)
•Check that the gear train including the head platen gap drive gear is free from
any obstruction.
Remedy:
•Replace the HEAD_SLIDE Sensor ASSY (p.182).
•Replace the Pump Motor ASSY (p.200).
NOTE:
Refer to
“Head Slide (PG Change) Initialization Sequence” (p.107)
.
3.2.4.15 CR motor PWM output faulty (0001000F)
Explanation:
There may be a case where a current exceeding the specified value flows during
CR Motor operation. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops
operating.
This error can be displayed in the following case: an abnormal load which does not
reach the level causing an out-of-step phenomenon 00010005 in the carriage drive
system has occurred and the running speed of the motor has been detected to be
too low, so that the current is increased to raise the running speed of the motor.
Thus, this message appears to prevent the CR Motor from being overheated.
Cause of trouble:
•A small PWM output is kept on for a certain period of time (load is kept
applied).
•Carriage related mechanism out of step or carriage bumped.
Remedy/Points to be checked:
1. Check the load on the CR Motor.
•Running load of CR Motor (check by manual operation)
•Measure the resistance value of the CR Motor.(5.8Ω)
•Damage to or wear in the CR Driven Pulley
•Damaged or worn bearing of the CR Unit
•Flaws in the CR Rail caused by roller running
•Tension of the steel belt
2. Replace the CR Motor ASSY (p.180).
If the CR Motor is found in short mode, replace the C472MAIN Board at the
same time.
3. Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Troubleshooting Error Display 141
3.2.4.16 PF motor PWM output faulty (00010010)
Explanation:
There may be a case where a current exceeding the specified value flows during
PF Motor operation. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops
operating.
This error can be displayed in the following case: an abnormal load which does not
reach the level causing an out-of-step phenomenon 00010001 in the paper feed
drive system has occurred and the running speed of the motor has been detected to
be too low, so that the current is increased to raise the running speed of the motor.
Thus, this message appears to prevent the PF Motor from being overheated.
Cause of trouble:
•A small PWM output is kept on for a certain period of time (load is kept
applied).
•Paper feed related mechanism out of step.
Remedy/Points to be checked:
1. Check the load on the PF Motor.
•Measure the resistance value of the PF Motor (5.8Ω)
If the PF Motor is found in short mode, replace the C472MAIN Board at the
same time.
•Running load of PF Motor (check by manual operation)
•Rotation load of PF Roller
2. Replace the PF Motor (p.185).
3. Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).
3.2.4.17 Head driver (TG) temperature error (0001001B)
Explanation:
During printing operation, there may be a case where the temperature inside the
print head has risen above the specified value and the thermistor in the print head
detects it as abnormal temperature. In such a case, this message is displayed and
the printer stops operating.
Cause of trouble:
•Head broken down.
•Faulty contact of tape electric wire, broken wire or wire out of position.
Remedy:
1. Turn off the power to the printer once and turn it on again and check for
recovery.
2. If the same error occurs immediately or in a short time, replace the print head
with a new one.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Troubleshooting Error Display 142
3.2.4.18 CR servo parameter error (0001001D)
Explanation:
There may be a case where a voltage exceeding the specified value is about to be
applied to the CR Motor. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer
stops operating.
Cause of trouble:
•A small PWM output is kept on for a certain period of time (load is kept
applied).
•Carriage related mechanism out of step or carriage bumped.
Points to be checked:
1. The CR Encoder and the T Fence must be free from dust and dirt or any other
foreign matters.
2. The CR Timing Belt must be free from any defects and the belt must be in
proper tension.
3. The carriage must slide smoothly, free from undue load.
4. Measure the resistance value of the CR Motor.(5.8Ω)
If the CR Motor is found in short mode, replace the C472MAIN Board at the
same time.
5. Execute encoder checking by “5.2.2.4 Encoder ”(p225) in the self-
diagnostics menu.
6. All the harness must be connected properly and free from short circuit or
broken wire.
Remedy:
•Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).
•Replace the CR Encoder Sensor ASSY (p.178).
(Refer to “CR Encoder Sensor Mounting Position Adjustment” (p.268))
•Replace the CR Motor ASSY (p.180).
(Refer to “CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment” (p.263))
•Make the mechanism adjustment for the carriage-related mechanism.
•Remove the foreign matters.
3.2.4.19 PF servo parameter error (0001001E)
Explanation:
There may be a case where a voltage exceeding the specified value is about to be
applied to the PF Motor. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer
stops operating.
Cause of trouble:
•A small PWM output is kept on for a certain period of time (load is kept
applied).
•Paper feed related mechanism out of step.
Points to be checked:
1. The PF Encoder and the PF Loop Scale must be free from dust and dirt or any
other foreign matters.
2. The PF Timing Belt must be free from any defects and the belt must be in
proper tension.
3. The grid roller must rotate smoothly, free from undue load.
4. Measure the resistance value of the CR Motor.(5.8Ω)
If the CR Motor is found in short mode, replace the C472MAIN Board at the
same time.
5. Execute encoder checking by “5.2.2.4 Encoder ”(p225) in the self-
diagnostics menu.
6. All the harness must be connected properly and free from short circuit or
broken wire.
Remedy:
•Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).
•Replace the PF Encoder Sensor ASSY (p.186).
(Refer to PF Encoder Sensor Installation Position Adjustment (p.272))
•Replace the PF Motor (p.185).
(Refer to PF Timing Belt Tension Adjustment (p.264))
•Clear the cause of paper feed related mechanism out-of-step.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Troubleshooting Error Display 143
3.2.4.20 CSIC reed/right error (00010020)
Explanation:
At turning on or off the power, at opening or closing the I/C Cover or at
completion of one-page printing, there may be a case where it is impossible to read
the data from the CSIC of the ink cartridge or write the latest ink information in
the CSIC. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops operating.
Cause of trouble:
Read/write for CSIC (ink cartridge) is impossible.
Remedy:
•Faulty contact with the CSIC
(Deformation of the CSIC contact connector / Replace the Holder Assembly
IC.)
•Defective CSIC Board (Replace the ink cartridge.)
•Replace the CSIC Board (ink cartridge).
•Tape electric wire out of position
•Replace the supply valve unit. (Faulty contact with the CSIC)
•Replace the C472_SUB-B Board (p.192).
•Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).
3.2.4.21 Ink type error (setting on printer body side) (00010022)
Cause of trouble:
•An ink type other than dye/pigment has been set.
•“Ink type: neutral” setting with “CSIC detection: OFF” setting.
Remedy:
•Install the correct cartridge.
•With the ink lever released, set “ink type” in “Maintenance Mode 2” (p.70).
NOTE: If setting is performed with the ink lever in the set position,
initialization will start again and the service call error will
occur again.
3.2.4.22 RTC analysis error (00010023)
Explanation:
There may be a case where the absolute time data stored on NVRAM indicates an
impossible date or hour. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer
stops operating.
Cause of trouble:
Various values of the absolute time data stored in NVRAM are abnormal.
Remedy:
Initialize RTC (p.83)
1. With the paper set lever in the up position, start “Maintenance Mode 2”
(p.70).
(Power OFF→ [Paper Source] + [Cut/Eject] + [Paper Feed ∇] → Power ON)
2. Input a date and hour in “Initialize RTC” in the counter initialize menu and
turn off the power.
(“CLEAR COUNTERS”→ “RTC”)
Remove the lithium battery once and install it again.
Replace the lithium battery with a new one.
Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Troubleshooting Error Display 144
3.2.4.23 CSIC ROM communication error (00010025)
Explanation:
Only when the starter cartridge is used, there may be a case where an error occurs
in communication with the CSIC and Main Board. In such a case, this message is
displayed and the printer stops operating.
Cause of trouble:
Faulty contact of ink cartridge
(Only with the starter cartridge or with individual cartridges for which writing has
been performed by the factory setting command.)
Remedy:
Make sure that the ink cartridge is connected properly.
3.2.4.24 RTC communication error (00010026)
Explanation:
There may be a case where the RTC circuit on the Main Board operates
incorrectly. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops
operating.
Cause of trouble:
The RTC on the circuit board is operating abnormally (operating in test mode).
Remedy:
1. Remove the battery once with the power turned off and after waiting for a
while, install the battery again and turn the power on.
2. Repeat step 1 above until this error does not occur at power-on.
3. After making certain that the error does not occur, set the date and hour for the
RTC by Initialize RTC (p.83) in “Maintenance Mode 2” (p.70) or by booting
the printer in the normal mode and sending the timer IC value change
command of the factory setting commands.
3.2.4.25 Head error (00010028)
Cause of trouble:
The head is damaged.
Remedy:
•Replace the Print Head (p.171).
3.2.4.26 Unidentified NMI (00010029)
Cause of trouble:
CPU has detected undefined NMI.
Remedy:
If this error is not cleared even when the power is turned off once and on again,
replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).
3.2.4.27 CR ASIC ECU error (0001002A)
Cause of trouble:
Faulty firmware or damaged drive circuit board
Remedy:
•Firmware Reinstallation (p.219)
•Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).
3.2.4.28 PF ASIC ECU error (0001002B)
Cause of trouble:
Faulty firmware or damaged drive circuit board
Remedy:
•Firmware Reinstallation (p.219)
•Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).
3.2.4.29 NVRAM error (00020000)
Explanation:
There may be a case where the parameter data in NVRAM is broken. In such a
case, this message is displayed and the printer stops operating.
Cause of trouble:
NVRAM erase error or write error (Check in 2 bytes)
Remedy:
•Download the parameter data from another model.
(However, make the necessary adjustments.)
•Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Troubleshooting Error Display 145
3.2.4.30 SDRAM error (00020002)
Explanation:
In memory check of SDRAM executed at power on, there may be a case where a
bit error is detected. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops
operating.
Cause of trouble:
SDRAM check error at power-on.
Remedy:
•Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).
3.2.4.31 BOOT program SUM error (00020003)
Explanation:
There may be a case where the boot program of firmware is broken. In such a case,
this message is displayed and the printer stops operating. (Only at power on)
Cause of trouble:
SUM check error for BOOT program area.
Remedy:
•Firmware Reinstallation (p.219)
•Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).
3.2.4.32 Flash memory SUM error (00020009)
Explanation:
This error is displayed when the firmware has not been installed in flash memory
or when the firmware has not been installed successfully.
Cause of trouble:
SUM check error for program area.
Remedy:
•Firmware Reinstallation (p.219)
•Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).
3.2.4.33 Program load error (0002000A)
Cause of trouble:
SUM check error for program area on RAM.
Remedy:
•Firmware Reinstallation (p.219)
•Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).
3.2.4.34 Internal memory shortage error (0002000B)
Explanation:
This error appears when the cash area is insufficient. There may be a case where
the assigned work area varies with the I/F mode and I/F mode setting does not
agree or decoding of a command is impossible. Then the work area is consumed
up, thus memory runs short. In such a case, this message is displayed and the
printer stops operating.
Cause of trouble:
Faulty program.
Remedy:
•Firmware Reinstallation (p.219)
•Check I/F mode.
•Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Troubleshooting Error Display 146
3.2.4.35 Review error (0002000C)
Explanation:
There may be a case where the combination of the DIP Switch setting positions on
the Main Board is not supported by the firmware. In such a case, this message is
displayed and the printer stops operating.
Cause of trouble:
Driver circuit board review and the state of the DIP switch are not consistent with
the program version.
Remedy:
Check driver circuit board review and state of DIP switch.
Check the DIP Switch setting. (See p.209)
3.2.4.36 CPU address error (load misalignment) (100000E0)
Cause of trouble:
Defective circuit board or faulty CPU soldering. Program trouble or generation
error.
Remedy:
•Firmware Reinstallation (p.219)
•Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).
3.2.4.37 CPU address error (storage misalignment) (10000100)
Cause of trouble:
Defective circuit board or faulty CPU soldering. Program trouble or generation
error.
Remedy:
•Firmware Reinstallation (p.219)
•Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).
3.2.4.38 CPU reserve command code exception error (10000180)
Cause of trouble:
Defective circuit board or faulty CPU soldering. Program trouble or generation
error.
Remedy:
•Firmware Reinstallation (p.219)
•Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).
3.2.4.39 CPU slot illegal command exception error (100001A0)
Cause of trouble:
Faulty CPU soldering. Program trouble or generation error.
Remedy:
•Firmware Reinstallation (p.219)
•Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).
3.2.4.40 CPU DMA address error (100005C0)
Cause of trouble:
Defective circuit board or faulty CPU soldering. Program trouble or generation
error.
Remedy:
•Firmware Reinstallation (p.219)
•Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).
3.2.4.41 CPU error (10000xxx)
Cause of trouble:
Defective circuit board or faulty CPU soldering. Program trouble or generation
error.
Remedy:
•Firmware Reinstallation (p.219)
•Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207).
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Your Printout 147
3.3 Troubleshooting Based on Your Printout
This section describes conceivable print quality problems that may occur with this
printer and the troubleshooting points for those errors.
3.3.1 Dot Missing
If the printer is kept for a long time without being used, the viscosity of the ink on the
nozzle surfaces of the print heads, and in the nozzles themselves, increases, and may
cause skipping of dots during printing. In such cases, execute Power cleaning (p.60) in
SelecType mode first (execute several times). If normal printing is not recovered even
after this power cleaning, check the following particulars.
Execute powerful cleaning of the ink head.
1. Execute Initial filling (p.259) or [KK2] cleaning.
Execute “Initial charge or [KK2]” in the Cleaning (p.259) menu of Self-
diagnostic Function (p.220).
(Power OFF→[Paper Feed
∆
]+[Paper Feed
∇
]+[Cut/Eject]
→Power ON) → “Cleaning” → “Init.Fill”
2. Nozzle Check Pattern Printing (p.45)
Execute “Nozzle Check Pattern Printing” in the SelecType menu.
([SelecType] → “TEST PRINT MENU” → “NOZZLE CHECK”)
The actions above do not work to recover the printer, check the following points:
If trouble occurs in all the ink colors:
•Are the print heads and cap assemblies sealed during ink filling?
•If the cap assembly / pump tubes have come off.
•If the life of the cleaning unit has expired.
•If the gear train between the pump motor and pump unit has been assembled
improperly.
•If the cap assembly has failed.
(The tension spring has come off, the cap rubber is damaged, etc.)
•If the pump unit has failed.
(The tubes are crushed, etc.)
If the trouble occurs with a specific ink color:
•Abnormal connections between the ink cartridge, ink holder, tube, damper,
print head.
(Fastening nuts loose, or the O-ring deformed or damaged, causing ink to
leak, etc. could occur.)
•Print head failure
If the trouble still has not been recovered from with the items up to this point,
replace the following electric system related parts and check again.
•Check the connections to the CR cable (FFC long) and if there is any damage
to it or not.
•Check the connections to the head cables (FFC short; x 2), and if there is any
damage to them or not.
•MAIN Board
Table 3-29. Diagnosing trouble based on printout
Item Description Refer to
1 Dot missing p.147
2Uneven printing/poor resolution p.148
3 Smudged or marred printout on front side p.148
4Smudged or marred printout on reverse side p.149
5 White/black banding p.149
CHECK
P O I N T
In initial filling, a large amount of ink will be discharged into the
Maintenance Tank. Therefore, check the counter indication
(remaining value) beforehand. (If deemed necessary, prepare
another Maintenance Tank as a spare.)
C A U T I O N If you replace the MAIN board or the print heads, the
connection state of the connection cables (FFC) should be
checked. Particularly in cases where the connector is inserted
at a slant, etc., when the power is turned on, it could cause
destruction of the circuit and the insides of the heads, so
sufficient caution should be exercised.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Your Printout 148
3.3.2 Uneven Printing/Poor Resolution
If the print quality is abnormal (uneven printing, diffused image, etc.), the following
items should be checked.
1. Adjust the gap
In the SelecType (p.35) or the Self-diagnostic Function (p.220) menu, carry out
gap adjustment (“Gap Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment, Uni-D Adjustment) (p.60)”
and “Round Trip Print Position Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment) (p.248)”).
2. If the trouble occurs only when the user is using a specific type of paper (thick
paper), carry out “User Paper Setting” using the panel setting procedure.
(By setting the information concerning the thickness of the paper the user is using
and correcting the print position (correction of changes in the position where ink
hits the paper surface due to differences in paper thickness), avoid influencing the
print position.)
3. If the this problem occurs after replacing the Main Board with a new one:
•Transfer the backup parameters on the old Main Board to the new board.
(p.219)
•Execute “Write D/A Correction Values” in the diagnostic mode.(p.236)
4. If the printer's condition is not improved by the above items (adjustments), check
the following items using the self-diagnostic function.
Head Slant Checking (p.246)
3.3.3 Smudged or Marred Printout (Front)
If smudging or marring occurs due to rubbing by the head, etc. on the paper's printed
surface, check the following items.
1. If smudging is occurring at the front end of the roll paper or at the rear end, widen
the margins at the front end and rear end. (Set the “Roll Paper Margin” front end
and rear end on “15 mm”.)
(If high duty printing was done close to the front end and rear end (margin = 3
mm), the paper will contain a large amount of ink and deformation of the paper
will be accelerated, and depending on the case, the paper will touch the heads.)
2. If paper with weak edges which cannot move smoothly along the paper path is
being used, Select “NORM” for “SUCTION” in the “PAPER CONFIG. MENU”,
which is in the “Panel Settings”.
3. If there is rubbing and smudging due to slow drying in printing of user paper.
Set the stand basket paper Eject direction on Front.
In the item “DRYING TIME” in the User Paper Setting Menu”, in “Panel
Settings,” set the drying time (the time until auto paper cutting is carried out
after printing is finished. (Default: 0 second; Maximum: 10 seconds)
4. If the trouble cannot be resolved by the above methods, check the following.
The cap assembly / tension spring is off.
(If this spring comes off, cap will collect inside the cap and ink that adheres
around the head nozzle surface ends up adhering to the paper.
Check to see if dust containing ink, foreign matters or paper is adhering to the
side surface of the head.
CHECK
P O I N T
Once you have made the “Head Slant Adjustment”, be sure to make
the “Round Trip Print Position Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment)
(p.248)” and “Gap Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment, Uni-D
Adjustment)” (p.60).
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Your Printout 149
3.3.4 Smudged or Marred Printout (Reverse side)
If smudging or marring of the paper back surface with ink occurs, the following items
should be checked.
1. Check to see if there isn't ink adhering to the paper feed path. If there is ink
adhering, it should be wiped off.
Sub-platen A/B Surface
Grid roller surface
Paper guide L surface
Paper guide L2 surface
2. One likely cause of ink adhering to the above parts is the following cause.
Paper feeding at a slant during printing (at the point when 1 page is finished)
The ink absorbing sponge for “borderless printing” is deformed or swelling.
3.3.5 White or Black Banding in the carriage running
direction
If white or black banding (uneven density) in parallel with the carriage running
direction appears on your printout, check the following points:
1. Nozzle Check Pattern Printing (p.45)
Select “Adj: Check Nozzle” in the Adjustment (p.230) menu by the self-diagnostic
function.
Check the following points:
Dot missing
Head ID setting value
If dot missing is found, execute head cleaning. (If deemed necessary, select and
execute
“Power cleaning (p.60)”
in the SelecType mode or
“Cleaning (p.259)”
by
self-diagnostic function.)If the Head ID value is wrong, set the correct value.
2. Adjustment
If dot missing is not found, perform the following adjustments and check for
improvement:
Paper feed correction (driver)
Head Slant Adjustment (Mechanical Adjustment) (p.247)
If each line of nozzles in the head is perpendicular to the carriage running
direction correctly, the raster lines printed with nozzles can overlap or be
dislocated, so that black banding (uneven density) or white banding (blank
spaces between raster lines) may occur.
If the adjustments above do not work enough to improve the quality, try to improve by
executing
Feed Correction + T&B Adjustment (p.239)
by the self-diagnostic
function.
C A U T I O N If the Paper Skew Detection setting is off in “Printer Settings” →
“Panel Setting Menu” → “Paper Width Detection,” if the user's
paper size setting is not correct, the surface of the platen will be
printed.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Your Printout 150
3.3.6 Banding in the paper feed direction
If banding (uneven density, rough image) in parallel with the paper feed direction is
found on the print, perform the following adjustment:
Bi-D adjustment:
The Bi-D adjustment can be executed by any of the following methods.
“Gap Adjustment” in the panel setting menu
Adjustment by printer driver
If the adjustment above does not work to improve the print quality, you may improve it
by adjusting the “Paper thickness” setting value (± 0.1 ~ 0.2 mm) in “User Paper
Setting Menu” of the panel setting menu.
CHAPTER
4
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Summary 152
4.1 Summary
This Chapter describes the disassembly and reassembly procedure chiefly for Stylus
Pro 7600, with descriptions added to particulars specific to Stylus Pro 9600.
Unless otherwise specified, disassembled units or components can be reassembled by
reversing the disassembly procedure.
Things, if not strictly observed, that could result in injury or loss of life are described
under the heading “Warning”.
Precautions for any disassembly or assembly procedures are described under the
heading “CAUTION”.
Chips for disassembling procedures are described under the heading “CHECK
POINT”.
If the assembling procedure is different from the reversed procedure of the
disassembling, the procedure is described under the heading “REASSEMBLY”.
Any adjustments required after disassembling the units are described under the heading
“ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED”. Be sure to make the specified adjustments by
referring to Chapter 5 “ADJUSTMENT”.
When you have to remove any units or parts that are not described in this chapter, refer
to the exploded diagrams in the appendix.
4.1.1 Precautions
Before proceeding with any disassembly or assembly work, make absolutely sure of
the following.
W ARNING The power switch for Stylus Pro 7600/9600 is incorporated in
the secondary circuit of the power supply circuit. Therefore, the
printer is always supplied with electric power, unless the power
cable is disconnected. Before servicing, unless otherwise stated,
be sure to unplug the power cord from the wall outlet to
prevent injury, burn, and electric shocks or damage to the
circuit. In doing so, be sure to turn the printer off and wait
several seconds first and then unplug the power cord. If you
must keep the power supplied to measure voltage, be aware of
the potential for electrical shock and do all tasks with the most
care.
With the front cover open, the cover sensor stops the operation
of the CR motor and PF motor. To ensure safety, you are
prohibited from disabling this interlock function.
A lithium battery for memory backup is installed on the main
circuit board of Stylus Pro 7600/9600. To prevent accidents
caused by the battery, never fail to observe the following
instructions when serving the main circuit board:
•Keep the battery away from any metal or other batteries so
that electrodes of the opposite polarity do not come in
contact with each other.
•Do not solder on any part of the battery. (Doing so may result
in leakage of electrolyte from the battery, burning or
explosion. The leakage may affect other devices close to the
battery.)
•Do not charge the battery. (This may cause burning or
explosion.)
•Do not dismantle the battery. (The gas inside the battery may
hurt your throat. Leakage, burning or explosion may also be
caused.)
•Do not short-circuit the terminals of the battery. Do not put
the battery on a conductive table in such a way that the
terminal face comes in contact with the table.
•Do not remove and install the battery. Do not install the
battery in the wrong direction.
•Do not heat the battery or put it near fire.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Summary 153
W ARNING Danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by
the manufacture. Dispose the used batteries according to
government's law and regulations.
Wear protective goggles to protect your eyes from ink. If ink
gets in your eye, flush the eye with fresh water and see a doctor
immediately.
Wear a pair of gloves to protect your hands from the sharp
edge in the printer mechanism.
If ink comes into contact with your skin, wash it off with soap
and water. If irritation occurs, contact a physician.
W ARNING Avant de commencer, assurez vous que l'imprimante soit
eteinte et que le cordon d'alimentation soit debranche.
Lorsque vous changez la pile au lithium, assurez vous que la
nouvelle respecte bien les caracteristiques requises.
Lorque que vous installez la pile au lithium, faites attention a
l'inserer dans le bon sens en respectant la polarite.
Veillez a jeter les piles usagees selon le reglement local.
Ne rechargez pas les piles au lithium.
C A U T I O N Risque d’explosion si la pile est remplacée incorrectment. Ne
remplacer que par une pile du même type ou d’un type équivalent
recommandé par le fabricant. Eliminer les piles déchargées selon
les lois et les règles de sécurité en vigueur.
C A U T I O N Before servicing or performing maintenance on the printer,
make sure you have enough space. If you need to move the
printer, make sure the space you move to is safe.
Because the printer is much heavier than most printers you
need to take extra care. If you need to take apart the printer
and the stand from each other or put then together, two people
are necessary.
If you remove and replace any parts of the ink path system, be
sure to discharge the ink beforehand by executing “Ink
Blowing” in “Clean Head” process.
Refer to “5.2.3.20 Clean Head (p.256)”.
After removing any of the ink related parts, double check to
make sure all parts are secured; otherwise you're going to be in
big trouble.
Use only recommended tools for disassembling, assembling or
adjusting the printer.
Apply lubricants and adhesives as specified.
Ink may leak onto other printer parts or the printer basket
when removing printer parts, so it is recommended to put a
sheet or cloth under the printer, especially when working on or
near ink-related parts.
When working on the electrical circuit boards, be careful
concerning static electricity which can cause damage to the
board. It is recommended you use an anti-static wrist band or
similar grounding device to prevent static electricity buildup.
Stylus Pro 7600/9600 uses many FFCs (Flexible Flat Cables).
Improper connection, such as slanting insertion, of an FFC can
cause a short circuit resulting in broken elements on the circuit
board. Be sure to connect the FFCs to the connectors properly
with great care.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Summary 154
Figure 4-1. Directional View of the Printer
C A U T I O N In reassembly, place the wiring of electric parts in specified
positions. (If wiring is located in places other than specified,
cables can come in contact with a sharp edge or the anti-noise
margin may lessen.)
As necessary, if you remove each cover and operate the printer,
care should be taken not to get injured by the operation of the
drive system units.
The cutter blade is extremely sharp, so care should be taken
not to injure yourself when handling it.
An ultra-hardened blade is used for the cutter blade, and
physically, it is extremely brittle material, so care should be
taken not to bump it against any of the metal parts of the
printer, etc. and damage it.
When performing service operations on items which are
controlled as after service parts but which no procedures have
been provided for, the state of the parts should be observed
closely before beginning the operation to get a thorough idea of
how to proceed.
If you have to loosen a screw that has blue screw-lock applied
to its head, make sure you apply blue screw-lock again when
reassembling.
Top
Rear
Front
Bottom
R
L
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Summary 155
4.1.2 Tools
This section lists the tools necessary to disassemble or assemble the printer.
Note *1: This hex wrench is necessary only when removing the stand (feet).
*2: 7 of these cartridges are necessary for one operation.
4.1.3 Screw List
The following table lists all the screws used in this printer.
Table 4-1. Necessary Tools
Tool Part Code Notes
(+) Phillips screwdriver #2 Commonly available
tools, no special tools
necessary
longer than 250mm is
helpful
(+) Phillips screwdriver #1
(-) Standard screwdriver
Round-nosed pliers
Tweezers
#E 589 Torque Wrench
(6 mm x 1.0 kg)
or
#f760 Torque Wrench
B765106901
1059914
For tube coupling screws.
Hex Wrench Part with Exclusive
Stand (Commercially
available part)
5.5 mm *1
PF Loop Scale ASSY Assembly tool 1051765 Exclusive tool No. #f730
PF Loop Scale Attachment tool 1051767 Exclusive tool No. #731
Ink Cartridge*2
Draining cartridge*2
Maintenance Tank*2
PF_ENC
CR_ENC
Cutter
Table 4-2. Screws
Type Color Description
CB M3×6 White (+) Bind
CBP M3×6Silver (+) Bind P-tight
CBP M4×10 Black (+) Bind P-tight
CBS M3×10 White (+) Bind S-tight
CBS M4×6 White (+) Bind S-tight
CBS M2×8White (+) Bind S-tight
CBS M3×6 White (+) Bind S-tight
CBS M4×8White (+) Bind S-tight
CBS M3×10 White (+) Bind S-tight
CUPS M3×6White (+) Cup S-tight
CUPS M4×6 White (+) Cup S-tight
CUPS M4×8White (+) Cup S-tight
CPP M3×8 White (+) Cup P-tight
CPS M3×12 White (+) Crosshead Pan S-tight
CP M3×6 White (+) Crosshead Pan
CP(W) M2×12 Silver (+) Crosshead Pan, washer
CP(W) M2×8 Silver (+) Crosshead Pan, washer
CP(W) M3×6Silver (+) Crosshead Pan, washer
CP(W) M3×8 Silver (+) Crosshead Pan, washer
CP(W) M3×25 Silver (+) Crosshead Pan, washer
CP(W) M4×8 Silver (+) Crosshead Pan, washer
CP(W) M4×10 Silver (+) Crosshead Pan, washer
CP(W) M4×40 Silver (+) Crosshead Pan, washer
Flush head screw M3×6White (+) Flush head
Truss screw M4×6 White (+) Truss screw
Toothed washer M3 White Outer teeth
Toothed washer M4 White Outer teeth
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Summary 156
4.1.4 Disassembly Flow
Refer to Figure 4-2 when determining the disassembly flow.
C A U T I O N This printer has been assembled with high accuracy of 1/100 mm.
Therefore, you are prohibited to disassemble the frames or some
specific parts. Permission of disassembly and assembly or removal
and installation is limited to the parts provided with a parts number
in the ASP List in Chapter 7. (If any parts other than specified are
disassembled or removed, there may be a case you can not repair
the printer except at the factory.)
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Summary 157
Figure 4-2. Disassembly Process Flowchart
4.3.1 Print Head (p.171)
4.3.2 Damper ASSY (p.173)
4.3.3 CR Board ASSY (p.174)
4.3.4 Cutter Section (p.175)
4.3.4.1 Cutter Holder ASSY (p.175)
4.3.4.2 Cutter Solenoid (p.177)
4.3 Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism (p.171)
4.3.7 CR Motor ASSY (p.180)
4.4 Disassembly and Assembly of Paper Feed Mechanism (p.185)
4.3.8 HEAD_SLIDE Sensor ASSY (p.182)
4.3.9 CR_HP Sensor ASSY
(p.183)
4.3.10 CR Encoder Scale (Timing Fence)
(p.184)
4.5 Disassembly and Assembly of Ink Supply Mechanism (p.192)
4.6 Disassembly and Assembly of Cleaning Mechanism (p.198)
4.7 Disassembly and Assembly of Circuit Boards (p.205)
4.2 Removing the Panel Unit and Housing (p.158)
4.7.3 MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207)
4.7.2 AC Inlet (p.206)
4.7.1 Power Supply Board (p.205)
4.6.1 Maintenance ASSY Removal (p.199)
4.6.2 Pump Motor ASSY (p.200)
4.6.3 Cap ASSY (p.200)
4.6.4 Pump ASSY (p.201)
4.6.5 Cleaner Head (Wiper) (p.203)
4.4.1 PF Motor (p.185)
4.4.4 Suction Fans (p.189)
4.2.2 R Side Cover (p.160)4.2.3 L Side Cover (p.163)
4.2.6 Rear Cover (p.166)
4.2.4 I/H Cover (p.164)
4.2.1 Panel Unit (p.159)
4.2.5 H Top Cover (p.165)
4.2.7 Paper Guide L2 (p.168)
4.2.8 Roll Paper Cover (p.169) 4.2.9 Front Cover (p.170)
4.5.1 C472_SUB-B Board (p.192)
4.5.3 Cover Sensor ASSY (p.197)
4.4.6 P_REAR Sensor ASSY (p.191)
4.4.5 P_THICK Sensor/P_THICK Sensor_0.3
ASSY (p.190)
4.5.2 I/H (Ink Holder) ASSY (p.193)
Release Sensor (I/H Lever) (p.193)
CSIC Relay Board (p.193)
4.3.5 CR Encoder Sensor ASSY (p.178)
4.3.6 P_EGDE Sensor ASSY (p.179)
4.4.2 PF Encoder Sensor ASSY (p.186)
4.4.3 Cautions when replacing the PF Loop Scale (p.187) 4.6.6 Flushing Box ASSY (p204)
Note: The italic bold characters represent
consumables or regular replacement parts.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Removing the Panel Unit and Housing 158
4.2 Removing the Panel Unit and Housing
This sections describes the removal procedure for printer housing parts. See below for
an illustration of the housing parts.
Figure 4-3. Housing Part Diagram
4.2.1 Panel Unit (p.159)
4.2.9 Front Cover (p.170)
4.2.4 I/H Cover (p.164)
4.2.5 H Top Cover (p.165)
4.2.3 L Side Cover (p.163) 4.2.8 Roll Paper Cover (p.169)
4.2.2 R Side Cover (p.160)
Paper Set Lever
4.2.7 Paper Guide L2 (p.168)
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Removing the Panel Unit and Housing 159
4.2.1 Panel Unit
1. Release the clips on both sides of the control panel unit and pull slightly away from the
R Side Cover.
(See Figure 4-4)
2. Remove the FFC cable from the connector and hook.
(See Figure 4-5)
Figure 4-4. Panel Unit Removal 1/2
Figure 4-5. Panel Unit Removal 2/2
Make sure that the Panel FFC does not get twisted round the
carriage driven pulley inside the printer.
Push
Push
Panel Unit
Lock
Clip Clip
Hook
Panel Unit (back side)
FFC
Connector
Clip
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Removing the Panel Unit and Housing 160
4.2.2 R Side Cover
1.
Remove the Panel Unit. (p.159)
2. Push back the Paper Set Lever to the released position.
(See Figure 4-6)
3. Remove two black screws (CBP: M4
×
10) from the lever handle, and remove the
handle.
4. Using a (-) driver or similar tool, remove the lever blind cap.
5. Open the roll paper cover.
(See Figure 4-7)
6. Remove the one black screw (CBP: M4
×
10) from inside the printer.
Figure 4-6. R Side Cover Removal 1/5
Figure 4-7. R Side Cover Removal 2/5
CHECK
P O I N T
Take care not to drop the lever blind cap into the printer.
Adjust the height of the Paper Set Lever by means of the black
screws so that the Paper Set Lever does not come in contact with the
Lever Blind Cap.
Paper Set Lever
Lever Blind Cap
Black screws (CBP: M4×10) ×2
Black screws (CBP: M4×10)
Roll Paper Cover
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Removing the Panel Unit and Housing 161
7. From the rear side, remove one screw (CUPS: M4
×
8).
8. From the right side remove two screws (CUPS: M4
×
8).
9. Remove the Maintenance Tank.
Figure 4-8. R Side Cover Removal 3/5
Screw (CUPS: M4×8)
Screws (CUPS: M4×8) ×2
Maintenance Tank
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Removing the Panel Unit and Housing 162
10. Open the Front Cover.
(See Figure 4-9)
11. Remove one black screw (CBP: M4
×
10).
12. Bring down the Paper Set Lever to the front.
(See Figure 4-10)
13. Remove the R Side Cover by lifting it outward.
Figure 4-9. R Side Cover Removal 4/5
Figure 4-10. R Side Cover Removal 5/5
In installing the R Side Cover, install the Lever Blind Cap before
tightening the screws.
If you have dropped the Lever Blind Cap into the printer body,
remove the R Side Cover from the printer body and take out the
Lever Blind Cap.
Black screw (CBP: M4×10)
Front Cover
Paper Set Lever
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Removing the Panel Unit and Housing 163
4.2.3 L Side Cover
1. Open the roll paper cover.
(See Figure 4-11)
2. Remove the one black screw (CBP: M4
×
10) inside the printer.
3. From the back side, remove one screw (CUPS
:
M4
×
8
).
(See Figure 4-12)
4. From the outside, remove two screws (CUPS: M4
×
8).
5. Remove the L side cover.
Figure 4-11. L Side Cover Removal 1/2
Figure 4-12. L Side Cover Removal 2/2
Black screw (CBP: M4×10)
Roll Parer Cover
Screw (CUPS: M4×10) Screws (CUPS: M4×10) ×2
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Removing the Panel Unit and Housing 164
4.2.4 I/H Cover
1.
Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163)
2. Open the I/H Cover Lid.
3. Remove one black screw (M3
×
6), then remove the lever cap.
(See Figure 4-13)
4. Remove two screws (CBS: M3
×
10), then remove the I/H Cover and I/H Cover Lid.
(See Figure 4-13)
Figure 4-13. I/H Cover Removal
CHECK
P O I N T
For easy removal and installation of the I/H Cover, set the I/H
Lever in the raised (Release) position.
Release
Lock
I/H Lever
I/H Cover Lid
Lever Cap
Screws (CBS: M3×10) ×2
Black screw
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Removing the Panel Unit and Housing 165
4.2.5 H Top Cover
1.
Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160)
2.
Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163)
3.
Remove the I/H Cover. (p.164)
4. Open the Front Cover.
5. From the left side, remove one screw (CUPS: M4
×
8).
(See Figure 4-14)
6. Remove the screw (CUPS: M4
×
8) at the front left of the printer.
7. Remove the screw (CUPS: M4
×
8) at the front right of the printer.
8. From the right side, remove one screw (CUPS: M4
×
8).
(See Figure 4-15)
9. To avoid damaging the P_THICK Sensor or P_THICK_0.3 Sensor, bring down the
Paper Set Lever toward you (to the paper holding position).
10. Pull up the H Top Cover rearward and remove it.
In doing so, take care not to lose the plate which is also locked with the front left
screw.
Figure 4-14. H Top Cover Removal on left side
Figure 4-15. H Top Cover Removal on right side
C A U T I O N When removing the H Top Cover, care should be taken not to
damage the P_THICK Sensor and P_THICK Sensor_0.3. To avoid
damaging them, bring down the Paper Set Lever toward you (to the
paper holding position) first and shift the H Top Cover rearward in
an oblique direction for its removal.
Screw (CUPS: M4×8)
Screws (CUPS: M4×8) ×2
Screw (CUPS: M4×8)
Screw (CUPS: M4×8)
Plate
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Removing the Panel Unit and Housing 166
4.2.6 Rear Cover
1. From the rear side, remove two screws (CPS: M3
×
12), and remove the blank panel.
(See Figure 4-16)
2. Remove the two screws (CP: M3
×
6) securing the parallel interface and remove the one
screw (CBS: M3
×
6) securing the USB interface.
3. Remove one screw (CBS: M3
×
6) holding the AC inlet top.
(See Figure 4-17)
4. Remove the three screws (CBS: M4
×
8) (six screws for Stylus Pro 9600) holding the
rear cover bottom.
5. Open the Roll Paper Cover.
6. Remove the three screws (CBS: M4
×
8) (six screws for Stylus Pro 9600) holding the
rear cover top, then remove the rear cover, while pulling it rearward.
Figure 4-16. Rear Cover Removal 1/2
Figure 4-17. Rear Cover Removal 2/2
C A U T I O N To avoid getting hurt with sharp frame edges, be sure to wear
gloves when performing the following work:
Removing and installing the Rear Cover
Inserting your hand through the opening in the Access Cover
(see Check Point on the next page)
Screws (CPS: M3×12) ×2
Blank Panel
Screw (CPS: M3×6)
Screws (CPS: M3×6) ×2
Screw (CPS: M3×6)
Screws (CPS: M4×8) ×3
Screws (CPS: M4×8) ×3
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Removing the Panel Unit and Housing 167
CHECK
P O I N T
Removing the Access Cover
For disconnecting connectors for various units from the Main
Board Assy, it is not always necessary to remove the Rear Cover.
Remove the Access Cover, and you will be allowed to do almost all
such work.
Remove the screw
Loosen the screw
Access Cover
Main Board
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Removing the Panel Unit and Housing 168
4.2.7 Paper Guide L2
1. From the front, remove four screws (Truss: M4
×
6).
(See Figure 4-18)
2. Remove the Paper Guide L2.
Figure 4-18. Paper Guide L2 Removal
Figure 4-19. Paper Guide L2 Installation
Install the Paper Guide L2 so that all its projections are fit in the
notches of the Paper Guide L properly. (See Figure 4-19)
Number of notches:
Stylus Pro 7600: 5
Stylus Pro 9600: 8
Screws (Truss: M4×6) ×2
Screws (Truss: M4×6) ×2
Paper Guide L
Paper Guide L2
Projection
Cushion tape
Notch
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Removing the Panel Unit and Housing 169
4.2.8 Roll Paper Cover
1. Open the Roll Paper Cover.
(See Figure 4-20)
2. Remove two screws (CPS: M4
×
8) securing the black spindle support (Spindle Support
L) on the left, and then remove the spindle support.
3. Remove the two screws (CPS: M4
×
8) and one screw (M4
×
12)securing the gray
spindle support (Spindle Support R) on the right, and then remove the spindle support.
(See Figure 4-20)
Figure 4-20. Roll Paper Cover removal
Figure 4-21. Roll Paper Cover removal
When installing the white spindle support (Spindle Support R),
install the transparent washer, wave washer and printer body
frame on the outside of the Roll Paper Cover in the named order.
Wave washer
Transparent washer
Roll Paper Cover
Screws (CPS: M4×8) ×2
Spindle Support L
Screw (M4×12)
Screws (CPS: M4×8) ×2
Spindle Support R
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Removing the Panel Unit and Housing 170
4.2.9 Front Cover
1. Open the Front Cover.
2. Push in the two hooks to the left of the cover and remove the Front Cover Support.
(See Figure 4-22)
3. Release the Front Cover Spring L from the Front Cover Spring Catch Shaft on the left
side of the Front Cover.
(See Figure 4-23)
4. Remove the Plastic Stop Wheel E5 on the left side of the Front Cover and move the
Front Cover Fulcrum Pin outward for its removal.
5. Release the Front Cover Spring R from the Front Cover Spring Catch Shaft on the right
side of the Front Cover.
6. Remove the Front Cover from the Front Cover Fulcrum Pin R.
Figure 4-22. Front Cover Support Removal
Figure 4-23. Front Cover Removal
Install the Plastic Stop Wheels in the correct orientations,
respectively.
A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U I R E D
The cover switch holder installation position should be checked so
that the cover sensor ASSY is linked to the front cover when it
opens and closes.
Refer to “5.1.4.9 Cover Sensor ASSY Adjustment” (p.216)
Plastic Stop Wheel E5
Front Cover
Front Cover Fulcrum Pin L
Short
Long
Front Cover
Front Cover Support
Hooks
Front Cover Spring Catch Shaft
E-ring
Front Cover Spring L
Front Cover Spring R
Plastic Stop Wheel E
Front Cover Fulcrum Pin L
Front Cover Fulcrum Pin R
Front Cover
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism 171
4.3 Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR)
Mechanism
4.3.1 Print Head
1. Execute ink discharge operation to discharge the ink from all the ink passages.
2. While pushing the cutter area gently, shift the carriage to the left about 2 cm to unlock
the carriage and then move the carriage to the printer center.
(See Figure 4-24)
3. Loosen the one screw (CP(W): M3
×
6) securing the front end of the damper holder and
separate the Damper Unit from the print head.
(See Figure 4-25)
Figure 4-24. Carriage Lock Release
Figure 4-25. Damper Holder Loosening
C A U T I O N When unlocking the carriage, do not move the carriage by about 2
cm or more with the cutter pushed into the innermost position;
otherwise, the cutter edge would be damaged.
CHECK
P O I N T
When replacing the print head with a new one, execute ink
discharge (“Ink Blowing” on page 256) beforehand.
CHECK
P O I N T
When removing the head, hang the hook of the Damper Unit in the
hole of the bottom plate of the CR Board Assy so that work will not
be obstructed by the Damper Unit.
In addition, for easier work, you are advised to lift with Scotch tape
to such a degree that no significant load is applied to the ink tubes.
There is a hook 2 cm high at the center of the head. Install the
Damper Unit with care not to hit it against the hook.
When installing the Damper Unit, before tightening the screw,
press the lower area of the Damper with your fingers so that it
comes in close contact with the print head.
Cutter area
Push
Move the carriage
Damper Unit
Loosen the screw (CP(W): M3×6)
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism 172
4. Loosen the left screw for the
Head Holder
, remove the right screw (M3
×
6) and release
the Head Holder downward.
(See Figure 4-26)
5. Take out the head by lifting its inner side and release the 2 FFCs.
(See Figure 4-27)
Figure 4-26. Head Holder Release
Figure 4-27. Head Removal
Take care not to touch the nozzle side of the print head to be
installed and not to let dust or dirt adhere to the nozzles.
When installing the carriage, take care not to scratch the nozzle
side.
A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U I R E D
When replacing the print head, the following adjustment
procedures are required.
Refer to “5.1.4.1 Print Head Adjustment” (p.212)
Head Holder
Screw (M3×6)
Loosen the screw
Print Head
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism 173
4.3.2 Damper ASSY
1. Execute ink discharge operation to discharge the ink from all the ink passages.
2. While pushing the cutter area gently, shift the carriage to the left about 2 cm to unlock
the carriage and then move the carriage to the printer center.
(See Figure 4-24)
3. Loosen the one screw (CP(W): M3
×
6) securing the front end of the damper holder and
separate the Damper Unit from the print head.
(See Figure 4-25)
4. Disengage the three hooks of the Damper Holder and remove the Damper Holder.
(See Figure 4-28)
5. Pull out the relevant Damper ASSY from the Damper Holder, loosen the coupling
screw and separate the Damper ASSY from the ink tube.
(See Figure 4-29)
NOTE: Take care not to lose the O-ring inside the coupling screw.
Figure 4-28. Damper Holder Removal
Figure 4-29. Damper ASSY Removal
CHECK
P O I N T
Execute ink discharge (“Ink Blowing”) before removing the
Damper ASSY.
Refer to “5.2.3.20 Clean Head (p.256)”.
C A U T I O N If you press on the transparent film on the damper's right side
surface with your fingers, the ink with which the inside is filled
will be expelled, so do not press on this part.
The transparent film on the damper's side is delicate, so be
careful not to damage it while working.
There is a hook 2 cm high at the center of the head. Install the
Damper Unit with care not to hit it against the hook.
When installing the Damper Unit, before tightening the screw,
press the lower area of the Damper with your fingers so that it
comes in close contact with the print head.
Secure the coupling screw and the ink tube by tightening at the
specified torque. (2 ~ 2.5 kg/f)
Hooks (3 positions)
Damper Holder
Damper ASSY
Damper Holder
Coupling screw
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism 174
4.3.3 CR Board ASSY
1.
Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160)
2.
Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163)
3.
Remove the I/H Cover. (p.164)
4.
Remove the H Top Cover. (p.165)
5. Remove one screw (CPP M3
×
6), two screws (CP(W): M3
×
6) and one screw (M3
×
16)
securing the CR Board Guide, and also the ground line and the toothed washer (M3),
and remove the CR Board Guide.
(See Figure 4-30)
6. Disconnect the following eight connectors (with lock) connected to the CR Board.
(See Figure 4-31)
7. Remove the two screws (CPP: M3
×
8) securing the CR Board ASSY and remove the
CR Board ASSY.
(See Figure 4-32)
Figure 4-30. CR Board Guide Removal
Figure 4-31. CR Board Connectors Disconnection
Figure 4-32. CR Board Removal
Table 4-3. Connectors on CR Board
Connector Type Connected to
5-Pin (white) CR Encoder Sensor
4-Pin (black) P_EDGE Sensor
2-Pin (white) Cutter Solenoid
FFC (lock type)×2Print Head
FFC (lock type)×3 Main Board
The screw on the far left side used to fasten the CR board guide
plate should be tightened together with the ground wire, toothed
washer, CR board guide and CR board ASSY, in that order.
C A U T I O N When connecting an FFC, take great care not to insert it aslant.
(Inserting aslant can cause a short circuit of signals, thus resulting
in broken circuit elements.)
CR Board Guide Plate
Screw (CPP: M3×6)
Screws (CP(W): M3×6) ×2
Screws (M3×16)
Screws (CPP: M3×8) ×2
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism 175
4.3.4 Cutter Section
4.3.4.1 Cutter Holder ASSY
1.
Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160)
2.
Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163)
3.
Remove the I/H Cover. (p.164)
4.
Remove the H Top Cover. (p.165)
5. While pushing the cutter area gently, shift the carriage to the left about 2 cm to unlock
the carriage and then move the carriage to the printer center.
(See Figure 4-24)
6. Remove one screw (CPPM3
×
6) securing the CR Board Guide, and remove three
screws (CP(W): M3
×
6) securing the ground line, washer (M3), and CR Board Guide.
(See Figure 4-30)
7. Disconnect the following three connectors on the CR Board.
(See Figure 4-31)
8. Remove the four screws (CP(W): M3
×
8) securing the Cutter Holder, and while paying
attention to the connector harness connected to the CR Board, remove the Cutter
Holder ASSY from the carriage.
(See Figure 4-33)
Figure 4-33. Removing the Cutter Housing
Figure 4-34. Cutter Holder ASSY (Back: Carriage Side)
C A U T I O N When unlocking the carriage, do not move the carriage by about 2
cm or more with the cutter pushed into the innermost position;
otherwise, the cutter edge would be damaged.
Connector Type Connected to
5-Pin (white) CR Encoder Sensor
4-Pin (black) P_EDGE Sensor
2-Pin (white) Cutter Solenoid
The cutter cap and the CR lock kicker should be engaged. (If
they are not engaged, the carriage cannot be moved from the
home position to the left when the power switch is turned on.)
(See Figure 4-34)
Cutter Holder ASSY
Screws (CP(W): M3×8) ×4
Key engaged with carriage
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism 176
Figure 4-35. Take Care When Installing the Cutter Holder
Take care not to catch the solenoid cable (red) in the cutter cap.
(See Figure 4-35)
When installing the Cutter Holder ASSY, make sure that the
CR Encoder Scale (Timing Fence) is led through the slit in the
CR Encoder Sensor properly.
A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U I R E D
After installing the cutter holder ASSY, the following adjustment
should be done.
“5.1.4.11 Cutter Solenoid ASSY or Paper Guide L Adjustment
(p.217)”
CR Encoder Sensor
CR Encoder Scale
(Timing Fence)
CR Encoder Sensor
CR Encoder Scale
(Timing Fence)
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism 177
4.3.4.2 Cutter Solenoid
1.
Remove the Cutter Holder ASSY. (p.175)
2. Release the engagement between the Cutter Cap and the CR Lock Kicker, then remove
the Cutter Cap + Cutter Solenoid Iron Core and Cutter Solenoid Spring.
3. Take out the two screws (CP(W): M3
×
6) holding the Cutter Solenoid, then remove the
Cutter Solenoid by pushing it out from the bottom of the Cutter Holder ASSY with the
shaft of a (+) screwdriver or the like.
Figure 4-36. Cutter Solenoid Removal
C A U T I O N Do not pull the cable to remove the Cutter Solenoid.
A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U I R E D
After installing the Cutter Solenoid, the following adjustment
should be done.
“5.1.4.11 Cutter Solenoid ASSY or Paper Guide L Adjustment
(p.217)”
Cutter Cap
CR Lock Kicker
Screws (CP(W): M2.5×5) ×2
Push
Cutter Solenoid
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism 178
4.3.5 CR Encoder Sensor ASSY
1.
Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160)
2.
Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163)
3.
Remove the I/H Cover. (p.164)
4.
Remove the H Top Cover. (p.165)
5.
Remove one screw (CPP M3
×
6), two screws (CP(W): M3
×
6) and one screw (M3
×
16)
securing the CR Board Guide, and also the ground line and the toothed washer (M3),
and remove the CR Board Guide.
(See Figure 4-30)
6. Disconnect the connector (5-pin, white) for the CR Encoder Sensor from the CR
Board.
7. Remove the two screws securing the CR Board Unit in the Carriage Unit, and take out
the CR Board Unit toward the front.
(See Figure 4-37)
8. Remove one screw (CPP: M3
×
8) securing the CR_ENC ASSY, ground line, and
washer (M3). Then remove the CR_ENC ASSY.
(See Figure 4-38)
Figure 4-37. CR Encoder Sensor Removal 1/2
Figure 4-38. CR Encoder Sensor Removal 2/2
C A U T I O N If you can not disconnect easily the connector for the CR Encoder
Sensor, do not disconnect it by undue force. Disconnect the two
FFCs for the print head first and then the connector for the CR
Encoder Sensor.
A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U I R E D
After assembling the CR ENC, the following adjustments should be
made.
“5.1.4.8 CR Encoder Sensor ASSY Adjustment (p.215)”
CR Board Unit
Connector
CR_ENC ASSY Ground line
Screw (M3×8)
Ground line
Toothed washer (M3)
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism 179
4.3.6 P_EGDE Sensor ASSY
1.
Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160)
2.
Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163)
3.
Remove the I/H Cover. (p.164)
4.
Remove the H Top Cover. (p.165)
5. Remove one screw (CPP M3
×
6), two screws (CP(W): M3
×
6) and one screw (M3
×
16)
securing the CR Board Guide, and also the ground line and the toothed washer (M3),
and remove the CR Board Guide.
(See Figure 4-30)
6. Disconnect the connector (4-pin, black) for the P_EDGE Sensor from the CR Board.
7. Remove the two screws securing the CR Board Unit in the Carriage Unit, and take out
the CR Board Unit toward the front.
(See Figure 4-39)
8. Remove the one screw (M3
×
6) securing the EDGE Sensor Base ASSY and remove the
EDGE Sensor Base ASSY.
(See Figure 4-40)
Figure 4-39. Removing the P_EDGE Sensor ASSY 1/2
Figure 4-40. Removing the P_EDGE Sensor ASSY 2/2
C A U T I O N If you can not disconnect easily the connector for the P_EDGE
Sensor, do not disconnect it by undue force. Disconnect the two
FFCs for the print head first and then the connector for the
P_EDGE Sensor.
After installing the P_EDGE Sensor ASSY on the Cutter Holder
ASSY, fasten the harness to the harness holding path of the Cutter
Holder ASSY.
(See Figure 4-40)
A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U I R E D
After replacing the P_EDGE Sensor, the following adjustment
operation should be performed.
“P_EDGE Sensor ASSY Adjustment (p.215)”
Screws ×2
CR Board Unit
Connector
Lead the lead wires in this groove.
P_EDGE Sensor Base
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism 180
4.3.7 CR Motor ASSY
This section describes the replacement procedure for the following parts of the CR
Motor ASSY.
CR Timing Belt
Driven Pulley
(Stylus Pro 7600: white / Stylus Pro 9600: black)
1.
Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160)
2.
Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163)
3.
Remove the I/H Cover. (p.164)
4.
Remove the H Top Cover. (p.165)
5. Release the carriage lock and move the carriage from the capping position.
(See Figure 4-24)
6. On the R Side Frame side, remove the CR Tension Mounting Shaft and CR Tension
Spring and the CR Tension Spring Support.
(See Figure 4-42)
7. Slide the CR Tension Bracket to the left (toward the CR Motor), and remove the CR
Timing Belt, together with the Driven Pulley, from the CR Tension Bracket.
Figure 4-41. Indicator Position
Figure 4-42. Loosening the CR Timing Belt
Before installing the covers, adjust the indicator position (the right
end of the projection on the CR tension spring support) of the CR
tension bracket to the center by turning the CR Tension Mounting
Shaft.
However, if the indicator was at a off-center position before
assembly, adjust the indicator to the same off-center position. (See
Figure 4-42)
Adjust the right end to the center
Projection (CR tension
spring support)
Remove the CR Tension
Mounting Shaft
Driven Pulley
CR Tension Bracket
Timing Belt
CR Tension Spring
CR Tension Spring Support
Record scale reading
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism 181
8. Loosen the CR Tension Mounting Shaft on the R Side Frame side, then release the
tension on the CR Timing Belt.
(See Figure 4-43)
9. Disconnect the connector of the CR Motor harness and the relay connector from the
Main Board, unclamp the CR Motor harness and take them out through the hole in the
Left Side Frame.
10. Remove the timing belt from the CR Motor ASSY pulley on the L Side Frame.
11. Take out the four screws (CP(W): M4
×
10) holding the CR Motor ASSY, then remove
the CR Motor ASSY.
Figure 4-43. Removing the CR Motor ASSY
Remember that there is a difference in specifications between
the driven pulley (white) of Stylus Pro 7600 and the driven
pulley (black) of Stylus Pro 9600.
Set the timing belt of Stylus Pro 7600 on the CR Unit in a
manner as shown below:
Install the timing belt by adjusting the tension on the driven
pulley side, with the CR Motor secured with the screws.
Installing the timing belt by adjusting the tension on the CR
Motor side could damage the PF Encoder Scale.
Move the carriage by hand to the left and right and make sure
that the CR Timing Belt is attached uniformly in the center of
the pulley.
CR Unit
Flat surface hereCR Timing Belt
A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U I R E D
Once the belt tension has changed as a result of, say, removal of the
CR Motor, make the following adjustment:
“5.1.4.3 CR Motor Adjustment” (p.214)
Screws (CP(W): M4×10) ×4
CR Motor ASSY
Connector
CR Timing Belt
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism 182
4.3.8 HEAD_SLIDE Sensor ASSY
1.
Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160)
2. Remove the Access Cover. (See
Removing the Access Cover on page 167)
3. While pushing the cutter area gently, shift the carriage to the left about 2 cm to unlock
the carriage and then move the carriage to the left from the capping position.
(See Figure 4-24)
4. Disconnect the connector (CN29: red 4-pin) of the HEAD_SLIDE Sensor ASSY from
the Main Board and take it out through the hole in the R Side Frame.
5. Remove the one (CP(W): M3
×
6) screw securing the HEAD_SLIDE Sensor ASSY and
remove the HEAD_SLIDE Sensor ASSY.
(See Figure 4-44)
6. Release the harness for the HEAD_SLIDE Sensor ASSY from the five cable clamps on
the Maintenance ASSY and CR Rail ASSY.
(See Figure 4-45)
Figure 4-44. Removing the HEAD_SLIDE Sensor ASSY
Figure 4-45. Releasing the HEAD_SLIDE Sensor ASSY Harness
C A U T I O N When unlocking the carriage, do not move the carriage by about 2
cm or more with the cutter pushed into the innermost position;
otherwise, the cutter edge would be damaged.
Screws (CP(W): M3×6)
HEAD_SLIDE Sensor ASSY
Clamp
Clamp
Clamp
Clamp
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism 183
4.3.9 CR_HP Sensor ASSY
1.
Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160)
2. While pushing the cutter area gently, shift the carriage to the left about 2 cm to unlock
the carriage and then move the carriage to the left from the capping position.
(See Figure 4-24)
3. Release the harness of the CR_HP Sensor ASSY from the four clamps on the printer
body.
(See Figure 4-46)
4. Pinch the two upper hooks of the CR_HP Sensor ASSY and disengage them from the
holding plate, and disconnect the connector.
(See Figure 4-47)
Figure 4-46. Releasing the CR_HP Sensor ASSY Harness
Figure 4-47. Removing the CR_HP Sensor
C A U T I O N When unlocking the carriage, do not move the carriage by about 2
cm or more with the cutter pushed into the innermost position;
otherwise, the cutter edge would be damaged.
Clamp
Clamp
Clamp
CR_HP Sensor ASSY
Hook
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism 184
4.3.10 CR Encoder Scale (Timing Fence)
1.
Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160)
2.
Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163)
3.
Remove the I/H Cover. (p.164)
4.
Remove the H Top Cover. (p.165)
5.
Remove the CR Encoder Sensor ASSY. (p.178)
6. Disengage the CR Encoder Scale (Timing Fence) from the CR Encoder Scale
Fastening Spring on the L Side Frame side.
7. Remove the CR Encoder Scale from the CR Encoder Scale Holders.
NOTE: The number of CR Encoder Scale Holders is as follows:
Stylus Pro 7600: 2 guides
Stylus Pro 9600: 3 guides
8. While pushing the cutter area gently, shift the carriage to the left about 2 cm to unlock
the carriage and then move the carriage to the left from the capping position.
(See Figure 4-24)
9. Disengage the CR Encoder Scale from the hook on the CR Encoder Scale Holder R
and draw out the CR Encoder Scale from the carriage area.
Figure 4-48. Releasing from the CR Encoder Scale Fastening Spring
Figure 4-49. CR Encoder Scale Removal
C A U T I O N When unlocking the carriage, do not move the carriage by
about 2 cm or more with the cutter pushed into the innermost
position; otherwise, the cutter edge would be damaged.
Take great care not to scratch the CR Encoder Scale. (If the CR
Encoder Scale is scratched, the encoder sensor will output
wrong signals, thus resulting in abnormal operation of the
carriage or error occurrence.)
A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U I R E D
After assembling the CR ENC, the following adjustments should be
made.
“5.1.4.8 CR Encoder Sensor ASSY Adjustment (p.215)”
CR Encoder Scale Fastening Spring
CR Encoder Scale
CR Encoder Scale Holder
CR Encoder Scale Holder R
CR Encoder Scale
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Paper Feed Mechanism 185
4.4 Disassembly and Assembly of Paper Feed
Mechanism
4.4.1 PF Motor
1.
Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163)
2. Disconnect the one connector cable of the PF Motor ASSY and take it out through the
hole in the L Side Frame.
(See Figure 4-50)
3. Remove the four screws securing the PF Motor Mounting Plate.
(See Figure 4-51)
4. Move the PF Motor toward the printer body and remove the PF Motor by lifting the
gear side.
Figure 4-50. Removing the PF Motor ASSY Harness Connector.
Figure 4-51. Removing the PF Motor.
A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U I R E D
After replacing the P_EDGE Sensor, the following adjustment
operation should be performed.
“PF Motor Adjustment (p.214)”
Relay Connector
Clamp
PF Motor Mounting Plate securing screws x4
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Paper Feed Mechanism 186
4.4.2 PF Encoder Sensor ASSY
1.
Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163)
2. Disconnect the PF Encoder Sensor connector.
3. Remove the one screw securing the PF Encoder Sensor and remove the PF Encoder
Sensor ASSY.
Figure 4-52. Removing the PF Encoder Sensor.
A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U I R E D
After installing the PF Encoder Sensor ASSY, make the following
adjustment.
“5.1.4.10 PF Encoder Sensor ASSY Adjustment (p.216)”
Connector
PF Encoder Sensor ASSY
Screw
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Paper Feed Mechanism 187
4.4.3 Cautions when replacing the PF Loop Scale
4.4.3.1 Assembly Procedure for the PF Loop Scale ASSY
When assembling the PF loop scale unit, the following exclusive tool should be used.
Exclusive tool No.#F730 : FPF Loop Scale Assembly Base
(Code: 1051765)
The assembly procedure is shown below.
1. Set the exclusive tool, #F730 as shown in the figure below, then set the PF loop scale
base part with the double sided tape side facing up.
2. Peel the protective backing off the double sided tape to the PF loop scale base.
3. Affix the PF loop scale carefully to the PF loop scale base with the PF loop scale
printed surface downward, aligning it precisely with the PF loop scale base.
4. Peel the protective backing off the other side of the double sided tape and affix the tape
so that it is within the black circle on the unprinted side of the PF loop scale ASSY.
Figure 4-53. #F730 tool and PF Loop Scale Base
Figure 4-54. PF Loop Scale Set
C A U T I O N Care should be taken so as not to damage the internal diameter
of the PF loop scale.
There is no problem if the PF loop scale's affixing position on
the PF loop scale base deviates somewhat. The important
control point is that the inside diameter of the PF loop scale not
be damaged.
#F730 tool
PF Loop Scale Base
Protective backing
PF Loop Scale
Base
Loop Scale set direction
Wrong direction
Exclusive #F730 tool
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Paper Feed Mechanism 188
4.4.3.2 PF Loop Scale ASSY Affixing Procedure
When assembling the PF loop scale unit, the following exclusive tool should be used.
Exclusive tool No.#F731 : PF Loop Scale Affixing tool
(Code: 1051767)
The assembly procedure is given below.
1. Set the PF loop scale ASSY's double sided tape side on the grid roller side, align the
internal diameter of the PF loop scale with the left end of the grid roller (PF roller) and
set it lightly.
2. Press the exclusive tool #F731 against the PF loop scale ASSY from the outside, then
insert the grid roller in as far as the base plate carefully, and affix it.
Figure 4-55. Affixing the Double Sided Tape to the PF Loop Scale
Figure 4-56. Affixing the PF Loop Scale ASSY
C A U T I O N At this point, the PF loop scale ASSY should not be fitted on the
grid roller as far as it can go. If the PF loop scale ASSY is placed on
the grid roller by hand, it could damage the PF loop scale ASSY's
internal diameter and the distance from the center of the grid roller
to the scale reading part would not be the same all around any
more, resulting in a drop in the encoder sensor's reading accuracy.
Double sided tape
Protective backing
PF Loop Scale ASSY Exclusive #F731 tool
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Paper Feed Mechanism 189
4.4.4 Suction Fans
1.
Remove the Paper Guide L2. (p.168)
2. Remove the two screws (CP(W): M4
×
8) and one screw (CP(W): M4
×
40) securing the
fan duct, and then remove the fan duct.
3. Disconnect the fan connector and harness.
4. Remove the one screw (CP(W): M4
×
8) securing the fan, and remove the fan.
NOTE: The number of fans:
Stylus Pro 7600: 2
Stylus Pro 9600: 3
Figure 4-57. Suction Fan Mounting Position
Figure 4-58. Suction Fan Removal
CHECK
P O I N T
When removing the right-side Suction Fan of Stylus Pro 7600, use a
short Phillips screwdriver to avoid interference with the
Maintenance Tank Holder.
Connector
Fan Fan Duct
Screws (CP(W): M4×8) ×2
Screw (CP(W): M4×8)
Screw (CP(W): M4×40)
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Paper Feed Mechanism 190
4.4.5 P_THICK Sensor/P_THICK Sensor_0.3 ASSY
P_THICK Sensor ASSY
P_THICK_0.3 Sensor ASSY
1.
Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160)
2.
Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163)
3.
Remove the I/H Cover. (p.164)
4.
Remove the H Top Cover. (p.165)
5. Push the paper hold lever down to the rear.
6. Remove the harness from the connector of the P_THICK Sensor/P_THICK_0.3
Sensor.
7. Remove the one (CUPS: M3
×
6) screw securing the sensor bracket and remove the
bracket along with the both sensors.
8. Unhook the sensor from the sensor bracket and remove the sensor.
Figure 4-59. P_THICK and P_THICK_0.3 Sensors Removal
CHECK
P O I N T
Sensor bracket position is adjusted at the factory before shipment.
When the sensor bracket is to be removed on the service site, you
are advised to mark the mounting position before removal for easy
adjustment at reassembly.
A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U I R E D
If you move the sensor bracket position, perform the necessary
adjustment.
Refer to “5.1.4.7 P_THICK/P_THICK_0.3 Sensor ASSY
Adjustment” (p.215)
Bring the Paper Set Lever into the release position and
bring down the Detection Arm rearward.
P_THICK Sensor ASSY
P_THICK_0.3 Sensor ASSY
Screws (M4×8) ×2
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Paper Feed Mechanism 191
4.4.6 P_REAR Sensor ASSY
1.
Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160)
2.
Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163)
3.
Remove the I/H Cover. (p.164)
4.
Remove the H Top Cover. (p.165)
5.
Remove the Rear Cover. (p.166)
6. Disconnect the connector (CN27: black 4-pin) of the P_REAR Sensor ASSY from the
Main Board.
7. Push the Paper Hold Lever down to the front.
8. Remove the lower two screws (CBS: M4
×
6) securing the Paper Guide U.
(See Figure 4-60)
9. Remove the upper three screws (CBS: M4
×
6) (six screws for Stylus Pro 7600)
securing the Paper Guide U and remove the Paper Guide U by pulling it up toward you
slowly.
10. Remove the two (CP(W): M2
×
8) screws securing the P_REAR Sensor ASSY and
remove the P_REAR Sensor ASSY.
(See Figure 4-61)
Figure 4-60. Removing the Paper Guide U
Figure 4-61. Removing the P_REAR Sensor ASSY
C A U T I O N When removing/installing the Paper Guide U, be careful not to mar
the P_REAR Sensor ASSY with the edge of the sensor inspection
window.
CHECK
P O I N T
The P_REAR Sensor ASSY position is adjusted at the factory
before shipment. When the sensor bracket is to be removed on the
service site, you are advised to mark the mounting position before
removal for easy adjustment at reassembly.
A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U I R E D
If you replace the P_REAR Sensor ASSY, perform the necessary
adjustment.
Refer to “5.1.4.6 P_REAR Sensor ASSY Adjustment” (p.215)
Paper Guide U
P_REAR Sensor ASSY peeping window
Screws (M4×6) ×5
P-REAR Sensor ASSY
Screws (M2×8) ×2
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Ink Supply Mechanism 192
4.5 Disassembly and Assembly of Ink Supply
Mechanism
4.5.1 C472_SUB-B Board
1.
Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163)
2. Disconnect the seven FFCs (ink cartridge) and the two FFCs (Main Board/
Maintenance Tank) on the C472_SUB-B Board found at the left side of I/H Frame.
(See Figure 4-62)
3. Disconnect the connector of the Release Sensor (I/H Lever).
4. Remove the four screws (M3
×
6) and remove the C472_SUB-B Board.
Figure 4-62. Disconnecting the C472_SUB-B Board Connectors
C A U T I O N When connecting an FFC, take great care not to insert it aslant.
(Inserting aslant can cause a short circuit of signals, thus resulting
in broken circuit elements.)
FFC (CSIC Relay Board) ×7
FFC (Maintenance Tank)
FFC (Main Board)
Screws (M3×6) ×4
Release Sensor (I/H Lever)
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Ink Supply Mechanism 193
4.5.2 I/H (Ink Holder) ASSY
There are a total of seven I/H assemblies installed, one for each ink color. Here, the
procedure for removing one I/H ASSY will be explained.
This section also describes the procedure for removing the following parts:
Release Sensor (I/H Lever)
CSIC Relay Board
I/H Frame
1.
Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160)
2.
Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163)
3.
Remove the I/H Cover. (p.164)
4.
Remove the H Top Cover. (p.165)
5. Disconnect the seven FFCs (ink cartridges), two FFCs (Main Board/Maintenance
Tank) and the connector for the Release Sensor (I/H Lever) on the C472_SUB-B
Board found at the left side of I/H Frame.
(See Figure 4-62)
6. Remove two black screws (M3
×
8) securing the Ink Tube Cover and remove the cover
.
(See Figure 4-63)
7. Disconnect the connector of the Cover Sensor ASSY at the right side of the I/H Frame.
(See Figure 4-64)
8. Remove one screw (CUPS: M3
×
6) and one screw (CUPS: M4
×
6) securing the I/H
Frame on the right side.
Figure 4-63. Ink Tube Cover Removal
Figure 4-64. I/H Frame Removal 1/2
C A U T I O N
You must execute ink discharge (
“Ink Blowing”
in
5.2.3.20 Clean
Head on page 256
) before removal of the I/H ASSY and ink charging
(
“Initial charge”
in
5.2.4 Cleaning on page 259
) after reinstallation.
If no ink tube is to be removed, there is no need of executing ink
discharge.
A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U I R E D
When removing and installing the front cover switch holder, the
following adjustment should be made.
Refer to “5.1.4.9 Cover Sensor ASSY Adjustment” (p.216)
Black screws (M3×8) ×2
Tube Cover
Connector of Cover Sensor ASSY
Screw (CUPS: M3×6) Screw (CUPS: M4×6)
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Ink Supply Mechanism 194
9. Remove one screw (CUPS: M3
×
6) and one screw (CUPS: M4
×
6) securing the I/H
Frame on the left side
.
(See Figure 4-65)
10. Remove seven screws (CUPS: M3
×
6) and two screws (CUPS: M4
×
6) securing the I/H
Frame on the top.
11. Lift the I/H Frame and disconnect the connector of the Release Sensor (I/H Lever).
(See Figure 4-66)
12. Remove the I/H Frame while paying attention to the connectors of the Cover Sensor
and Release Sensor (I/H Lever).
Figure 4-65. I/H Frame Removal 2/2
Figure 4-66. Release Sensor (I/H Lever) Removal
Before installing the I/H Frame, make certain that the gear of
the I/H Lever is engaged with the gear of the Cartridge Lock
Shaft and also that the Cover Sensor turns ON and OFF.
When installing the I/H Frame, make sure that the projections
on the I/H ASSY are fitted in the seven holes in the top plate
properly.
If the I/H ASSY is not installed properly, the ink cartridges
may not be recognized.
Check Release Sensor ON/OFF
Check gear engagement
Screws (CUPS: M3×6) ×7
Screws (CUPS: M4×6) ×2
Screw (CUPS: M4×6) Screw (CUPS: M3×6) ×7
Connector of Release ASSY
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Ink Supply Mechanism 195
13. Disengage the two hooks on the back of the relevant Ink Holder ASSY and draw out
the CSIC Relay Board.
(See Figure 4-67)
5. Remove the screw in the joint connecting the Ink Holder ASSY and the pipe (M6),
then remove the O-ring from its inside.
6. Take out the two screws (CPS: M3
×
12) holding the Ink Holder ASSY to the I/H Base,
then remove the Ink Holder ASSY.
(See Figure 4-68)
Figure 4-67. CSIC Relay Board Removal
Figure 4-68. Ink Holder ASSY Removal
If you push in the CSIC Relay Board as a whole unit, the CSIC
Contact Spring will be deformed. Be sure to install the CSIC Relay
Board by the following procedure:
1. Disassemble the Holder ASSY to the units as shown below.
2. Remove the CSIC Contact Spring. (2 hooks)
3. Install the CSIC Relay Board.
4. Hold and inset the CSIC Contact Spring with care not to
deform it with the edge of the Relay Board.
When installing the ink tube to the Ink Holder ASSY, first make
certain that there is the O-ring. Then insert the ink tube into the
innermost position properly and tighten the coupling screw.
CSIC Contact Spring
CSIC Relay Board
Hook
Coupling
Screws (CPS: M3×12) ×2
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Ink Supply Mechanism 196
7. Take out the two screws (CUPS: M3
×
6) holding the Needle Frame ASSY.
(See Figure 4-69)
8. While disengaging the hook of the Needle Frame ASSY, slide the Ink Holder ASSY
downward to separate the Needle Frame ASSY from the Ink Holder ASSY.
(See Figure 4-70)
Figure 4-69. Disassembling the Ink Holder ASSY 1/2
Figure 4-70. Disassembling the Ink Holder ASSY 2/2
Screw (M3×6)
Screw (M3×6)
Needle Frame ASSY
Needle Frame ASSY
Hook
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Ink Supply Mechanism 197
4.5.3 Cover Sensor ASSY
1.
Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163)
2.
Remove the I/H Cover. (p.164)
3. Open the Front Cover.
4. Remove two screws (CPP: M3
×
8) securing the Ink Tube Cover and remove the cover.
(See Figure 4-63)
5. Disconnect the harness connector of the Cover Sensor ASSY.
6. Pinch the right and left hooks of the Cover Sensor ASSY and remove the Cover Sensor
ASSY.
Figure 4-71. Removing the Cover Sensor ASSY
A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U I R E D
Make sure that the Cover Switch Holder is so positioned that the
Cover Sensor ASSY operates coupled with the opening/closing of
the Front Cover.
Refer to “5.1.4.9 Cover Sensor ASSY Adjustment” (p.216)
Cover Sensor ASSY
Connector
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Cleaning Mechanism 198
4.6 Disassembly and Assembly of Cleaning
Mechanism
The Maintenance ASSY consists of the major assemblies listed below four of which
constitute the Cleaning Unit.
The life of the Cleaning Unit is judged by the life of the Pump Motor. Replace the Cap
ASSY, Pump ASSY, Flushing Box and Wiper at the same time.
Parts of the Cleaning Unit are available as individual parts so that each of those parts
can be replaced singly.
NOTE: For details, refer to “Table 6-1 Stylus Pro 7600/9600 - Lives of
Periodically Replaced Components and Maintenance (p.277)”.
Table 4-4. Major Parts of Cleaning Mechanism
Names of Parts See
Pump Motor ASSY p.200
Cleaning Unit
* Replace at expiration of Pump Motor
ASSY life
Pump/Cap ASSY Cap ASSY p.200
Pump ASSY p.201
Cleaner Head p.203
Flushing Box ASSY p.204
A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U I R E D
Once you have replaced the Cleaning Unit, be sure to execute
CLEAR COUNTERS “Initialize cleaning unit (CLEANER) (p.71)”
and CLEAR COUNTERS “Initialize flashing box (FL BOX) (p.71)”
in Maintenance mode 2.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Cleaning Mechanism 199
4.6.1 Maintenance ASSY Removal
1.
Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160)
2.
Remove the Access Cover. (See
Removing the Access Cover on page 167)
3. Disconnect the connector (CN17) of the Pump Motor ASSY.
4. At the rear of the printer body, remove the four screws securing the Maintenance
ASSY, and remove the Maintenance ASSY from the printer body.
(See Figure 4-72)
Figure 4-72. Removing the Maintenance ASSY
Figure 4-73. Maintenance ASSY
CHECK
P O I N T
When you replace the Maintenance ASSY, ink can spill from the
ink tube connected to the pump assembly. Disconnect the ink tubes
carefully so that ink will not spill.
After installing the Maintenance ASSY, insert the waste ink tube
(thin) of the Pump Motor ASSY into the waste ink tube (thick) of
the Flushing Box ASSY to the depth using tweezers.
Waste ink tube (thin)
Pump ASSY
Flushing Box ASSY
Screw x4
Maintenance
ASSY
Valve ASSY
Cap ASSY (p.200)
Pump Motor ASSY
(p.200)
Pump ASSY
(p.201)
Waste ink tube
Cleaner Head (Wiper) (p.203)
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Cleaning Mechanism 200
4.6.2 Pump Motor ASSY
1. Remove the Maintenance ASSY.
(See p.199)
2. Remove the two (M3
×
8) screws securing the Pump Motor ASSY to the Maintenance
ASSY and remove the Pump Motor ASSY.
4.6.3 Cap ASSY
1. Remove the Maintenance ASSY.
(See p.199)
2. Disconnect the tube which connect the
Valve ASSY
to the Cap ASSY.
3. Remove the two screws securing the Cap ASSY and remove the Cap ASSY from the
Maintenance ASSY.
Figure 4-74. Removing the Pump Motor ASSY
Figure 4-75. Removing the Cap ASSY
C A U T I O N Check for the points below when removing/mounting the Cap
ASSY.
Push the cap part down to the valve part and check that the cap
part rebounds with spring force.
Check that the valve part is not dislocated.
Pump Motor ASSY
Screws (M3×8) ×2
Maintenance ASSY
Valve ASSY
Cap ASSY
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Cleaning Mechanism 201
4.6.4 Pump ASSY
1. Remove the Maintenance ASSY.
(See p.199)
2. Remove the one central screw (M3
×
4) of the Pump ASSY and remove the three parts
including the gear.
(See Figure 4-76)
3. Remove the two screws (M3
×
6) on the gear side.
4. Disconnect the tube from the Cap ASSY, remove the one screw (M 3
×
6) and remove
the Pump ASSY.
(See Figure 4-77)
Figure 4-76. Removing the Pump ASSY 1/2
Figure 4-77. Removing the Pump ASSY 2/2
A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U I R E D
Once you have replaced the Pump ASSY, execute “CLEAR
COUNTERS” (See p.71).
Gear (3 parts)
Screw (M3×4)
Screws (M3×6) ×2
Pump ASSY
Screw (M3×6)
Ink tube
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Cleaning Mechanism 202
When installing the Pump ASSY, make sure that the spring is
set in the spring catch.
When installing the pump reduction gear, make sure that the
gears are engaged properly.
Spring catch
Cleaner Head
The Cleaner Head must move when
the gear turns about 20 times.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Cleaning Mechanism 203
4.6.5 Cleaner Head (Wiper)
1. Remove the Maintenance ASSY.
(See p.199)
2. Using tweezers, disengage the dent of the Cleaner Head from the projection on the
Cleaner Head Holder and pull off the Cleaner Head.
Figure 4-78. Removing the Cleaner Head
C A U T I O N If you touch the Cleaner Head with a bare hand, the head
nozzle can be stopped up with ink repelled by fat from your
hand. For handling the Cleaner Head, be sure to use tweezers;
never touch the Cleaner Head with your bare hand.
Before use, clean the tweezers with cleaner.
Install the Cleaner Head in such an orientation that its felt is
positioned on the Pump ASSY side and the rubber in on the Cap
ASSY side.
Cleaner Head
Rubber side
Felt side
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Cleaning Mechanism 204
4.6.6 Flushing Box ASSY
1.
Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160)
2.
Remove the Paper Guide L2. (p.168)
3. From the printer body, pull off carefully the waste ink tube (thick) which connects the
Flushing Box ASSY to the Maintenance Tank.
4. Remove the one (CUPS: M3
×
6) screw securing the Flushing Box ASSY.
5. Take out the Flushing Box, while pulling off carefully the waste ink tube (thin) coming
from the Pump ASSY.
6. Remove the Flushing Box ASSY.
Figure 4-79. Removing the Flushing Box ASSY
After installing the Flushing Box ASSY, make certain by removing
the Paper Guide L2 that the waste ink tube (thick) is set securely on
the tube joint of the Maintenance Cartridge Holder.
CHECK
P O I N T
Take off the ink tube (thick/thin) carefully so that ink will not spill
from the ink tube.
Waste ink tube
Waste ink tube (thin)
Waste ink tube (thick)
Flushing Box ASSY
Screw (CUPS: M3×6)
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Circuit Boards 205
4.7 Disassembly and Assembly of Circuit Boards
This section describes the procedures for removing the Power Supply Board, Main
Board (C472MAIN) and AC Inlet.
4.7.1 Power Supply Board
1.
Remove the Rear Cover. (p.166)
2. Disconnect the following connectors from the Power Supply Board:
3. Remove the eight screws (CPS: M4
×
8) securing the Power Supply Board, and then
remove the Power Supply Board.
Figure 4-80. Power Supply Board Removal
C A U T I O N Unplug the AC power cable and wait at least five minutes before
removing the Power Supply Board to make sure there is no residual
power left in the board's capacitors.
Table 4-5. Connectors on Power Supply Board
Connector No. Pins Color Connection Notes
CN001 3 White AC inlet Lock type
CN301 12 White C472MAIN Lock type
Screws (CPS: M4×8) ×8
CN001
CN301
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Circuit Boards 206
4.7.2 AC Inlet
1.
Remove the Rear Cover. (p.166)
2. Disconnect CN001 from the Power Supply Board.
(See Figure 4-81)
3. Remove the one screw (M4
×
8) and toothed washer (M4) fastening the AC Inlet
Ground Cable.
4. Push the hooks (one top and two bottom hooks) and remove the AC Inlet from the
holder.
(See Figure 4-82)
Figure 4-81. Removing the AC Inlet Holder
Figure 4-82. Removing the AC Inlet
C A U T I O N Unplug the AC power cable and wait at least five minutes before
removing the Power supply Board to make sure there is no residual
power left in the board's capacitors.
Install the AC Inlet in such an orientation that the ground cable
side is positioned up.
Up: Ground cable
CN001
Screw (M4×8), toothed washer
Ground cable
AC Inlet Holder
AC Inlet Holder
AC Inlet
Hook ×1
Hooks ×2
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Circuit Boards 207
4.7.3 MAIN Board (C472 MAIN)
1.
Remove the Rear Cover. (p.166)
2. Disconnect all the harness connectors from the Main Board.
3. Remove the two screws (CP(W): M3
×
6) securing the both ends of the parallel interface
connector to the Main Board and seven other screws (CP(W): M3
×
6), and remove
Main Board.
Figure 4-83. C472MAIN Board Removal
Figure 4-84. Harness Clamp Locations
C A U T I O N When disconnecting or connecting the connector for an FFC cable
on the Main Board, never pull or push the connector aslant.
Disconnecting or connecting the connector can cause damage to,
short circuit or breakage of the terminals inside the connector, thus
resulting in damage to elements on the circuit board.
Refer to the table on the next page for connections of connectors.
The following connectors are not used:
CN4, CN7, CN12, CN18, CN25, CN28, CN33, CN36, CN37
A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U I R E D
Before and after replacing the Main Board with a new one, make
the following adjustment:
Refer to “5.1.4.2 Main Board Adjustment” (p.213)
Screws (CP(W): M3×6) × 9
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Circuit Boards 208
Main Board Connector List
Figure 4-85. Connector Locations
CN.No. Pins Color Connection Remarks
CN1 12 White P/S board Lock type
CN2 16 PANEL FFC, lock type
CN3 36 H-UDI36
CN4 5Yellow D/A_OUT (
Not used
)
CN5 90 ROM_DIMM
CN6 21 CSIC FFC
CN7 5 Red S_I/O(DEBUGER) (
Not used
)
CN8 24 CR_FFC1 FFC, lock type
CN9 24 CR_FFC3 FFC, lock type
CN10 24 CR_FFC2 FFC, lock type
CN11 36 IEEE1284 (parallel port)
CN12 4USB (
Not used
)
CN13 36 TYPE_B
CN14 3White CR_MOT Lock type, with relay connector
CN15 2 White PF_MOT Lock type, with relay connector
CN16 5White PF_ENC
CN17 4 White PUMP_MOT With relay connector
CN18 2Blue P/S_FAN
CN19 2 Black FAN1 With relay connector
CN20 2Yellow FAN2 With relay connector
CN21 2 Red FAN3 * Stylus Pro 9600 only
CN22 3Blue P_THICK0.3
CN23 3 Yellow COVER_L
CN24 3White CR_ORG
CN25 3 Black I/H_LEVER (
Not used
)
CN26 3Red P_THICK
CN27 4 Black P_REAR
CN28 4Yellow P_FRONT (
Not used
)
CN29 4 Red HD_SLID
CN30 15 ROLL_UNIT (option unit) * Stylus Pro 9600 only
CN31 2 White H_FAN
CN33 3White RESET
CN35 4 USB2.0 Right side (AC side)
CN36 8IEEE1394 (
Not used
)
CN37 2 HDD_PS (
Not used
)
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Circuit Boards 209
4.7.4 DIP Switch and Jumper Setting at Factory before
Shipment
DIP Switches (SWD600)
Jumpers (J5 / J6 / J7)
C A U T I O N Do not change the DIP Switches and Jumpers on the Main Board
from their positions which were set at the factory before shipment.
Changing their setting can result in malfunctions.
Table 4-6. DIP Switch Setting at Factory at Shipment
SW Setting at Factory Function Description
1 ON Frequency Dispersion
Setting
(CPU/SDRAM
characteristics)
SW1-2-3
ON-ON-ON : -0.5%
ON-OFF-ON : -1.0%
ON-ON-OFF : -2.5%
ON-OFF-OFF : -3.75%
2OFF
3ON
4OFF Clock Frequency Setting SW4-5 : CPU/SDRAM - USB
ON-ON : 133.3MHz - 48MHz
OFF-ON : 100MHz - 48MHz
ON-OFF : 66.6MHz - 48MHz
OFF-OFF: 50MHz - 48MHz
5OFF
6OFF Main board Revision
Setting (MAINREV0)
7 OFF Main board Revision
Setting (MAINREV1)
8OFF Main board Revision
Setting (MAINREV2)
Table 4-7. Jumper Setting at Factory at Shipment
Jumper Setting at Factory Function D Description
JP5 Open Boot select Open: Normal boot
Short: Flash ROM
JP6 Short DA1_Select Open: Debug mode
Short: Normal mode
JP7 Short DA0_Select Open: Debug mode
Short: Normal mode
CHAPTER
5
ADJUSTMENT
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Overview 211
5.1 Overview
This section describes the adjustment procedures necessary after replacing certain parts
and explains how to perform those adjustment procedures.
5.1.1 Cautions
Before beginning the adjustment operation, be sure to confirm the following caution
items.
5.1.2 Adjustment Tools
Table below lists the tools necessary for adjustments of Stylus Pro 7600/9600.
Note "*": Use at adjustments which require test printing.
C A U T I O N If you are carrying out adjustments, see “5.1.4 Adjustment
Items” (p.212) and then confirm the relevant adjustment items
and adjustment procedures.
When carrying out adjustments, check the cautions displayed
in the explanation for each adjustment item thoroughly. If the
operation is performed wrong, it could hinder the product's
operation or functions.
CHECK
P O I N T
In adjustments and test printing, use Doubleweight Matte Paper
roll, unless otherwise specified.
Table 5-1. Adjustment Tools
Name Part Code Notes
Tension Gauge
#F770
1060744 / standard tool
acceptable
2.2kgf ± 220g
(PF Belt tension)
Thickness gauge Commercially available Thickness:
0.3 / 0.4 / 0.8 / 0.9 mm
Coupling tightening jig Tightening force: 3kgf + 500g
24/44-inch Width Roll Paper Epson or commercially
available paper
(Doubleweight Matte
Paper roll)
•MCSP24R4
(24-inch width)
•MCSP44R4
(44-inch width)
For printer mechanism
adjustments and test printing.
A3Tracing Paper
#F751
1057723 Used for adjustment of the
paper status detection sensor
(P_REAR) level adjustment.
Microtrace #300 LMB, made
by Kimoto
A3 Copy Paper (PPC) Commercially available
product
(Example: Fuji Xerox
Bright Recycled)
Used for adjustment of the
paper status detection sensor
(P_EDGE) level adjustment.
Scale 1000mm
#F713
1047746 / A
commercially available
scale can be purchased.
Length:1000mm
Scale Stopper
#F714
1047745 / A
commercially available
scale can be purchased.
Used in combination with the
#F713 (measurements in 0.1
mm units)
CR ENC sensor positioning jig
#F799
1212926
Cutter Positioning Jig
#F800
1212928
PF ENC sensor positioning tool
#F798
1212925
Ink Cartridge (x7)* Spare
Draining cartridge* Use at black ink type change
Maintenance Tank* Spare
Table 5-1. Adjustment Tools (continued)
Name Part Code Notes
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Overview 212
5.1.3 Procedure for Adjustment Work
Follow the specified steps by consulting “5.2 Self-diagnostic Function” (p.220) and
“5.3 Mechanism Adjustment” (p.263) for adjustment items of each unit/part.
5.1.4 Adjustment Items
Table 5-2 below indicates the parts replacement repair items for Stylus Pro 7600/9600
which requires adjustments. For actually performed part replacements, and
disassembly and reassembly operations, the specified adjustment items should be
performed in the sequence shown in the instructions.
5.1.4.1 Print Head Adjustment
Described below are the adjustment items to be made once the Print Head (p.171) has
been replaced.
Adjustment items (steps):
Table 5-2. Adjustment Items
Repair Item (Page for Disassembly and Assembly) See for Adjustment
Print Head (p.171) p. 212
MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207) p.213
CR Motor ASSY (p.180) p.214
PF Motor (p.185) p.214
Sensor P_EGDE Sensor ASSY (p.179) p.215
P_REAR Sensor ASSY (p.191) p.215
P_THICK Sensor/P_THICK Sensor_0.3 ASSY (p.190) p.215
CR Encoder Sensor ASSY (p.178) p.215
Cover Sensor ASSY (p.197) p.216
PF Encoder Sensor ASSY (p.186) p.216
Cutter Solenoid (p.177) p.217
Paper Guide L2 (p.168)
Damper ASSY (p.173) p.217
Release Sensor (I/H Lever) (p.193) p.217
Each Repair Item in
“5.1.4 Adjustment Items”
“5.2 Self-diagnostic Function”
“5.3 Mechanism Adjustment”
“5.1.5 Parameter Backup”, “5.3.9 USB ID
Writing”, “1.4.5 Maintenance Mode 2”, etc.
CHECK
P O I N T
When replacing the print head with a new one, execute ink
discharge (“Ink Blowing” on page 256) beforehand.
Table 5-3. Required Adjustment Items (Print Head)
Step Adjustment Item See
1Clear the counter (Maintenance Mode2)
(Power OFF →[Paper Source]+[Eject]+[Paper Feed]
→ Power ON) “HEAD”
p.70
<Start the Self-diagnostic Function>
(Power OFF →
[Paper Feed
∆
]
+
[Paper Feed
∇
]+[Cut/Eject]
→ Power ON)
p.220
2 Head Rank Input (including initial filling) p.233
3Head Nozzle Checking (Cleaning) p.237
4 Head Slant Checking p.246
5Round Trip Print Position Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment) p.248
6Round Trip Print Position (Bi-D Adjustment) Checking p.252
7Head Gap Adjustment (Uni-D Adjustment) p.253
8 Test Pattern Printing p.255
9Leak check pattern printing p.259
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Overview 213
5.1.4.2 Main Board Adjustment
Described below are the adjustment items to be made once the MAIN Board (C472
MAIN) (p.207) has been replaced.
Adjusting tools:
A3Tracing Paper #F751(Microtrace #300 LMB)
A3 Copy Paper (PPC)
Scale 1000mm #F713
Scale Stopper #F714
Work operations before adjustment:
Parameter Backup (p.218)
Firmware Reinstallation (p.219)
Adjustment items (steps): Note "*1": Adjustment procedure when parameter backup has been executed
"*2": Adjustment procedure when parameter backup can not be executed
Work operations after adjustment:
Replacing the maintenance tank and resetting the maintenance tank life
counter
1. Replace the maintenance tank with a new one.
2. Start Maintenance Mode 2.
(Power OFF →[Paper Source]+[Eject]+[Paper Feed] → Power ON)
3. Clear the counter.
(“CLEAR COUNTERS”→“MAINTE. TANK”)
NOTE:
For details, refer to
“1.4.5 Maintenance Mode 2” (p.70)
.
CHECK
P O I N T
When “Parameter Backup” has been executed, make the
adjustment by Procedure A in Table 5-4 below; there is no need of
following Procedure B.
Table 5-4. Required Adjustment Items (Main Circuit)
Procedure
A*1
Procedure
B*2Adjustment Item See
<Start the Self-diagnostic Function>
(Power OFF →
[Paper Feed
∆
]
+
[Paper Feed
∇
]
+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON)
p.220
1 1 Rear Sensor AD Adjustment p.231
2 2 Edge Sensor AD Adjustment p.232
3Initial Charge Flag Clear p.257
4 Head Rank ID Checking –
5Head Rank Input p.233
6 Head Nozzle Checking (Cleaning) p.237
7Head Slant Checking p.246
8 Feed Correction + T&B Adjustment p.239
9Rear Sensor Position Adjustment p.243
10 Platen Position Adjustment (Flash Point Adjustment) p.244
11 Round Trip Print Position Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment) p.248
12 Round Trip Print Position (Bi-D Adjustment) Checking p.252
13 Head Gap Adjustment (Uni-D Adjustment) p.253
14 USB ID Input p.273
315 RTC writing initialization p.71
16 Power Cleaning p.259
17 Head Nozzle Checking (Cleaning) p.237
18 Test Pattern Printing p.255
Table 5-4. Required Adjustment Items (Main Circuit) (continued)
Procedure
A*1
Procedure
B*2Adjustment Item See
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Overview 214
5.1.4.3 CR Motor Adjustment
Described below are the adjustment items to be made once the CR Motor ASSY (p.180)
has been replaced.
Adjusting tools:
No special tools are required.
Adjustment items (steps):
5.1.4.4 PF Motor Adjustment
Described below are the adjustment items to be made once the PF Motor (p.185) has
been replaced.
Adjusting tools:
Tension gauge (for 4,000g)
PF ENC sensor positioning tool #F798
Scale 1000mm #F713
Scale Stopper #F714
Adjustment items (steps):
Table 5-5. Required Adjustment Items (CR Motor Replacement)
Step Adjustment Item See
1Clear the counter (Maintenance Mode2)
(Power OFF →[Paper Source]+[Eject]+[Paper Feed]
→ Power ON) “CR MOTOR”
p.70
<Mechanism Adjustment>
2 CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment p.263
<Start the Self-diagnostic Function>
(Power OFF →
[Paper Feed
∆
]
+
[Paper Feed
∇
]+[Cut/Eject]
→ Power ON)
p.220
3 Round Trip Print Position Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment) p.248
4Round Trip Print Position (Bi-D Adjustment) Checking p.252
5 Head Gap Adjustment (Uni-D Adjustment) p.253
6Test Pattern Printing p.255
Table 5-6. Required Adjustment Items (PF Motor Replacement)
Step Adjustment Item See
<Mechanism Adjustment>
1PF Timing Belt Tension Adjustment p.264
2 PF ENC Installation Position Adjustment p.272
<Start the Self-diagnostic Function>
(Power OFF →
[Paper Feed
∆
]
+
[Paper Feed
∇
]+[Cut/Eject]
→ Power ON)
p.220
3 Feed Correction + T&B Adjustment p.239
4Test Pattern Printing p.255
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Overview 215
5.1.4.5 P_EDGE Sensor ASSY Adjustment
Described below are the adjustment items to be made once the P_EGDE Sensor ASSY
(p.179) has been replaced.
Adjusting tools:
A3Tracing Paper #F751(Microtrace #300 LMB)
A3 copying paper (PPC)
Scale 1000mm #F713
Scale Stopper #F714
Adjustment items (steps):
5.1.4.6 P_REAR Sensor ASSY Adjustment
Described below are the adjustment items to be made once the P_REAR Sensor ASSY
(p.191) has been replaced.
Adjusting tools:
A3Tracing Paper #F751(Microtrace #300 LMB)
Adjustment items (steps):
5.1.4.7 P_THICK/P_THICK_0.3 Sensor ASSY Adjustment
Described below are the adjustment items to be made once the P_THICK Sensor/
P_THICK Sensor_0.3 ASSY (p.190) has been replaced.
Adjusting tools:
Thickness gauge (0.3/ 0.4, 0.8/ 0.9mm)
Adjustment items (steps):
5.1.4.8 CR Encoder Sensor ASSY Adjustment
Described below are the adjustment items to be made once the CR Encoder Sensor
ASSY (p.178) has been replaced.
Adjusting tools:
CR ENC sensor positioning jig #F799
Adjustment items (steps):
Table 5-7. Required Adjustment Items
Step Adjustment Item See
<Start the Self-diagnostic Function>
(Power OFF →
[Paper Feed
∆
]
+
[Paper Feed
∇
]+[Cut/Eject]
→ Power ON)
p.220
1P_Edge Sensor AD Adjustment p.232
2 Feed Correction + T&B Adjustment p.239
Table 5-8. Required Adjustment Items
Step Adjustment Item See
<Start the Self-diagnostic Function>
(Power OFF →
[Paper Feed
∆
]
+
[Paper Feed
∇
]+[Cut/Eject]
→ Power ON)
p.220
1P_Rear Sensor AD Adjustment p.231
2 Rear Sensor Position Adjustment p.243
Table 5-9. Required Adjustment Items
Step Adjustment Item See
<Start the Self-diagnostic Function>
(Power OFF →
[Paper Feed
∆
]
+
[Paper Feed
∇
]+[Cut/Eject]
→ Power ON)
p.220
1Testing will be executed by “Sensor” (Test menu) → “Paper” p.224
Table 5-10. Required Adjustment Items
Step Adjustment Item See
<Mechanism Adjustment>
1CR Encoder Sensor Mounting Position Adjustment p.268
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Overview 216
5.1.4.9 Cover Sensor ASSY Adjustment
Described below are the adjustment items to be made once the Cover Sensor ASSY
(p.197) has been replaced.
Adjustment items (steps):
Note "*": The gap is acceptable, if it does not permit entrance of your finger when the
Front Cover is opened and “COVER OPEN” is displayed.
5.1.4.10 PF Encoder Sensor ASSY Adjustment
Described below are the adjustment items to be made once the PF Encoder Sensor
ASSY (p.186) has been replaced.
Adjusting tools:
PF ENC sensor positioning tool #F764
Cutter Positioning Jig #F800
Scale 1000mm #F713
Scale Stopper #F714
Adjustment items (steps):
Table 5-11. Required Adjustment Items
Step Adjustment Item See
<Mechanism Adjustment>
1Sensor position adjustment *p.267
<Start the Self-diagnostic Function>
(Power OFF →
[Paper Feed
∆
]
+
[Paper Feed
∇
]+[Cut/Eject]
→ Power ON)
p.220
2Testing will be executed by "Sensor" (Test menu) → “Cover” p.224
Table 5-12. Required Adjustment Items
Step Adjustment Item See
<Mechanism Adjustment>
1PF ENC Installation Position Adjustment p.272
<Start the Self-diagnostic Function>
(Power OFF →
[Paper Feed
∆
]
+
[Paper Feed
∇
]+[Cut/Eject]
→ Power ON)
p.220
2Feed Correction + T&B Adjustment p.239
3 Rear Sensor Position Adjustment p.243
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Overview 217
5.1.4.11 Cutter Solenoid ASSY or Paper Guide L Adjustment
Described below are the adjustment items to be made once the Cutter Solenoid (p.177)
has been replaced or the Paper Guide L has been reinstalled.
Adjusting tools:
Cutter Positioning Jig #F800
Scale 1000mm #F713
Scale Stopper #F714
Adjustment items (steps):
5.1.4.12 Damper ASSY Adjustment
Described below are the adjustment items to be made once the Damper ASSY (p.173)
has been replaced.
Adjustment items (steps):
5.1.4.13 Release Sensor (I/H Lever) Adjustment
No adjustment is required
5.1.4.14 Battery
No adjustment is required. Execute “Initialize RTC (p.83)”.
Table 5-13. Required Adjustment Items
Step Adjustment Item See
<Mechanism Adjustment>
1Cutter Positioning Adjustment p.269
2 Checking for Proper Cutting and Cutter Position p.271
<Start the Self-diagnostic Function>
(Power OFF →
[Paper Feed
∆
]
+
[Paper Feed
∇
]+[Cut/Eject]
→ Power ON)
p.220
3 Checking for Proper Cutting Pressure
4Feed Correction + T&B Adjustment p.239
CHECK
P O I N T
Execute ink discharge (“Ink Blowing”) before removing the
Damper ASSY.
Refer to “5.2.3.20 Clean Head (p.256)”.
Secure the coupling screw and the ink tube by tightening at the
specified torque. (2 ∼ 2.5 kg/f)
Table 5-14. Required Adjustment Items (Damper ASSY)
Step Adjustment Item See
<Start the Self-diagnostic Function>
(Power OFF →
[Paper Feed
∆
]
+
[Paper Feed
∇
]+[Cut/Eject]
→ Power ON)
p.220
1Including initial filling p.259
2 Head Nozzle Checking (Cleaning) p.237
3Leak check pattern printing p.259
4 Test Pattern Printing p.255
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Overview 218
5.1.5 Parameter Backup
5.1.5.1 Parameter Backup Procedure
Required tools:
Flash ROM-DIMM:
C309PROG Board (Part code: 2076654-01)
Parameter backup utility: PBU16.RCC
PC and parallel cable
EPSON page printer: AcuLaser C8600
5.1.5.2 Work Procedure
PREPARATION
1. Prepare the EPSON page printer as specified above. (
AcuLaser C8600
)
2. Install the flash ROM-DIMM in the optional ROM-DIMM slot (slot “A”) on the Main
Board of the page printer.
3. Connect the parallel cable from the PC to the parallel port of the page printer.
4. Turn on the power to the page printer while holding down the following buttons on the
control panel of the page printer:
[Job Cancel] + [Up] + [Down]
5. When the LCD on the control panel of the page printer changes as “ROM A Erasing”
→
“ROM A Format error”, send the parameter backup utility file (PBU16.RCC) from
the PC.
6. Transfer of the utility file is completed when the LCD on the control panel of the page
printer changes as “ROM A Writing”
→
“ROM A Format error”. Then the ROM-
DIMM can be used for parameter backup work.
EXECUTION OF PARAMETER BACKUP
1. Remove the Access Cover at the rear of Stylus Pro 7600/9600 and set the prepared
ROM-DIMM in the ROM-DIMM slot on the Main Board.
2. Turn on the power to the Stylus Pro 7600/9600, and the LCD on the control panel will
display “Write:F->M Push:M->F”.
3. Upon passage of 5 seconds without pressing any button on the control panel, parameter
backup will automatically be executed. (The contents of NVRAM (“F”) on the Main
Board will be copied onto ROM-DIMM (“M”).)
4. Backup is completed when the LCD on the control panel changes as “Flash->ROM-
DIMM”
→
“End [Success]”.
5. Turn off the power to Stylus Pro 7600/9600 and take the ROM-DIMM out of the slot
on the Main Board.
5.1.5.3 Others
If you would like to prepare two or more ROM-DIMMs of the same contents as those
of the ROM-DIMM prepared at “PREPARATION” above, follow the following
procedure for efficient work:
1. Prepare the EPSON page printer AcuLaser C8600.
2. Install the flash ROM-DIMMs in the optional ROM-DIMM slots on the Main Board of
the page printer as follows:
Slot “A” = Blank flash ROM-DIMM (for writing)
Slot “B” = Master ROM-DIMM (the one on which the parameter backup file was
written at “PREPARATION”)
3. Turn on the power to the page printer while holding down the following buttons on the
control panel of the page printer:
[Start/Stop] + [Job Cancel] + [Enter]
4. When the LCD on the control panel has displayed “ROM Copy Mode”, press the
[Enter] button on the panel.
5. Copy processing is executed and completed when the display has changed as “ROM A
Erasing”
→
“ROM B>A Copying”
→
“ROM B>A Copying End”.
6. Turn off the power to the page printer and take the ROM-DIMMs out of the slots.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Overview 219
5.1.6 Firmware Reinstallation
In Stylus Pro 7600/9600, the firmware is written in the Flash ROM on the Main Board.
When the Main Board has been replaced with a new one, write the firmware in the
Flash ROM on the new Main Board by the procedure described below.
5.1.6.1 Firmware Installation through ROM-DIMM
Install the firmware through a ROM-DIMM by the following procedure:
1. Check the firmware version.
([SelecType] key
→
“PRINTER STATUS MENU”
→
“VIRSION”)
2. Write the firmware file in the RCC format in a ROM-DIMM (C309 PROG).
3. Turn off the power switch and disconnect the power cable from the printer body.
4. Remove the cover at the rear of the printer body and insert the ROM-DIMM prepared
at step 1 into the dedicated socket.
5. Turn on the power to the printer body.
6. The firmware will be installed automatically and installation will be completed.
7. Turn off the power switch and disconnect the power cable from the printer body.
8. Pull the ROM-DIMM out of the dedicated socket.
9. Turn on the power to the printer body and check the firmware version.
5.1.6.2 Firmware Installation through Interface
This section describes the procedure for firmware installation through the parallel
interface, as an example.
1. Connect the host PC to the printer with the parallel cable.
2. Turn on the power to the printer body.
3. Check the firmware version.
([SelecType] key
→
“PRINTER STATUS MENU”
→
“VIRSION”)
4. Make certain that the panel display of the printer body shows “READY”.
5. Transmit the firmware file in the IPL format from the host PC to the printer.
6. Firmware installation is completed.
7. Turn off the power to the printer once and then turn it on again.
C A U T I O N Immediately after reloading firmware to the new MAIN board
without any parameters existing on it, when the printer's power
is turned on, the ink initial refilling operation starts. If initial
refilling is not necessary, be sure to start the printer by the
following procedure.
1. Start the Self-diagnostic function when the power is turned On.
2. Select “Parameter: Update” under “Check: Parameter”.
3. Select “Update:I nkParameter”.
4. Select “Reset” in “Init. Fill”.
5. Turn the printer’s power switch Off, then turn it On again.
The correct firmware data file should be used to match the
download method.
CHECK
P O I N T
Set the parallel interface in the compatibility mode.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 220
5.2 Self-diagnostic Function
5.2.1 Overview
Self-diagnosis is chiefly intended to determine the parameters for mechanism
adjustment and firm adjustment.
This function is incorporated in the printer firmware. It is enabled when the power to
the printer is turned on while pressing the specific panel keys.
NOTE: The printer can not be shifted from the normal mode to the self-
diagnostic mode.
5.2.1.1 How to Start Self-diagnostic Function
The key operation to start the self-diagnostic function is as follows:
1. Power is off.
2. Press
“
Paper Feed
∆
” + “
Paper Feed
∇
” +
“Cut / Eject”.
3. Turn the power on.
4. The self-diagnostic menu is displayed.
5. Turn the power off to close the self-diagnostic function.
5.2.1.2 Functions of Keys during Self-diagnosis
Described below are the functions of panel keys in the self-diagnostic mode:
Figure 5-1. Panel Function in Self-diagnostic Mode
C A U T I O N With this function, all the processing except for some items are
executed on the assumption that roll paper is used. Take care,
since even sheets, if loaded, are handled as roll paper.
During execution of this function, detection of remaining
volume in ink cartridges and Maintenance Tank is not
performed. Therefore, when you execute this function for print
head replacement or any other work which requires
consumption or discharge of a large volume of ink, check the
remaining volume in ink cartridges and Maintenance Tank
beforehand. (If you neglect this checking, the capacity of the
Maintenance Tank can be exceeded so that ink may flow out;
never forget to perform this checking.)
Table 5-15. Key Functions in Self-diagnostic Mode
Normal Mode Self-diagnostic
Mode Functions
Pause Previous Level Returns the setting item to the previous level of
the menu hierarchy.
SelecType Setting Item (Next) Lowers the level in the menu hierarchy by one.
Paper Source
(Items)
Setting Item
(Previous)
Enhances the level in the menu hierarchy by one.
Paper Feed
∆
Setting Value + Changes the menu in the upward direction.
Setting value +
Paper Feed
∇
Setting Value – Changes the menu in the downward direction.
Setting value –
Cut / Eject (Enter) Enter Sets the setting value.
Cleaning Paper Feed & Cut If it is pressed, the paper is fed, and when it is
released, the paper is cut.
Moves the cursor. (only for specific items)
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 221
5.2.1.3 Top Menu
The following diagnostic items are available in the self-diagnostic mode. This section
describes the diagnostic items available and transition in the top menu.
Note "*": This diagnostic item is not explained, since it is used only by testing at the
factory, not executed on the service site.
Figure 5-2. Top Menu Transition
Table 5-16. Self-diagnostic Function List
Item Description
Test Version, Control Panel, Sensor, Encoder, Fan, Record, CSIC, Actuator,
Actuator 2
Adjustment Head system adjustment, sensor position adjustment, paper feed
compensation, cutter adjustment
Cleaning Cleaning with mode specified
Print Test pattern printing, adjustment variables printing
Parameter* NVRAM initialization, updating, display
Life * Carriage motor, paper feed motor, CR+PF motor, cutter, head up and down,
head lock, cleaning, printing, comprehensive endurance, CR+PF+
discharging, comprehensive endurance 2, comprehensive endurance 3,
checking
Check:
Test?
[Paper Feed
∇
]
Check:
Adjustment?
Check:
Cleaning?
Check:
Print?
Check:
Parameter?
[Paper Feed
∆
]
Check:
Life?
[SelecType]
[Paper Feed
∆
]
[Paper Feed
∆
]
[Paper Feed
∆
]
[Paper Feed
∆
]
[Paper Feed
∆
]
[Paper Feed
∇
]
[Paper Feed
∇
]
[Paper Feed
∇
]
[Paper Feed
∇
]
[Paper Feed
∇
]
[Pause]
[Items]
To each menu
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 222
5.2.2 Test
“Test” is intended to check the circuit boards.
Note "*": This diagnostic item is not explained, since it is used only by testing at the
factory, not executed on the service site.
Figure 5-3. Inspection Menu Transition
Table 5-17. Circuit Board Check Items
Item Description See
Version Program, Backup parameters, DIP switch, Panel review p.223
Control Panel Keys, LCD, LEDs p.223
Sensors CR origin, Covers, Paper thickness, Levers, Cartridge
presence, Ink lever, Edge AD, Rear AD,
Head thermistor, Driver thermistor, Take-up Reel Unit,
Maintenance tank
p.224
Encoder CR_ENC (carriage), PF_ENC (paper feed) p.225
Fan Paper suction fan (all operation), Paper suction fan
(individual operations), Head driver heat sink cooling
fan
p.225
Record Maintenance, Major faults p.226
CSIC CSIC information display p.227
Actuator Cutter p.229
Actuator 2 Cutter solenoid, Pump motor p. 229
Test:
Version?
[Paper Feed
∇
]
Test:
Panel?
Test:
Sensor?
Test:
Encoder?
Test:
Fan?
[Paper Feed
∆
]
Test:
Elec.?
[SelecType]
[Paper Feed
∆
]
[Paper Feed
∆
]
[Paper Feed
∆
]
[Paper Feed
∆
]
[Paper Feed
∆
]
[Paper Feed
∇
]
[Paper Feed
∇
]
[Paper Feed
∇
]
[Paper Feed
∇
]
[Pause]
[Items]
To each menu
Test:
D/A Revision?
Test:
Head Signal?
Test:
CSIC?
[Paper Feed
∆
]
[Paper Feed
∆
]
[Paper Feed
∆
]
[Paper Feed
∇
]
[Paper Feed
∇
]
[Paper Feed
∇
]
Test:
Actuator?
Test:
Actuator 2?
[Paper Feed
∆
]
[Paper Feed
∆
]
[Paper Feed
∇
]
[Paper Feed
∇
]
[Paper Feed
∇
]
* Not used
* Not used
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 223
5.2.2.1 Version
Check the firmware version and the DIP switch (ON: 0, OFF: 1).
When this item is selected, the contents is shown on the panel one by one.
(See Figure 5-4)
Firmware version display is as follows:
BWddym
BNddym
Description
•BW: Stylus Pro 9600
•BN: Stylus Pro 7600
•dd: 2-digit decimal number representing the day of release
•y: Decimal number representing the units digit of the year of release
•m: 1-digit hexadecimal number representing the month of release
Example
The firmware version released on July 5, 2000 is:
•BW0507 (Stylus Pro 9600)
•BN0507 (Stylus Pro 7600)
5.2.2.2 Control Panel
Check the keys, LCD and LEDs on the control panel. (See Figure 5-5)
In the panel key check, the panel displays the name of a pushed key.
Press the Pause key two times to complete the panel key check.
In the LED check, the Operate, Pause, Ink Out K, LK, C, M, LC, LM, Y,
Paper Out, Auto Cut, Cutter OFF, Sheet, and Maintenance Tank LEDs are
lighted up in the order named.
At the same time, the LCD shows the name of the LED which is currently lit.
Figure 5-4. Menu Transition of Version Display
Figure 5-5. Menu Transition of Panel Test
Ver:
? F/W ∗∗∗∗∗∗
Ver:
? Param 1 01
Ver:
? Param 2 01
Ver:
? DipSW 0x00
Ver:
? Panel Rev 01
Panel:
? Key ?
Panel:
? LCD ?
[SelecType]
[Pause] x2
Panel:
? LED ?
[SelecType]
[Pause]
[SelecType]
[Pause]
[Items]
Panel:
? Key ????


Panel:
? LED Power
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 224
5.2.2.3 Sensors
Sensor status is displayed on the panel.
The numerals shown at the item “Paper” means that the paper thickness is as
follows:
00 : 0.3 mm or below in paper thickness
01 : 0.4 mm ~ 0.8 mm in paper thickness
11 : 0.9 mm or more in paper thickness
10 : The lever is in the up position.
NOTE: When adjustment is required, see “5.2.3.1 Rear AD Adjustment (p.231)”.
“INK NOT” indicates the absence of color ink cartridges.
Each symbol displayed signifies that the corresponding color ink cartridge is
absent.
For Edge AD and Rear AD, the value shown around the center represents the ON-
OFF difference and the value shown at right represents the ON level.
The standard for accepting each AD value is as follows:
Rear AD: 40 or more in ON-OFF difference and 95 or less in ON level
Edge AD: 40 or more in ON-OFF difference and E0 ~ E8 in ON level
NOTE 1: For adjustment procedure, see “5.2.3.2 Edge AD Adjustment (p.232)”
and “5.2.3.1 Rear AD Adjustment (p.231)”.
2: With Stylus Pro 7600, the item “TAKE UP” is not displayed.
Figure 5-6. Menu Transition of Sensor Test
Sen:
? CR Origin On
Sen:
? Cover Close
Sen:
? Paper 00
Sen:
? Lever Down
Sen:
? HeadSlide On
Sen:
?
INK NOT
KkCMcmY
Sen:
? InkLever Down
Sen:
? Edge AD 04A 0E2
Sen:
? Front AD 041 068
Sen:
? Rear AD 041 068
Sen:
? Head Temp 25°C
Sen:
? Drv. Temp 25°C
Sen:
? TAKE UP Off
Sen:
? MainteTank On
* Not used
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 225
5.2.2.4 Encoder
The encoder values for CR shaft (carriage) and PF (form feed) are displayed on the
panel. (See Figure 5-7)
The value displayed represents the encoder pulse count.
5.2.2.5 Fan
Check to see if each fan operates. (See Figure 5-8)
NOTE: With Stylus Pro 7600, the item “Paper 3" (paper suction fan) is not
displayed.
Figure 5-7. Menu Transition of Encoder Test
Figure 5-8. Menu Transition of Fan Test
Encoder:
? CR 0000
Encoder:
? PF FFFF
Fan:
? Paper 123
Fan:
? Paper 1
[Enter]
[Pause]
Fan:
? Head Drv.
[Enter]
[Pause]
[Enter]
[Pause]
Fan:
[Pause] End
Fan:
[Pause] End
Fan:
[Pause] End
Fan:
? Paper 2
[Enter]
[Pause]
Fan:
[Pause] End
Fan:
? Paper 123
[Enter]
[Pause]
Fan:
[Pause] End
* 3:Stylus Pro 9600 only
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 226
5.2.2.6 Record
Check the record of maintenance of major faults.
The figure at right shows the menu of record. (See Figure 5-9)
MAINTENANCE RECORD
“Record: Maintenance” displays the record of maintenance. (See Figure 5-10)
Note "*": Not used
Figure 5-9. Menu Transition of Record
Figure 5-10. Menu Transition of Maintenance Record
Table 5-18.
Display Item
WasteInk Waste ink
Wiper Wiping count
Rubing* Rubbing count
Lever Lever up count
Cover Cover opening count
Ink Lever Ink lever up count
CR Motor CR motor round trip count
PF Motor PF motor travel
Ink Tube* Ink tube round trip count
Print Number The number of printed sheets
Clening Cleaning count
Fire B K ink discharge count (in mega dots)
Fire LK LK ink discharge count (in mega dots)
Fire C C ink discharge count (in mega dots)
Fire M M ink discharge count (in mega dots)
Fire LC LC ink discharge count (in mega dots)
Fire LM LM ink discharge count (in mega dots)
Fire Y Y ink discharge count (in mega dots)
Cut Cutting count
Cut Sole. Cutter solenoid operation count
LockSolen* Head lock solenoid operation count
Record:
? Maintenance?
Record:
? Error ?
WasteInk:
? 0000000
Wiper:
? 00000000
Rubing:
? 00000000
Lever:
? 00000000
Cover:
? 00000000
Ink Lever:
? 00000000
CR Motor:
? 00000000
PF Motor:
? 00000000
Ink Tube:
? 0000000
Print Number:
? 00000000
Clening:
? 00000000
Fire B:
? 00000000Mdot
Fire LK:
? 00000000Mdot
Fire C:
? 00000000Mdot
Fire M:
? 00000000Mdot
Fire LC:
? 00000000Mdot
Fire LM:
? 00000000Mdot
Fire Y:
? 00000000Mdot
Cut:
? 00000000
Cut Sole.:
? 0000000
LockSolen:
? 00000000
* Not used
* Not used
* Not used
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 227
RECORD OF ERRORS
The record of major errors (service call errors) can be checked. A maximum of 7 errors
are displayed. (See Figure 5-11)
NOTE: CPU errors are not included.
5.2.2.7 CSIC
Information on each CSIC is displayed. (See Figure 5-12)
Menu transition for cartridge selection is shown at right.
Figure 5-11. Menu Transition of Record of Errors
Figure 5-12. Menu Transition for Cartridge Selection
Error 0 :
? 00020000
Error 1 :
? 00010000
Error 2 :
? 0001000C
Error 3 :
? No Error
Error 4 :
? No Error
Error 5 :
? No Error
Error 6 :
? No Error
CSIC :
? K Cart. ?
CSIC :
? LK
Cart. ?
CSIC :
? C
Cart. ?
CSIC :
? M
Cart. ?
CSIC :
? LC
Cart. ?
CSIC :
? LM
Cart. ?
CSIC :
? Y
Cart. ?
CSIC :
? MainteTank ?
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 228
INTERNAL INFORMATION DISPLAY OF CSIC
Internal information on CSIC is displayed.
Figure 5-13 shows menu transition for internal information display of CSIC.
NOTE: The indications on the LCD mean as follows:
00-27: Memory addresses (00H ~ 27H) in EEPROM of CSIC
K: Ink cartridge of which information is available
Figure 5-13. Menu Transition for Internal Information Display of CSIC
K00 :
? 27
K01 :
? 10
K02 : *
? G
K03 : *
? E
K04 : *
? N
K05 : *
? –
K06 : *
? U
K07 : *
? I
K08 : *
? N
K09 : *
? E
K0A :
? 13
K0B :
? –
K0C :
? 00
K0D :
? 08
K0E :
? 27
K0F :
? 09
K 10 :
? 58
K 11 :
? 7B
K 12 :
? B
K 13 :
? C
K 14 :
? 0
K 15 :
? 3
K 16 :
? 1
K 17 :
? F3
K 18 :
? 0
K 19 :
? 1
K1A :
? 6
K1B :
? 6
K1C :
? 24
K1D :
? 24
K1E :
? F0
K1F :
? 50
K20 : *
? E
K21 : *
? P
K22 : *
? S
K23 : *
? O
K24 : *
? N
K25 : *
? I
K26 : *
? N
K27 : *
? K
*Fixed information
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 229
5.2.2.8 Actuator
You can operate actuators. (See Figure 5-14)
CUTTER
The cutter is moved up and down by operating on the panel. (See Figure 5-15)
Neither pressing the [Paper Feed +] key with “UP” displayed nor pressing the
[Paper Feed -] key with “DOWN” displayed works.
Upon passage of 60 seconds with the cutter in the down position, it will
automatically move up.
5.2.2.9 Actuator 2
You can operate actuators. (See Figure 5-16)
When you try to return to the top menu of test after execution of any item of
Actuator 2, “Turn Power OFF” will be displayed.
Figure 5-14. Menu Transition of Actuator
Figure 5-15. Menu Transition of Cutter
Figure 5-16. Menu Transition of Actuator 2
Cutter :
? ?
[SelecType]
[Pause]
[Items]
[Enter] Start
Cutter :
? UP
Cutter :
? UP
Cutter :
? DOWN
Cutter Sole.
? ?
Pump Motor
? ?
[SelecType]
[Pause] [Items]
[Pause] End
[Enter]
[Enter] Start
[Paper Feed
∆
]
[Paper Feed
∇
]
[Paper Feed
∆
]
[Paper Feed
∇
]
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 230
5.2.3 Adjustment
Make the mechanism adjustment (head slant) and the firmware parameter adjustment.
Figure 5-17. Adjustment Menu Transition
Table 5-19. Panel Setting Item List
Item Description See
Rear AD Adjustment Make the AD adjustment of the rear sensor. p.231
Edge AD Adjustment Make the AD adjustment of the edge sensor. p.232
Front AD Adjustment (Not used) –
Head Rank Input Input the characteristic values for the installed head.
After that, supply ink. p.233
D/A Compensation Value
Write (Not used) p.236
Head Nozzle Check Check the print result for proper ink discharge from
the head nozzles. p.237
Paper Skew Check Perform paper feed, and check the degree of skew by
sensor. p.238
Feed Correction + T&B Make the printer perform printing and correct the
paper feed rate (band feed). p.239
Top & Bottom Adjust the paper top and bottom margins and the left
margin. p.242
Automatic Mechanism
Adjustment (Not used) –
Rear Paper Sensor Position Using cut paper, determine the distance between the
XF sensor and the XR sensor. p.243
Platen Position Adjustment Adjust the sponge position of the platen. p.244
Platen Position Checking Check the adjustment result of the sponge position of
the platen. p.245
Cutter Adjustment (Not used) –
Slant Check Make the printer perform printing and check the slant
of the head. (Mechanism Adjustment) p.246
Round Trip Print Position
Adjustment (Bi-D) Make the printer perform printing and adjust the
round trip printing position. (PG/1.2mm) p.248
Parameter Copying
(Bi-D) Copy the Bi-D adjustment value (PG/1.2mm) above
onto Bi-D2 (PG=0.7mm) and Bi-D3 (PG=2.1mm). p.251
Round Trip Print Position
Adjustment 2 (Bi-D2) Make the printer perform printing and adjust the
round trip printing position. PG/0.7mm p.251
Round Trip Print Position
Adjustment 3 (Bi-D3) Make the printer perform printing and adjust the
round trip printing position. PG/2.1mm p.251
Round Trip Print Position (Bi-
D Adjustment) Checking According to the result of the round trip print position
adjustment, shift the pattern by the theoretically
required number of dots. Then print the pattern and
make certain that the result of adjustment is proper.
p.252
Head Gap Adjustment
(Uni-D Adjustment) Make the printer perform printing and adjust the one-
way printing position. p.253
Test Pattern Printing Head nozzle checking and adjustment pattern (Input
the serial number) p.255
Clean Head Clean the tube and head using cleaning liquid. p. 256
Counter Clear Clear various software counters. p.257
Table 5-19. Panel Setting Item List (continued)
Item Description See
Adj :
? Rear AD ?
Adj :
? Edge AD ?
Adj :
? Frnt AD ?
Adj :
? Check Skew ?
Adj :
? Write D/A Value ?
Adj :
? Check Nozzle ?
Adj :
? Bi-d ?
Adj :
? CopyParam.
Adj :
? Bi-d2 ?
Adj :
? Bi-d3 ?
Adj :
? Bi-d Chk. ?
Adj :
? Head LR Adj.
Adj :
? Test Print ?
Adj :
? Clean Head ?
Adj :
? Counter Clear ?
[SelecType]
[Pause] or [Items] [Enter] Start
Press Enter after the last item
Adj :
? Input Rank ?
Adj :
? Feed Adj.+T&B ?
Adj :
? Top & Bottom ?
Adj :
? AT MechaAdj. ?
Adj :
? Rear Sensor Pos. ?
Adj :
? Platen Pos. ?
Adj :
? Platen Pos. Chk. ?
Adj :
? Cut Adj ?
Adj :
? Head Slant ?
*Not Used
*Not Used
*Not Used
*Not Used
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 231
5.2.3.1 Rear AD Adjustment
The optimum value for resistance of the Rear Sensor is automatically detected and
determined. (See Figure 5-18)
The values displayed are “D/A adjustment value”, “ON-OFF difference” and
“ON level” as named from left.
Appropriate values
ON-OFF difference: 040 or more
ON level: 095 or less
NOTE:
The appropriate values are represented in hexadecimal notation.
Paper to be used:
A3-size Kimoto Micro Tracing Paper #300 LMB #F751 (1057723)
ADJUSTMENT AND CHECKING PROCEDURE
1. Start the Self-diagnostic Function:
Power OFF →
[Paper Feed
∆
]
+
[Paper Feed
∇
]+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON
2. Set paper:
Set a sheet of A3-size Kimoto Micro Tracing Paper #300 LMB #F751 (1057723) on
the HP side.
3. Display “Adj: Rear AD”:
[Paper Feed
∇
]
→
[SelecType >]
→
[Paper Feed
∇
] x2
4. Detect the adjusted values:
[SelecType]
→ [Enter ↵
]
5. Check the values for properness:
Check that the values are within the respective ranges specified above. If they are not
within the ranges, clean the sensor surface or replace it with a new one.
Figure 5-18. Menu Transition for Rear AD Adjustment
[Enter] Start
Adjustment
RearAD :
? 088 04A 090
Adjust again
Detection error
end
[Enter]
[Enter]
Detection end
040 or more 95 or less
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 232
5.2.3.2 Edge AD Adjustment
The optimum value for resistance of the Edge Sensor is automatically detected and
determined. (See Figure 5-19)
The values are displayed in the order of “D/A adjustment value”, “ON-OFF
difference” and “ON level” from left to right.
Appropriate values
ON-OFF difference: 040 or more
ON level: within 0E0 ∼ 0E8
NOTE:
The appropriate values are represented in hexadecimal notation.
Paper to be used: A3 plain paper
ADJUSTMENT AND CHECKING PROCEDURE
1. Start the Self-diagnostic Function:
Power OFF →
[Paper Feed
∆
]
+
[Paper Feed
∇
]+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON
2. Set paper:
Set A3-size plain paper on the HP side.
3. Display “Adj: Edge AD”:
[Paper Feed
∇
]
→
[SelecType >]
→
[Paper Feed
∇
]
4. Move the CR Unit:
By manual operation, move the Carriage so that the Edge Sensor is positioned at the
right edge of the A3 plain paper.
5. Detect the adjusted values:
[SelecType]
→ [Enter ↵
]
6. Check the values for properness:
Check that the values are within the respective ranges specified above. If they are not
within the ranges, clean the sensor surface or replace it with a new one.
Figure 5-19. Menu Transition for Edge AD Adjustment
[Enter] Start
Adjustment
EdgeAD :
?0A10E00E0
Adjust again
Detection error
end
[Enter]
[Enter]
Detection end
040 or more Within 0E0 ∼ 0E8
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 233
5.2.3.3 Input Rank
When the print head has been replaced, input as the head rank the information specific
to the head for setting the optimum drive voltage.
(See Figure 5-20)
A label indicating a rank information code which consists of a numerical value
representing the characteristic values of the head has been affixed to the head already
mounted on the printer or the head newly installed (See Figure 5-24). Input this value
and write it in the Flash memory.
5.2.3.3.1 QR Code Input
Press [Pause] key to enter “Rank Input: QR Code”.
After ink filling, the display returns to the adjustment top menu.
Input correct values when an rank error has occurred.
The relationship between indications and errors is as follows:
•“RankError (D/P)”: Both dye and pigment are wrong.
•“RankError (D)”: Wrong rank for dye
•“RankError (P)”: Wrong rank for pigment
Figure 5-20. Menu Transition for Head Rank Input
Figure 5-21. Menu Transition for QR Code Input
CHECK
P O I N T
When initial filling only is to be performed after replacing the
Damper ASSY, select and execute “Initial charge” in “Cleaning”
(p.259) menu.
CHECK
P O I N T
The dedicated QR code reader is necessary for “QR Code input”.
On the service site, select and execute “Input on Panel”.
Rank Input :
? QR Code ?
Rank Input :
? Panel ?
Press [SelecType] key to enter the mode where QR
Code is received on line.
Press [SelecType] key to enter the mode where code
is input on the panel.
Input QR Code
Exc. EnterKey Fill The display is returned to “Rank Input” by pressing [Pause] key.
Remember, however, that the rank has already been updated.
Please Set Ink Displayed when the cartridge has not been installed.
INK CHARGING
RankError (D/P)
RankError (D)
RankError (P)
RankError
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Enter]
Input value OK
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 234
5.2.3.3.2 Input on Panel
In this mode, select an input type to input a code by operating on the panel.
(See Figure 5-22)
INPUT LINE SELECTION
In this mode, select an input line on which you input the code by panel operation.
(See Figure 5-23)
NOTE: For pigment code input, “Pigment-1” ~ “Pigment-3” are displayed.
Figure 5-22. Menu Transition of Panel Input
Figure 5-23. Menu Transition for Input Line Selection
Figure 5-24. Head Code Label Position
Rank Input :
? Dyestuff ?
Rank Input :
? Pigment ?
[SelecType]
[SelecType]
To the mode for selecting an input line for dye
To the mode for selecting an input line for
pigment
Input Line :
?Dye-1
Code input mode is entered by pressing [SelecType] key.
Input Line :
?Dye-2
Input Line :
?Dye-3
[Paper Feed
∆
][Paper Feed
∇
]
[Paper Feed
∆
]
[Paper Feed
∇
]
Code input mode is entered by pressing [SelecType] key.
Code input mode is entered by pressing [SelecType] key.
Day Pigment
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 235
Dye code input
In this mode, input a dye code by operating on the panel.
The cursor is displayed at the position where a digit is currently input.
(See Figure 5-25)
Press [Cleaning] key to shift the cursor (pointing out the input item) to the
right.
The cursor moves to the left end when [Cleaning] key is pressed at the right
end.
After ink charge, the display returns to the adjustment top menu.
Press the [Pause] key to return to the previous level in the hierarchy.
In doing so, note that the input code is valid but it has not been registered yet.
The cursor skips the item displayed with “\”.
At input for “Dye-1” or “Dye-2”, press the [Enter] key to enter the input line
selection mode, which is the immediately upper level in the hierarchy.
Figure 5-25. Menu Transition of Code Input
Dye–1
?266432F [Paper Feed
∆
] Key : +
[Paper Feed
∇
] Key : –
Dye–2
?44WM2Q3
Dye–3
? NU00G
\\
[Enter]
Exc. EnterKey Fill
[Enter]
Please Set Ink
[Enter]
INK CHARGING
Press [Pause] key for transition to the adjustment top menu.
Displayed when the cartridge has not been installed.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 236
Pigment Code Input
After ink filling, the display returns to the adjustment top menu.Pigment Code
Input
In this mode, input a pigment code by operating on the panel.
The cursor is displayed at the position where a digit is currently input.
Press [Cleaning] key to shift the cursor (pointing out the input item) to the
right.
The cursor moves to the left end when [Cleaning] key is pressed at the right
end.
After ink charge, the display returns to the adjustment top menu.
Press the [Pause] key to return to the previous level in the hierarchy.
In doing so, note that the input code is valid but it has not been registered yet.
The cursor skips the item displayed with “\”.
At input for “Pigment-1” “Pigment-2” or “Pigment-3”, press the [Enter] key
to enter the input line selection mode, which is the immediately upper level in
the hierarchy.
5.2.3.4 Write D/A Value
Figure 5-26. Menu Transition of Code Input
C A U T I O N Stylus Pro 7600/9600 does not incorporate this function. Do not try
to execute this operation on the service site.
Pigment–1
266432F [Paper Feed
∆
] Key: +
[Paper Feed
∇
] Key: –
Pigment–2
44WM2Q3
Pigment–3
QVVWUVR
Exc.EnterKey Fill
[Enter]
Press [Pause] key for transition to the adjustment top menu.
Please Set Ink
[Enter]
Displayed when the cartridge has not been installed.
INK CHARGING
Pigment–4
S01S0
\\
[Enter]
[Paper Feed
∆
] Key: +
[Paper Feed
∇
] Key: –
[Paper Feed
∆
] Key: +
[Paper Feed
∇
] Key: –
[Paper Feed
∆
] Key: +
[Paper Feed
∇
] Key: –
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 237
5.2.3.5 Check Nozzle
Check the print result to see if the head nozzles discharge ink properly and if there is
any alignment error. If ink discharging from the nozzles is faulty or there is any
alignment error, execute cleaning in this item and perform checking again. If there is
no ink remaining, the printer requests the installation of ink cartridges. When paper has
been set and there is ink, the printer prints the head nozzle check pattern.
Head Nozzle Check Pattern
Check Item
•Nozzle ink discharge (skipping, not continuous, meandering)
•Satellite
•Timing fence
•Vertical nozzle alignment check
•Horizontal nozzle alignment check
Figure 5-27. Menu Transition for Head Nozzle Check
Figure 5-28. Pattern (Nozzle Ink Discharge Check)
Figure 5-29. Pattern (Horizontal Nozzle Alignment Check)
Figure 5-30. Pattern (Vertical Nozzle Alignment Check)
CHECK
P O I N T
Printing operation is carried out even when the ink cartridges have
been installed but ink filling has not been performed.
Table 5-20. Pattern
Pattern Description
Nozzle ink
discharge
(See Figure 5-28)
The pattern is printed in the order of K/C/M/Y/LC/LM/LK from left to right.
Pattern drawing method 360dpi, Uni-D, VSD1, 240CPS, Large
HeadRank ID: 266432F 06E424E
44WM2Q3 4BUTWTU
NU00G QVVWUVR
S01S0
Horizontal nozzle
alignment check
(See Figure 5-29)
The pattern is printed in the order of K/LK/C/LC/M/LM/Y from left to right.
Pattern drawing method 360dpi,Uni-D,240CPS,VSD1,Large
360dpi,Uni-D,240CPS,VSD2,Large
360dpi,Uni-D,240CPS,VSD2,Small
360dpi,Uni-D,190CPS,VSD4,Large
Vertical nozzle
alignment check
(See Figure 5-30)
The pattern is printed in the order of K/LK/C/LC/M/LM/Y from left to right.
Pattern drawing method 360dpi,Uni-D,240CPS,VSD1,Small/Middle/Large
360dpi,Uni-D,240CPS,VSD2,Small/Middle/Large
360dpi,Uni-D,190CPS,VSD4,Small/Middle/Large
[Enter] Adjust Print
Output Pattern [Enter] Key →Pattern output
[Pause] Key →To "Check Nozzle"
Printing Pattern
Nozzle Check End
?
[Enter] Key →To "Cutter"
[Pause] Key →To "Check Nozzle"
Cleaning: Standard
?
[Enter] Key →Cleaning executed
[Pause] Key →To "Check Nozzle"
[Enter]
Printing end
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 238
5.2.3.6 Check Skew
Feed paper by a specified distance (specify the distance on the panel), read the paper
edge position before and after paper feed with the edge sensor and check the difference
between the two readings. (See Figure 5-31)
After completion of initial operation, input the value for paper feed distance. Then the
Edge Sensor will detect the paper left edge (capping side) and the printer will display
the difference between the positions before and after paper feed.
If a paper recognition error before or after paper feed occurs or if the Rear Sensor
detects “No Paper” during paper feed, the display shows paper error. Then press the
appropriate key to leave this item.
NOTE: The printer will leave this item once the [Pause] key is pressed on the
control panel while the printer is not processing.
At the first detection of the paper left edge, the reference position for paper
skew judgment is determined in the firmware.
The “Paper Out” LED blinks or lights up if the paper detection error has
occurred. In such cases, raise the lever once and then execute the same
operation again.
Press the [Pause] key for transition to “Adj: Check Skew”.
No panel key works during execution of skew checking.
Figure 5-31. Menu Transition for Skew Checking
CHECK
P O I N T
When the skew check result is “99.999mm”, the paper is in the
following conditions. Clear the cause and execute the check again.
1. The paper width detection indicates that one of the right and
left edge positions of the paper is different from that by the
previous detection by ±3 mm or more.
2. When the head is at the home position, the distance from the
row of K nozzles to the paper detected position on the home
side is 142.0 mm or less. (The paper is too close to the home
position.)
Lever up or cover opening was performed during paper feed
operation.
Check Skew :
?1.0m
[Enter]
[Paper Feed ∆] Key: +
[Paper Feed ∇] Key : –
* Setting possible in increments of 0.1 m (10.0m ∼ 0.1m)
Exc. Skew
Normal completion of paper edge detection after paper
transport by the preset distance
SkewResult:
? +0.010mm + for Home side, - for opposite side
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 239
5.2.3.7 Feed Correction + T&B Adjustment
For paper transport, correct the distance and adjust the top & bottom margins and side
margin (printing start position). (See page 241)
Feed Adjustment (Paper feed distance compensation):
Make the printer print a line in the paper feed direction, input the distance and
determine the PF encoder resolution inside the firmware.
The reference length for this determination has been set to 1 m.
(Only the input of a compensation value without printing is possible.)
The input value, handled as the compensation value, is written in the Flash ROM.
Resolution: 0.1mm
Adj Top & Bottom:
Conduct printing and paper cutting and input the distances between the Front
Sensor and the Head, between the Cutter and the Head and between the Edge
Sensor and the Head (writing start position).
The input value, handled as the compensation value, is written in the Flash ROM.
Resolution: 0.1mm
Side Margin Adjustment (Print Start Position Adjustment):
Conduct printing and paper cutting, then measure and input the side margin.
The input value, handled as the compensation value, is written in the Flash ROM.
Adjustment resolution: 0.1mm
Menu transition is shown at right and adjustment patterns are shown on the next page.
Press the [Pause] key on the compensation value input screen, and the display
will change to “Feed Adj.+T&B”.
Press the [Pause] key on the “Top Length” or “Bottom Length” input screen,
and the display will change to the “Bottom Length” or “Side Margin” input
screen, respectively.
“Top Length”, “Bottom Length” and “Side Margin” can be adjusted only in
the T&B adjustment mode for the first printing.
Figure 5-32. Menu Transition for Feed Correction +T&B Adjustment
V Length :
? +1000.0mm
Printing Pattern
Top Length :
?3.0mm
Bottom Length :
? 14.0mm
Side Margin:
?3.0mm
[Enter]
Adjust
[SelecType]
[SelecType]
[SelecType]
[SelecType]
T&B Adjust?
[Enter] Adjust Print
[Enter]
Enter:Adjust
Pause:Do not adjust
[Paper Feed
∆
]Key: +
[Paper Feed
∇
]Key : –
* Setting is possible in increments of 0.1 mm.
[Pause]
[Enter] Adjust Print
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Pause] Key →To “Rear Sensor Pos.”
[Paper Feed
∆
]Key: +
[Paper Feed
∇
]Key : –
* Setting is possible in increments of 0.1 mm.
[Paper Feed
∆
]Key: +
[Paper Feed
∇
]Key : –
* Setting is possible in increments of 0.1 mm.
[Paper Feed
∆
]Key: +
[Paper Feed
∇
]Key : –
* Setting is possible in increments of 0.1 mm.
[Paper Feed
∆
]Key: +
[Paper Feed
∇
]Key : –
* Setting is possible in increments of 0.1 mm.
Do not adjust. Or 2nd or subsequent printing
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 240
Adjustment pattern
Adjustment items
•Top margin (Front Sensor position)
•Bottom margin (cutter position)
•Side margin (Writing start position)
Paper feed length:
1000 mm
Pattern drawing method:
•Length: 1000mm
•Printing direction: Uni-D
•Resolution: 360 dpi
•Printing speed: 240 CPS
Table below specifies the positions where the NormalDot2 vertical line patterns are
drawn.
Table 5-21. Positions where Vertical Line Patterns Are Drawn
Coordinate in units of 360 dpi In mm
00
1417 About 100
2834 About 200
4251 About 300
5669 About 400
7086 About 500
8583 About 600
9921 About 700
11338 About 800
12755 About 900
14173 About 1000
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 241
FEED CORRECTION + T&B ADJUSTMENT
1. Start the Self-diagnostic Function:
Power OFF →
[Paper Feed
∆
]
+
[Paper Feed
∇
]+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON
2. Display “Adj: Feed Adj.+T&B”:
[Paper Feed
∇
]
→
[SelecType >]
→
[Paper Feed
∆
] x6
3. Print the pattern.
[SelecType >]
→
[Enter
↵
]
when “[Enter] Adjust Print” is displayed
(See Figure
5-32)
4. Measure the top margin:
Using a measuring rule, measure the top margin. Input the measured value on the
panel.
5. Measure the bottom margin:
Using a measuring rule, measure the bottom margin. Input the measured value on the
panel.
6. Measure the side margin:
Using a measuring rule, measure the side margin. Input the measured value on the
panel.
7. Measure the feed correction value:
Using a measuring rule (1000 mm) and the scale stopper, measure the longitudinal line
length. Input the measured value on the panel.
Figure 5-33. Print Pattern for Feed Correction + T&B Adjustment
CHECK
P O I N T
The central print pattern among the patterns as shown above is
intended for use as a datum line on which the measuring rule is
to be placed.
Even if you have left the “Feed Correction + T&B Adjustment”
mode by mistake, you can restore the relevant adjustment
display without reprinting the pattern, by pressing [Paper
Source <] when “[Enter] Adjust Print” is displayed.
Top margin (3.0mm)
Side margin
(3.0mm)
Bottom margin (14.0mm)
Longitudinal line length (1000.0mm)
Paper Feed Direction
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 242
5.2.3.8 Top & Bottom Adjustment
Conduct printing and paper cutting and input the distances between the Front Sensor
and the Head, between the Cutter and the Head and between the Edge Sensor 0 and the
Head (printing start position) to adjust the top, bottom and side margins.
Press the [Pause] key on the compensation value input screen, and the display
will change to “Top and Button”.
Press the [Enter} key on the input screen for “Top Length” or “Bottom
Length”, and the display will change to the input screen for “Bottom Length”
or “Side Margin”, respectively.
Press the [Enter] key on the input screen for “Side Margin”, and the display
will change to “Rear Sensor Position”.
Correction pattern of distances between the Front Sensor and the Head, between
the Cutter and the Head
Adjustment items: Top margin (Front Sensor position)
Bottom margin (cutter position)
Side margin (printing start position)
Printing method: Black 1 pass, Uni-D mode 180 dpi
Pattern drawing method: Printing direction: Uni-D
Resolution: 360dpi
Printing speed: 240CPS
Dot: NormalDot2
Figure 5-34. Menu Transition for Top & Bottom Adjustment
Figure 5-35. Print Pattern for Top & Bottom Adjustment
Printing Pattern
Top Length :
?3.0mm
Bottom Length :
? 14.0mm
Side Margin:
?3.0mm
[SelecType]
[SelecType]
[Paper Feed
∆
]Key: +
[Paper Feed
∇
]Key : –
* Setting is possible in increments of 0.1 mm.
[Enter]
[Enter]
[SelecType] [Enter]
[Paper Feed
∆
]Key: +
[Paper Feed
∇
]Key : –
* Setting is possible in increments of 0.1 mm.
[Paper Feed
∆
]Key: +
[Paper Feed
∇
]Key : –
* Setting is possible in increments of 0.1 mm.
Top margin (3.0mm) Side margin
(3.0mm)
Paper Feed
Direction
Bottom margin (14.0mm)
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 243
5.2.3.9 Rear Sensor Position
Make this adjustment to detect the length of cut paper correctly.
To ensure a maximum printable area relative to the paper tail end, adjust the Rear
Sensor position inside the firmware with the nozzle position as the reference.
Set an A3 sheet in the portrait position, make the printer draw a horizontal line (black
1-dot line) at 14 mm from the sheet tail end. Then measure the distance from the sheet
tail end to the line and input the measured value as the compensation value.
The input value, handled as the compensation value, is written in the Flash ROM.
Resolution: 0.1mm
Pattern drawing method: 360dpi, Uni-D, 240CPS, NormalDot2
NOTE 1: This adjustment is necessary in the manufacturing process. After that,
however, execution of this item is not necessary even once Feed
Correction is made.
2: When this item is selected, the printer requests setting of cut paper
irrespective of the presence or absence of paper.
As the Rear Sensor position, measure the distance between the sheet tail end
and the drawn line and input the measured value.
Press the [Enter] key on the “Rear Sensor Pos.” input screen, and the display
will change to “Test Print”.
REAR SENSOR POSITION ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
1. Start the Self-diagnostic Function:
Power OFF →
[Paper Feed
∆
]
+
[Paper Feed
∇
]+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON
2. Display “Adj: Rear Sensor Pos.”:
[Paper Feed
∇
]
→
[SelecType >]
→
[Paper Feed
∆
] x5
3. Print the pattern:
Set a sheet of A3-size plain paper (portrait) and press
[Enter ↵
]
.
(See Figure 5-36)
4. Measure the distance:
Using a measuring rule, measure the distance. Input the measured value on the panel.
(See Figure 5-37)
Figure 5-36. Menu Transition for Rear Sensor Position Adjustment
Figure 5-37. Rear Sensor Position Adjustment Pattern
Set cut paper and press [Enter]
Please Set Cut Sheet
Printing end
Printing Pattern After printing, drop the paper.
[Enter]
Paper Width :
?297.0mm
[Pause] Key →To “Rear Sensor Pos.”
RearSen. Pos. :
? 14.0mm
[Paper Feed
∆
]Key: +
[Paper Feed
∇
]Key : –
*Setting is possible in increments of 0.1 mm.
Rear Sensor position correction
Paper Feed Direction
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 244
5.2.3.10 Platen Position (Sponge Position) Adjustment
Detect the position of each sponge on the platen. (See Figure 5-38)
For Platen R, input the deviation of the printed pattern from the left end of the
frame in which the sponge nearest to the 1st home is embedded.
For Platen L, input the deviation of the printed pattern from the left end of the
frame in which the 7th sponge counted from the home for Stylus Pro 7600 or
the 9th sponge for Stylus Pro 9600 is embedded.
Input a negative value for a deviation toward the home or a positive value for
a deviation toward the side opposite to the home.
Pattern drawing method: 360dpi, Uni-D, 240CPS, VSD2, Large
PLATEN POSITION (SPONGE POSITION) ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
1. Start the Self-diagnostic Function:
Power OFF →
[Paper Feed
∆
]
+
[Paper Feed
∇
]+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON
2. Display “Adj: Sponge Pos.”:
[Paper Feed
∇
]
→
[SelecType >]
→
[Paper Feed
∆
] x4
3. Print the pattern:
[Enter ↵
]
x2
4. Measure the platen position R:
Using a measuring rule, measure the distance from the left end
of the frame in which
the sponge nearest to the 1st home is embedded
to the longitudinal line of the printed
pattern.
Input the measured value on the panel.
(See Figure 5-39)
5. Measure the platen position L:
Using a measuring rule, measure the distance from the left end
of the frame in which
the 7th sponge counted from the home for Stylus Pro 7600 or the 9th sponge for
Stylus Pro 9600 is embedded
to the longitudinal line of the printed pattern.
Input the measured value on the panel.
(See Figure 5-39)
Figure 5-38. Menu Transition for Platen Position Adjustment
Figure 5-39. Print Pattern for Platen Position Adjustment
[Enter] Adjust Print
Printing Pattern
Platen R:
?0.0mm
Platen L:
?0.0mm
Adj :
? Platen Pos. Chk.
[Enter]
[Paper Feed
∆
]Key: +
[Paper Feed
∇
]Key : –
*Setting is possible in increments of 0.1 mm.
Printing end
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Paper Feed
∆
]Key: +
[Paper Feed
∇
]Key : –
*Setting is possible in increments of 0.1 mm.
– side+ side– side
side
Measure this deviation Measure this deviation
Platen position (counted from home side)
Stylus Pro 7600: 7th⁄
Stylus Pro 9600: 9th
Platen Position L Platen Position R
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 245
5.2.3.11 Platen Position Checking
Check the adjusted position of each sponge on the platen.
Make certain that the printed pattern agrees with the right and left positions of
each sponge position.
Pattern drawing method: 360dpi, Uni-D, 240CPS, VSD2, Large
Figure 5-40. Menu Transition for Platen Position Checking
Figure 5-41. Print Pattern for Platen Position Checking
[Enter] Adjust Print
Printing Pattern
Platen Pos. R:
?0.0mm
Adj :
Cut Adj.
[Enter]
[Paper Feed
∆
]Key: +
[Paper Feed
∇
]Key : –
*Setting is possible in increments of 0.1 mm.
Printing end
[Enter]
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 246
5.2.3.12 Head Slant Checking
Check the print result to see if the head is slanting.
If there is a slant, make the “Head Slant Adjustment (Mechanical Adjustment)”
(p.247).
Slant Check Pattern
Check Item: Head slant
Pattern drawing method: 360dpi, Uni-D, 240CPS, VSD2, small
Adjustment Resolution: 12µm or less
Adjustment Range: 38 steps
Figure 5-42. Menu Transition of Head Slant
Figure 5-43. Slant Check Pattern
Figure 5-44. Head Slant Check Printout
Output Pattern
Slant Check End
Printing Pattern
Printing end
[Enter] Key →To “Bi-d”
[Pause] Key →To “Head Slant”
[Enter] Adjust Print
[Enter]
[Paper Feed
∆
]
[Paper Feed
∇
]
[Paper Feed
∆
][Paper Feed
∇
]
[Enter] Key → Pattern output
[Pause] Key →To “Head Slant”
Check these joint points for head slant
3mm 3mm
3mm
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 247
HEAD SLANT CHECKING PROCEDURE
1. Start the Self-diagnostic Function:
Power OFF →
[Paper Feed
∆
]
+
[Paper Feed
∇
]+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON
2. Display “Adj: Head Slant”:
[Paper Feed
∇
]
→
[SelecType >]
→
[Paper Feed
∇
] x8
3. Print the pattern.
4.
Check the pattern: (See Figure 5-43)
Check to see if the black horizontal lines and the magenta horizontal lines are not in
alignment. When they are in alignment, leave the head slant checking mode by
pressing the [Paper Source] button two times. If they are not in alignment, follow the
procedure as described below.
HEAD SLANT ADJUSTMENT (MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT)
1. After printing the head slant check pattern, with “Do you correct slant?” displayed on
the LCD, move the Carriage Unit to an appropriate place for work.
2. Loosen the right and left screws for the Head Holding Plate.
(See Figure 5-45)
3. Move the Head Adjustment Lever in consideration of the output pattern.
(See Figure 5-46)
4. Tighten the left screw for the Head Holding Plate and move the Carriage Unit to the
home position.
5. Print the pattern again, check to see if there is any misalignment and if any, repeat the
adjustment from step 1.
Figure 5-45. Head Slant Adjustment 1/2
Figure 5-46. Head Slant Adjustment 2/2
C A U T I O N Do not forget to tighten the two screws for the Head Holding
Plate.
After making the head slant adjustment, be sure to return the
Carriage Unit to the home position.
If you proceed to the next step (Printing the pattern) with the
Carriage Unit remaining in the place for work, the cutter edge
can be damaged.
CHECK
P O I N T
Head motion by Head Adjustment Lever operation:
Lever Up: Magenta → lower / Black → rise
Lever Down: Magenta → rise / Black → lower
Tighten two screws
Cutter
Lever down
→ Black up/magenta down
Head Adjustment Lever
Lever up
→ Black down/magenta up
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 248
5.2.3.13 Round Trip Print Position Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment)
Adjust the round trip print position.
Make adjustments of “240CPS VSD1”, “240CPS VSD2” and “190CPS VSD4” for
each color. This Bi-D adjustment is of PG=1.2mm. For PG=0.7mm (Bi-D2) and
PG=2.1mm (Bi-D3), make adjustment in other menus, as required.
Store the adjustment values for each line of nozzles (21 kinds of values) in the Flash
ROM.
For adjustment, conduct Bi-D printing and from the print results, input the difference
between the CW print position and the CCW print position.
The procedure and print patterns for round trip print position adjustment are shown on
the next page.
Adjustment resolution: 8.8 µm
Adjustable range: ± 96 step adjustment possible
Press the [Enter] key with “***K PRN” displayed, and the K pattern will be
printed.
Press the [Enter] key with “***COL PRN” displayed, and the block pattern
will be printed in colors other than K.
When “***V1 K” is displayed, input the adjustment value for K (-96 ~ +96).
When each of “***V1 K2” ~ “***V1 Y” is displayed, input the pattern
number (0 ~ 8) for the aligned pattern.
Press the [Enter] key with “BiD End” displayed, and the mode changes to
“Adj: Bi-d Chk.”
Figure 5-47. Menu Transition for Bi-D Adjustment
Table 5-22. Adjustment Item List
Item Contents
BiD 240,V1 Bi-D Adjustment 240CPS VSD1
BiD 240,V2 Bi-D Adjustment 240CPS VSD2
BiD 190,V4 Bi-D Adjustment 190CPS VSD4
CHECK
P O I N T
Be sure to make adjustment for K first and then for other
colors.
After adjustment, be sure to perform “Round Trip Print
Position (Bi-D Adjustment) Checking (p.252)”.
BiD 240, V1
??
BiD 240, V2
??
BiD 240, V4
??
BiD End
??
240V1 K PRN
?
[SelecType]
240V1 COL PRN
?
240V1 K
?30
[Paper Feed
∆
] Key: +
[Paper Feed
∇
] Key : –
240V1 Y
?2
[Paper Feed
∆
] Key: +
[Paper Feed
∇
] Key : –
240V1 K2
?4
[Paper Feed
∆
] Key: +
[Paper Feed
∇
] Key : –
240V1 C
?6
[Paper Feed
∆
] Key: +
[Paper Feed
∇
] Key : –
240V1 M
?3
[Paper Feed
∆
] Key: +
[Paper Feed
∇
] Key : –
240V1 LC
?5
[Paper Feed
∆
] Key: +
[Paper Feed
∇
] Key : –
240V1 LM
?8
[Paper Feed
∆
] Key: +
[Paper Feed
∇
] Key : –
[SelecType]
[SelecType]
[SelecType] or [Enter]
[Enter]
Printing Pattern
Printing end
[Enter]
[SelecType] or [Enter]
[SelecType] or [Enter]
[SelecType] or [Enter]
[SelecType] or [Enter]
[SelecType] or [Enter]
[SelecType] or [Enter]
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 249
BI-D ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
1. Start the Self-diagnostic Function:
Power OFF →
[Paper Feed
∆
]
+
[Paper Feed
∇
]+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON
2. Display “Adj: Bi-d”:
[Paper Feed
∇
]
→
[SelecType >]
→
[Paper Feed
∇
] x9
3. Print the 240, V1 black line pattern:
Press
[Enter ↵
]
when “240V1 K PRN” is displayed.
(See Figure 5-47)
4. Check the test pattern (240, V1 K)
Check to see if the line by the first pass and the line by the second pass are not in
alignment.
When they are in alignment, proceed to the next step. If they are not in alignment,
make the adjustment by referring to the procedure described below. (See Figure
5-49)
K (Black Line) Adjustment Procedure
1. Display the value input screen “240V1 K: xx”:
After the test pattern has been output, press
[SelecType >]
one time when
“240V1 COL PRN” is displayed on the LCD.
2. Input the value:
In consideration of the output pattern, input a value in the range of +99∼–99
and press [Enter ↵
]
.
3. Output the pattern again:
[SelecType >]
→
[SelecType >]
→ [Enter ↵
]
4. Check the pattern:
Check the output pattern and repeat the K (black line) adjustment until the line
by the first pass and the line by the second pass are in alignment.
Figure 5-48. Bi-D Adjustment Patterns
Figure 5-49. Round Trip Print Position (Bi-D) Adjustment (Black)
CHECK
P O I N T
Be sure to make adjustment for K first and then for other colors.
Each color pattern has been set based on K. Therefore, if the K
value is not correct, you can not make adjustments for color
patterns correctly.
Enlarged
1st pass
2nd pass
(+ side)
2nd pass
(– side)
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 250
5. Print the 240, V1 color pattern:
Press
[Enter ↵
]
when “240V1 COL PRN” is displayed.
(See Figure 5-47)
6. Check the 240, V1 color pattern:
Of the 9 color blocks for each color, find out a pattern free from a gap or overlap
and make certain that the number on the LCD is identical with the number shown
above the pattern.
If the number on the LCD is different, input the pattern number.
7. Upon completion of the 240 V1 adjustment, make the adjustments for 240 V2 and
190V4 the same way.
Figure 5-50. Color Pattern for Bi-D Adjustment
CHECK
P O I N T
After completion of the adjustments above, be sure to make the “Round
Trip Print Position Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment)” (p.248).
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 251
5.2.3.14 Parameter Copying
In actual processing, at each point when the adjusted value is determined in
“5.2.3.13 Round Trip Print Position Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment)” (p.248), the
compensation value obtained by computation is copied into each area. Actually,
therefore, copy processing by this function is not required. (See Figure 5-51)
5.2.3.15 Bi-D2 Adjustment (PG=0.7mm)
Make this adjustment, as required, after executing “5.2.3.13 Round Trip Print Position
Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment)” (p.248).
The adjustment procedure is the same as that for “5.2.3.13 Round Trip Print Position
Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment)” (p.248).
5.2.3.16 Bi-D3 Adjustment (PG=2.1mm)
Make this adjustment, as required, after executing “5.2.3.13 Round Trip Print Position
Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment)” (p.248).
The adjustment procedure is the same as that for “5.2.3.13 Round Trip Print Position
Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment)” (p.248).
Figure 5-51. Menu Transition for Parameter Copying
CHECK
P O I N T
When this adjustment is to be performed, use the following paper
since setting must be made for PG=0.7mm.
Paper to be used: Authentic glossy paper
(Example: Photo Glossy Paper #MCSRxxR2)
CHECK
P O I N T
When this adjustment is to be performed, use the following paper
since setting must be made for PG=2.1mm.
Paper to be used: Authentic plain paper roll (PMSPxxR6)
WAIT
Copy Param. ?
[Enter]
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 252
5.2.3.17 Round Trip Print Position (Bi-D Adjustment) Checking
According to the result of the round trip print position adjustment, shift the pattern by
the theoretically required number of dots. Then print the pattern and check the print
result.
Check to see if the central patterns are in alignment and if not, perform the Bi-D
adjustment again.
The menu transition for Bi-D adjustment checking and print patterns are shown at
right.
NOTE: Figure 5-53 shows the print patterns for PG1.2mm. The patterns for
PG0.7mm and PG2.1mm will also be printed.
Pattern drawing method: #1, #2 360dpi, Bi-D, 240CPS, VSD1, Large
#8, #9 360dpi, Bi-D, 240CPS, VSD2, Large
#15, #16 360dpi, Bi-D, 190CPS, VSD4, Large
Figure 5-52. Menu Transition for Bi-D Adjustment Checking
Figure 5-53. Print Patterns for Bi-D Adjustment Checking
Printing Pattern
[Enter] Adjust Print
[Enter]
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 253
5.2.3.18 Head Gap Adjustment (Uni-D Adjustment)
Correct the print position for one-way printing.
Make adjustments of “240CPS VSD1”, “240CPS VSD2” and “190CPS VSD4” for
each color.
Store the adjustment values for each line of nozzles (18 kinds of values) in the Flash
ROM.
For adjustment, conduct Uni-D printing and from the print results, input the
compensation value.
The menu transition for Uni-D adjustment and print patterns are shown below.
Adjustment resolution: 8.8 µm
Adjustable range: ± 62 step adjustment possible
Pattern drawing method:
360dpi, Uni-D, 240CPS, VSD1, Large (240V1 selected)
360dpi, Uni-D, 240CPS, VSD2, Large (240V2 selected)
360dpi, Uni-D, 190CPS, VSD4, Large (190V4 selected)
Press the [Enter] key after inputting the adjusted values and pattern number,
and the pattern will be printed only when updated values have been input.
When the values have not been updated, the display will change to the next
input screen.
When the [Enter] key is pressed with “Gap End” displayed, the display
changes to “Adj: Feed Adj.+T&B”.
Figure 5-54. Menu Transition for Uni-D Adjustment
Table 5-23. Head Gap Adjustment Items
Item Contents
Gap 240,V1 Uni-D Adjustment 240CPS VSD1
Gap 240,V2 Uni-D Adjustment 240CPS VSD2
Gap 190,V4 Uni-D Adjustment 190CPS VSD4
CHECK
P O I N T
The adjustment is not required for any of #1, #8 and #15, which are
black lines.
Gap 240, V1
??
Gap 240, V2
??
Gap 190, V4
??
Gap End
??
240V1 Y :
?0
Value with +/- can be set in pulses
1 pulse is equivalent to 1/2880”
240V1 LK :
?0
240V1 C :
?0
240V1 LC :
?0
240V1 M :
?0
240V1 LM :
?0
[Enter]
[SelecType]
[SelecType]
[SelecType]
[SelecType]
[SelecType]
[Enter] Adjust Print
Printing Pattern
Printing end
[Pause]
[SelecType]
Value with +/- can be set in pulses
1 pulse is equivalent to 1/2880”
Value with +/- can be set in pulses
1 pulse is equivalent to 1/2880”
Value with +/- can be set in pulses
1 pulse is equivalent to 1/2880”
Value with +/- can be set in pulses
1 pulse is equivalent to 1/2880”
Value with +/- can be set in pulses
1 pulse is equivalent to 1/2880”
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 254
PROCEDURE FOR HEAD GAP ADJUSTMENT (UNI-D ADJUSTMENT)
1. Start the Self-diagnostic Function:
Power OFF →
[Paper Feed
∆
]
+
[Paper Feed
∇
]+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON
2. Display “Adj: Uni-D”:
[Paper Feed
∇
]
→
[SelecType >]
→
[Paper Feed
∇
] x11
3. Print the pattern.
[SelecType >]
→
[Enter
↵
]
when “[Enter] Adjust Print” is displayed
(See Figure 5-55)
4. Check the pattern:
Make certain that the black lines and color lines are not out of alignment.
When they are not out of alignment, leave the head gap adjustment mode by pressing
[SelecType >]
two times. If they are out of alignment, follow the instructions given
below:
If out of alignment
1. Select the gap item in question:
Select “Gap 240,V1”, “Gap 240,V2” or “Gap 190,V4” by means of
[Paper Feed
∇
]
and enter the adjustment menu for the selected item by pressing
[SelecType >]
.
2. Adjust the color position in question:
Select the relevant color by means of [SelecType >], and in consideration of
the printed pattern, input the compensation value on the panel.
Shift direction (black line as reference):
(Compensation setting: in increments of 1/2880 inch)
Shift to the right = Input a (+) value
Shift to the left = Input a (-) value
3. Check again:
Check the pattern output again, and when the lines are in alignment, leave the
head gap adjustment mode by pressing
[SelecType >]
two times.
If the lines are
out of alignment, repeat inputting a value.
Figure 5-55. Print Pattern (Head Gap Adjustment)
CHECK
P O I N T
Even when you have left the head gap adjustment menu, you can
display the menu for an relevant item by means of [SelecType >].
Therefore, there is no need of outputting the comprehensive
patterns again.
Enlarged View
Black line
Color line
(+ side§)
Color line
(– side)
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 255
5.2.3.19 Test Pattern Printing
You can print adjustment patterns and check each adjustment item.
(See Figure 5-56)
Check Ptn.:
Prints all the adjustment patterns (including the adjustment variables list)
(Time required: about 20 minutes)
Check Ptn. 2:
Of the patterns to be output by “Check Ptn.”, the first pattern to the head gap
adjustment (Uni-D) pattern will be output.
(Time required: about 5 minutes)
Check Ptn. 3:
Of the patterns to be output by “Check Ptn.”, the Bi-D adjustment pattern to the
adjustment variables will be output.
(Time required: about 15 minutes)
Adj. Variable:
Outputs the list of the setting compensation values (variables) determined by various
adjustments.
Press the [Cleaning] key on a serial number input screen, and the display will
change to the next screen.
(For example, from “No.1: PEG**000000”, the display changes to “No.1:
PEG**000000”.)
Press the [Cleaning] key on the “Print Adj.Pattern” screen, and the display
will change to the serial number input screen “No.1: PEG**000000”.
Figure 5-56. Menu Transition for Test Pattern Printing
Print :
? Check Ptn.
?
Print :
? Adj.Variable ?
No.1 :
?PEG∗∗000000
No.2 :
?PEG01∗∗0000
No.3 :
? PEG0123∗∗00
[
Paper Feed
∆
]
[SelecType]
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Paper Feed
∆
]Key: +
[Paper Feed
∇
]Key : –
* Setting is possible in increments of 2 digits.
No.4 :
? PEG012345∗∗
Print Adj.Pattern
Printing Pattern
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Enter]
[
Paper Feed
∇
]
[Paper Feed
∆
]Key: +
[Paper Feed
∇
]Key : –
* Setting is possible in increments of 2 digits.
[Paper Feed
∆
]Key: +
[Paper Feed
∇
]Key : –
*2Setting is possible in increments of 2 digits.
[Paper Feed
∆
]Key: +
[Paper Feed
∇
]Key : –
* Setting is possible in increments of 2 digits.
After printing, the display changes to
[Clean Head].
[SelecType] Key →To "Printing Pattern"
Printing end→To serial number input screen
Print :
? Check Ptn.
2 ?
[
Paper Feed
∆
] [
Paper Feed
∇
]
[SelecType] Key →To "Printing Pattern"
Printing end→To serial number input screen
Print :
? Check Ptn.
3 ?
[
Paper Feed
∆
] [
Paper Feed
∇
]
[SelecType] Key →To "Printing Pattern"
Printing end→To serial number input screen
[Enter] Adjust Print
[Enter]
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 256
5.2.3.20 Clean Head
When Head replacement is required on the service site, execute ink discharge
(“Ink Blowing”) in this mode beforehand.
When replacing the print head, execute ink discharge (“Ink Blowing”) by using this
function.
Procedure:
In the flow as shown at right, upon completion of the first step for ink discharge,
enter the branch for “Head Wash Skip” and “[Enter] End” to skip the other
operations.
Figure 5-57. Menu Transition for Head Cleaning
CHECK
P O I N T
If transition in the sequence can not take place for some reason, the
display shows “Reset ** I/C”.
CHECK
P O I N T
Prepare seven draining cartridges, which are necessary for this
work.
“Opener I/C” in the menu display must be understood as
“Draining Cartridge”.
Install draining cartridges.[Enter]
Set Opener I/C
[Enter]
[Pause]
Completion of ink discharge
Ink Blowing
Set Cleaning I/C
Ink Dischg. Skip
Install cleaning cartridges.[Enter]
[Enter]
[Pause]
Completion of cleaning liquid filling
Head Cleaning
Set Opener I/C (2)
Head Wash Skip
Install draining cartridges.[Enter]
[Enter]
[Pause]
Completion of cleaning liquid filling
Dischrg. washfluid
(2)
Set Cleaning I/C
(2)
Ink Dischg. Skip (2)
Install cleaning cartridges.[Enter]
[Enter]
[Pause]
Completion of cleaning liquid filling
Head Cleaning (2)
Set Opener I/C (3)
Head Wash Skip (2)
Install draining cartridges.[Enter]
[Enter]
[Pause]
Completion of cleaning liquid filling
Dischrg. washfluid
(3)
Set Cleaning I/C
(3)
Ink Dischg. Skip (3)
Install cleaning cartridges.[Enter]
[Enter]
[Pause]
Completion of cleaning liquid filling
Head Cleaning (3)
Set Opener I/C (4)
Head Wash Skip (3)
Install draining cartridges.[Enter]
[Enter]
[Pause]
Completion of cleaning liquid filling
Dischrg. washfluid
(4)
Please Remove I/C
(5)
Ink Dischg. Skip (4)
Remove cartridges and press [Enter]
[Enter]
[Pause]
Completion of cleaning liquid filling
Execute Suction
(5)
Adj : Counter Clear
[Enter] End
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 257
5.2.3.21 Counter Clear
[Description below is given only for information]
Table 5-24 indicates the counters to be cleared and their initial values and Figure 5-58
shows menu transition for counter clearing.
Note : The numeric value in ( ) represents the initial value in the area which firmware does not
use.
C A U T I O N This function is to be used to initialize each counter value at the
factory before shipment. Never use this function on the service site.
(If you operate, all the counter values concerning ink system control
will be lost and no operation or control after that will be carried out
correctly.)
Table 5-24. Counters to be Cleared and Their Initial Values
Counters to be Cleared Initial Value
Protection Counter A 0
Protection Counter A Work 0
Protection Counter D 0
Protection Counter D Work 0
Protection Counter B 0
Protection Counter B Work 0
Ink Volume Counter Rb 0
Ink Volume Counter Rx 0
Ink Volume Counter Rz 0
Consumed Ink Counter K 0
Consumed Ink Counter LK 0
Consumed Ink Counter C 0
Consumed Ink Counter M 0
Consumed Ink Counter LC 0
Consumed Ink Counter LM 0
Consumed Ink Counter Y 0
CL1 Cumulative Counter 0
CL2 Cumulative Counter 0
CL3 Cumulative Counter 0
HP and Other Cumulative Counters 0
Timer CL Cumulative Counter 0
Yellow Shot Counter 1 0
Yellow Shot Counter 2 0
Accumulated Prints Timer 0
Timer for Timer CL Execution 1 0
Timer for Timer CL Execution 2 0
CL Flag 0 (Not during CL)
Initial Charge Counter 1 (Not completed)
Periodic Pseudo-Vacuum Flag (0)
Ink Type 0 (Neutral)
Ink OUT Judge Counter (0)
Vacuum Compensation Coefficient (90)
Discharge Compensation Coefficient (90)
Compensation Permission Flag H (0)
Cartridge Midway Replacement Flag 1 (Replaced)
CSIC Storage Area for Printer Body FFh
Cumulative Ink Consumption 0
Cumulative Paper Consumption 0
Ink Consumption during Nozzle Check 0
Paper Consumption during Nozzle Check 0
Counters to be Cleared 0
Y Ink Cumulative Discharge Counter 0
Previous Y Ink Cumulative Discharge Counter 0
Y Ink Cumulative Discharge at Previous Ultrasonic Cleaning (0)
Y Ink Cumulative Discharge at Previous Periodic CL2 Execution (0)
CSIC Control Flag 1 (All valid)
Maintenance Menu Ink Related Count 1 1 for date 0 for others
Timer Initial Charge Execution Count (0)
Initial Charge Previous Execution time (0)
Timer Initial Charge Flag (0)
Maintenance tank ink consumption (CSIC) 0
Head hot error flag 0 (Not error)
Borderless ink counter 0
Timer CL4 cumulative counter 0
Pump counter P 0
Maintenance tank detection 1 (ON)
CL5 cumulative counter 0
CL1 count with cleaning prohibited (7 colors) 0
Timer CL4 flag 0 (Not being executed)
Time having elapsed since previous K ink replacement sequence 0xffffffff
CL4 cumulative counter 0
K ink counter for ink system processing 0
Ink replacement sequence counter 0
Ink type changed MB flag 0 (Not changed)
Previous count-down ratio 0 (%)
Initial charge executed MB flag 0 (Not executed)
Initial charge executed MB flag 0
Table 5-24. Counters to be Cleared and Their Initial Values (continued)
Counters to be Cleared Initial Value
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 258
After counter clearing, turn off the power once and then turn it on again to
start the printer in the normal mode. Then the display as shown in Figure 5-59
will appear when the counter clearing has been executed successfully.
(However, only when the covers are closed, the Paper Set Lever in the down
position and the ink lever is in the up position)
Figure 5-58. Menu Transition for Counter Clearing
Figure 5-59. Display after Counter Clearing
Reset Counter?
Wait for a while
[Enter]
After printing, display changes to “Check Skew”
SET INK
CARTRIDGE *
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 259
5.2.4 Cleaning
Execute head cleaning.
Table 5-25 lists cleaning items and Figure 5-60 shows cleaning menu transition.
5.2.5 Print
Execute test pattern printing and/or adjustment variables printing.
Table 5-26 lists printing items and Figure 5-61 shows printing menu transition.
Note "*": Once you have removed or replaced the Head, Damper, Ink Holder and/or
Ink tube, execute this mode and make certain that there is no dot missing.
If dot missing occurs, check the coupling screw tightening torque and tube
insertion and check for air leak.
Figure 5-60. Cleaning Menu Transition
Figure 5-61. Printing Menu Transition
Table 5-25. Cleaning Items
Item Display Contents
Normal cleaning cycle KK0 Cleaning: Std. KK0 Minimum vacuum
Normal cleaning cycle KK1 Cleaning: Std. KK1 Maximum vacuum
Normal cleaning cycle KK2 Cleaning: Std. KK2 Maximum vacuum
(With rubbing)
Initial charge Cleaning: Init. Fill Initial filling
CHECK
P O I N T
After replacing the Damper ASSY and/or ink tube, if ink charging
is to be performed without replacing the print head, execute “Initial
charge” in this menu.
Table 5-26. Printing Items
Item Display Contents
Test Pattern Print: Check Ptn. Test pattern printing
Adjustment Variable Print: Adj.Variable Adjustment variables printing
Test Pattern 2 Print: Check Ptn.2 Test pattern printing
Test Pattern 3 Print: Check Ptn.3 Test pattern printing
Leak Check * Print: Leak Check Ptn. Air leak check pattern printing
Cleaning :
? Std. KK0
[Enter]
End
Cleaning :
? Std. KK1
Cleaning :
? Std. KK2
Cleaning :
? Init.Fill
Cleaning
[Enter]
End
Cleaning
[Enter]
End
Cleaning
[Enter]
End
INK CHARGING
Print :
? Check Ptn. ?
[SelecType]
Printing end
Print :
? Adj.Variable ?
[Enter] Adjust Print
[SelecType]
[Paper Feed
∆
]
[Paper Feed
∇
]
Printing Pattern
Print :
? Check Ptn. 2 ?
[SelecType]
Printing end
[Enter] Adjust Print
[Paper Feed
∆
]
[Paper Feed
∇
]
Print :
? Check Ptn. 3 ?
[SelecType]
Printing end
[Enter] Adjust Print
[Paper Feed
∆
]
[Paper Feed
∇
][Enter]
[Enter]
[Enter]
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 260
5.2.6 Parameter
This item relates to update of adjustment parameters.
Table 5-27 lists parameter items and Figure 5-62 shows parameter menu transition.
Figure 5-62. Parameter Menu Transition
Table 5-27. Parameter Items
Item Contents
Initialize Initialize adjustment parameters
Update Input adjustment parameter values
Display Display adjustment parameter values
Parameter :
? Initialize ?
[SelecType]
Parameter :
? Update ?
Parameter :
? Display. ?
To parameter initialization
[SelecType] To parameter update
[SelecType] To parameter display
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 261
5.2.6.1 Parameter Initialize
Execute parameter initialization.
CHECK
P O I N T
Without replacing the relevant parts, never use this function to
initialize the counter; otherwise, control after that will not agree
with the condition of the printer mechanism.
Table 5-28.
Item Contents
All initialization
CR motor round trip count
PF motor travel
Head ink discharge count (Each color)
Cleaning count
The number of printed sheets
Ink volume counter
Waste ink counter
Cutting count
Gap adjustment value
CR origin compensation value (Capping position)
PF origin compensation value
Head slide origin compensation value
Front sensor position compensation value
Rear sensor position compensation value
Edge sensor longitudinal position compensation value
Edge sensor lateral position compensation value
Cutter longitudinal position compensation value
Flushing position
PF distance correction 1 ~ 3
Serial number
Wiping count
Rubbing count
Ink tube round trip count
Paper presser lever up and down count
Cover Open/Close count
Ink lever up and down count
Capping position initialization CR origin compensation value (Capping position)
PF resolution initialization PF distance correction1 ~ 3
Serial number initialization Serial number
Head record initialization Head ink discharge count (Each color))
Wiper record initialization Wiping count
Rubbing record initialization Rubbing count
Waste ink record initialization Waste ink counter
CR motor record initialization CR motor round trip count
PF motor record initialization PF motor travel
Lever record initialization Paper presser lever up and down count
Cover record initialization Cover Open/Close count
Ink lever record initialization Ink lever up and down count
Table 5-28.
Item Contents
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 262
Figure 5-63. Menu Transition for Parameter Initialization
Ini. :
? All
[Enter]
[Pause]
Initialize OK?
Ini. :
? Capping Position Init. Parameter
Parameter :
? Initialize ?
End
Ini. :
? PF Resolution
Ini. :
? Serial No.
Ini. :
? Head Record
Ini. :
? Wiping Record
Ini. :
? Rubbing Record
Ini. :
? WasteInk Record
Ini. :
? CR Motor Record
Ini. :
? PF Motor Record
Ini. :
? Lever Record
Ini. :
? Cover Record
Ini. :
? Ink Lever Rec.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Mechanism Adjustment 263
5.3 Mechanism Adjustment
5.3.1 Overview
This section describes the mechanism adjustments you need to perform when
mechanical parts have been replaced or removed. The relationship between parts and
required adjustments are as follows.
5.3.2 CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment
This adjustment is necessary for service operations that require you to remove/loosen
the CR Motor or CR Steel Belt. When replacing or re-installing the CR Steel Belt, you
need to confirm the tension of the CR Steel Belt. Tighten or loosen the screws on the
Driven Pulley to increase or decrease the tension.
No special tools are required.
NOTE: For details, refer to “CR Motor ASSY (p.180)”.
Figure 5-64. CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment
Table 5-29. Required Mechanism Adjustments
Item Description See
CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment At reinstallation of the CR Timing
Belt, adjust its tension as specified. p.263
PF Timing Belt Tension Adjustment At reinstallation of the PF Timing Belt,
adjust its tension as specified. p.264
P_THICK_0.3/P_THICK Sensor
Mounting Plate Position Adjustment
At reinstallation of the P_THICK
sensor or P_THICK_0.3 sensor, make
adjustment for paper thickness
detection.
p.265
Cover Sensor ASSY Mounting Position
Adjustment
Adjust the mounting position of the
Cover Sensor. p.267
CR Encoder Sensor Mounting Position
Adjustment
Adjust the CR Encoder mounting
position on the CR Unit, using the
dedicated tool.
p.268
Cutter Positioning Adjustment Adjust the cutter position, using the
dedicated tool. p.269
Paper Cutting Position Check Check the result of the adjustment
made above. p.271
Paper Cutting Position Check Adjust the PF Encoder position, using
the dedicated tool. p.272
Head Slant Adjustment (Mechanical
Adjustment)
Adjust the Print Head slant using the
self-diagnostic mode and by
mechanical adjustment.
p.247
CR Tension Screw
CR Timing Belt
CR Tension Bracket
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Mechanism Adjustment 264
5.3.3 PF Timing Belt Tension Adjustment
This adjustment is necessary for service operations that require you to remove/loosen
the PF Motor or PF Belt. When replacing or re-installing the PF Belt, you need to
confirm the tension of the PF Belt.
Adjusting tools: Tension Gauge #F770
Standard: 2,200g ± 10%
(Tension in the PF motor mounting plate moving direction.)
NOTE: For disassembly and assembly procedure, refer to “PF Motor (p.185)”.
Loosen the screws (x4) fixed to the PF motor mounting board and set the tension gauge
to the hole on the board and pull to the movable direction.
Figure 5-65. PF Belt Tension Adjustment
2.200g ± 10%
Fixed screws
Fixed screws
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Mechanism Adjustment 265
5.3.4 P_THICK_0.3/P_THICK Sensor Mounting Plate
Position Adjustment
Once you have changed the position of the Sensor Mounting Plate on which the
P_THICK_0.3/P_THICK Sensor is mounted, make the following adjustment using the
self-diagnostic function.
Adjusting tools: Thickness gauges (0.3, 0.4 / 0.8, 0.9mm)
NOTE: For disassembly and assembly procedure, refer to “P_THICK Sensor/
P_THICK Sensor_0.3 ASSY (p.190)”.
1. Remove the
H Top Cover. (p.165)
2. Start the Self-diagnostic Function:
Power OFF →
[Paper Feed
∆
]
+
[Paper Feed
∇
]+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON
3. Display “Test: Sensor”:
[SelecType >]
→
[Paper Feed
∇
] x2
4. Display “Sen: Paper”:
[SelecType >]
→
[Paper Feed
∇
] x2
5. Push down the Paper Set Lever rearward (to “release” position) and make certain that
the value on the LCD changes to “10”.
6. Set the 0.4-mm thickness gauge between the PF Grid Roller and the Driven Roller near
the detection arm on the paper transport path, and bring down the Paper Set Lever
toward you (to the “paper holding” position).
(See Figure 5-66)
At this point, if the value on the LCD is not “01”, loosen the screw securing the
mounting plate for the P_THICK_0.3 Sensor (left). Then slide the mounting plate to a
position where the LCD shows “01”, tighten the screw and remove the 0.4-mm
thickness gauge.
7. Set the 0.3-mm thickness gauge the same way as above and make certain that the value
on the LCD is “00”.
At this point, if the value on the LCD is not “00”, loosen the screw securing the
mounting plate for the P_THICK_0.3 Sensor (left). Then slide the mounting plate to a
position where the LCD shows “00”, tighten the screw and check the previous step
again.
Figure 5-66. Gauge Setting Position
Figure 5-67. P_THICK Sensor / P_THICK_0.3 Sensor Position Adjustment
Driven Roller
PF Grid Roller
HP side
From around the sensor, insert the thickness gauge and
set the Paper Set Lever in the paper holding position.
P_THICK_0.3 Sensor
Detect arm
P_THICK Sensor
P_THICK Sensor Mounting Plate
P_THICK_0.3 Sensor Mounting Plate
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Mechanism Adjustment 266
8. Set the 0.9-mm thickness gauge between the PF Grid Roller and the Driven Roller near
the detection arm on the paper transport path, and bring down the Paper Set Lever
toward you (to the “paper holding” position).
At this point, if the value on the LCD is not “11”, loosen the screw securing the
mounting plate for the P_THICK Sensor (right). Then slide the mounting plate to a
position where the LCD shows “11”, tighten the screw and remove the 0.9-mm
thickness gauge.
9. Set the 0.8-mm thickness gauge the same way as above and make certain that the value
on the LCD is “01”.
At this point, if the value on the LCD is not “01”, loosen the screw securing the
mounting plate for the P_THICK Sensor (right). Then slide the mounting plate to a
position where the LCD shows “01”, tighten the screw and check the previous step
again.
10. Turn the power switch Off, then after disconnecting the power cable, install the H Top
Cover.
Table 5-30.
Mounting Plate Gauge Condition LCD
Indication
P_THICK_0.3 Sensor Mounting
Plate (left) 0.3 mm Paper thickness
0.3 mm or below 00
0.4 mm Paper thickness
0.4 ∼ 0.6 mm 01
P_THICK Sensor Mounting Plate
(right)
0.8 mm
0.9 mm Paper thickness
0.7mm or above 11
–
Lever in “Up” position
(Paper released) 10
Lever in "Down" position
(Paper held) 00
C A U T I O N Take care not to bend thickness gauges by, say, dropping.
This adjustment requires an accuracy to units of 0.1 mm.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Mechanism Adjustment 267
5.3.5 Cover Sensor ASSY Mounting Position Adjustment
When removing/replacing the Cover Assembly or the Front Cover, verify the sensor
operation using the Self-Diagnostic mode as described below.
NOTE: For disassembly and assembly procedure, refer to “Cover Sensor ASSY”
(p.197).
1. Remove the Tube cover.
See
“Cover Sensor ASSY” (p.197)
.
2. Start the Self-diagnostic Function:
Power OFF →
[Paper Feed
∆
]
+
[Paper Feed
∇
]+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON
3. Display “Test: Sensor”:
[SelecType >]
→
[Paper Feed
∇
] x2
4. Display “Sen: Cover”:
[SelecType >]
→
[Paper Feed
∇
] x1
5. Open and close the Front Cover, checking the LCD to make sure the message changes
depending on the Front Cover position.
6. If the correct message does not appear or any other message appears, verify the Cover
Sensor is installed correctly and check the operation again.
Figure 5-68. Adjusting the Cover Sensor ASSY Mounting Position
Table 5-31. Cover Sensor Assembly Check
Front Cover LCD Message
Open Sen: Cover Open
Close Sen: Cover Close
CHECK
P O I N T
Acceptance Criterion:
The timing for cover opening is such that there is no gap between
the front cover and the printer body which permits entrance of your
finger.
Cover Sensor ASSY
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Mechanism Adjustment 268
5.3.6 CR Encoder Sensor Mounting Position Adjustment
This adjustment should definitely be done when the CR encoder sensor is removed or
replaced.
Adjusting tools: CR Encoder Sensor mounting jig #F799
NOTE: For disassembly and assembly procedure, refer to “CR Encoder Sensor
ASSY (p.178)”.
1. Remove the
H Top Cover. (p.165)
2. Remove the two screws securing the CR Board Unit in the Carriage Unit, and take out
the CR Board Unit toward the front.
(See Figure 5-69)
3. Move the Carriage Unit to the center by manual operation.
4. Loosen the screw securing the CR Encoder Sensor Board, and set the CR ENC Sensor
positioning jig between the CR Encoder Sensor and the CR Guide Rail.
(See Figure
5-70)
5. Push the CR Encoder Sensor to the exclusive tool side (CR Guide Rail side), then
tighten the CR Encoder Sensor mounting screw securely.
6. Move the Carriage Unit to the right or left manually and recheck the mounting position
of the CR Encoder Sensor. (Check at 3 positions)
Figure 5-69. Adjusting the CR Encoder Sensor Mounting Position 1/2
Figure 5-70. Adjusting the CR Encoder Sensor Mounting Position 2/2
CHECK
P O I N T
In this adjustment, use the CR Encoder mounting jig for exclusive
use with Stylus Pro 7600 / 9600: do not use the CR Encoder
mounting jig designed for any other printer models.
2 screws
CR Board Unit
CR Encoder Sensor
CR Encoder Scale
(Timing Fence)
CR Guide Rail
CR Encoder Sensor mounting jig
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Mechanism Adjustment 269
5.3.7 Cutter Positioning Adjustment
This adjustment should definitely be mad if the following parts are removed.
This adjustment is intended to install the cutter at a proper position and height relative
to the step for the cutter on the Paper Guide L. The number of adjustment items
required depends on the parts replaced. Carry out work by referring to the table above.
Adjusting tools: Cutter positioning jig #F800
NOTE: For disassembly and assembly procedure, refer to “Cutter Holder ASSY
(p.175)”.
1. Remove the
H Top Cover. (p.165)
NOTE:
For Stylus Pro 9600, remove also the
H Top Cover (p.165)
and the
Tube Cover
(p.193)
.
2. Open the Front Cover, and remove the cutter.
3. Return the CR Unit to the cap position and set the cutter positioning tool at the right
end of the Paper Guide L.
(See Figure 5-73)
4. Loosen the screws securing the Paper Guide L.
NOTE:
3 screws for Stylus Pro 7600 / 5 screws for Stylus Pro 9600
Figure 5-71. Cutter Positioning Adjustment
Figure 5-72. Removing the screw for Paper Guide L (at left end)
Parts Adjustment Items
Cutter Solenoid Assy 1. Paper Guide L up and down adjustment
2. Cutter Holder ASSY height adjustment
Paper Guide L 1. Paper Guide L up and down adjustment
CHECK
P O I N T
For adjustments at replacing the Cover Sensor ASSY, make the
Paper Guide L up and down adjustment first and then make the
Cutter Holder ASSY height adjustment.
CHECK
P O I N T
To loosen the screw at the left end of the Paper Guide L, pass the
screwdriver through the cut portion of the I/H Frame Top Plate.
(See Figure 5-72)
Paper Guide L up and down adjustment
Cutter Holder ASSY height adjustment
Cut portion of I/H Frame
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Mechanism Adjustment 270
5. Slide the CR Unit onto the cutter positioning jig, shift the Paper Guide L up or down to
a position where the plate of the Cutter Holder ASSY comes in contact with the
projection in the lower part of the jig, and tighten the screw.
For replacement of Cutter Solenoid ASSY:
After completion of the Paper Guide L up and down adjustment, loosen the
four screws securing the Cutter Holder ASSY to the CR Unit, press the front
end of the Cutter Holder ASSY gently against the tool and tighten the four
screws.
(See Figure 5-74)
6. Set the jig at the left end of the Paper Guide L and make the same adjustment and
checking as step 4 ~ 5 above.
7. Move the carriage to around the center and make checking again.
Figure 5-73. Paper Guide L up and down adjustment
Figure 5-74. Cutter Holder ASSY height adjustment
CHECK
P O I N T
In this adjustment, use the cutter positioning jig for exclusive
use with Stylus Pro 7600 / 9600: do not use the cutter
positioning jig designed for any other printer models.
The positions where to set the jig for checking and adjustment
should be the right and left ends as close to the frame as
possible.
At any position where the Paper Guide L is not supported, the
adjustment can not be made properly because of a deflection of
the Paper Guide L.
After successful completion of the adjustment above, proceed to
the next item “Paper Cutting Position Check” (p.271).
Cutter positioning jig
Projection
Plate of Cutter
Holder ASSY
Cutter positioning jig
Cutter Holder ASSY
Cutter Holder securing screws x4
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Mechanism Adjustment 271
5.3.7.1 Paper Cutting Position Check
Check the paper cutting position which has been adjusted as instructed in the previous
section, by cutting paper actually.
Cutter Positioning Adjustment
1. Set paper (minimum size: about 10 cm wide x 20 cm) in the paper path along the paper
setting position on the right side of the printer, then move the paper set lever to the
front to hold the paper.
2. Move the CR manually to the right edge of the paper, then lower the cutter manually.
3. While holding the bottom edge of the paper with one hand, cut the paper with the
cutter.
4. set a gauge with minimum measuring units of 0.5 mm at the edge of the cutter level
difference on the sub-platen and check if the distance from the edge of the cutter level
difference to the actual paper cutting position is within 0.5 mm (+0.1/–0.2mm).
5. If the measuring results are outside the standard, loosen the 3 screws holding the paper
guide L, then carry out fine adjustment of the paper guide L’s assembly position.
6. In the same way, set paper on the left side of the printer, cut the paper manually and
measure the length from the cutter level difference to the front edge of the paper. If the
measurement results are not within the standard, loosen about 3 of the screws holding
the paper guide L and carry out fine adjustment of the paper guide L’s assembly
position.
Figure 5-75. Paper Cutting Position Check
CHECK
P O I N T
The length from the edge of the cutter level difference to the
front edge of the paper where it was actually cut should be
within 0.5 mm (+0.1/–0.2mm).
If you are adjusting the assembly position of the paper guide L,
the installation screws that are loosened should be the absolute
minimum number of screws necessary to adjust the position. If
a large number of screws is loosened, the assembly position of
the paper guide L will shift a great distance from the original
adjustment position, so caution should be exercised.
Paper
Carriage
Cutter
Gap between the cut
paper front edge and
the edge of cutter level
0.3mm ∼ 0.5mm or
0.5mm (+0.1/-0.2mm)
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Mechanism Adjustment 272
5.3.8 PF Encoder Sensor Installation Position Adjustment
This adjustment is performed to set the distance between the PF roller shaft (grid roller)
and PF encoder sensor in the proper position. Through this adjustment, the position of
the PF encoder sensor's emitter and receptor are set properly with respect to the slits in
the loop scale for the PF motor.
Adjusting tools: PF ENC Installation Position Adjustment Tool #F798
1. Loosen the one screw securing the PF Encoder Sensor, then put the round hole of the
PF Encoder mounting jig on the PF Roller Shaft and fit the notched end against
contour of the PF Encoder Sensor's emitter (outside).
2. Move the PF Encoder Sensor up and down so that it is in a position where the
clearance between the contour of the PF Encoder Sensor and the notch in the PF
Encoder mounting jig becomes uniform, then tighten the one screw securing the PF
Encoder Sensor.
Figure 5-76. PF Encoder Sensor Installation Position Adjustment
CHECK
P O I N T
In this adjustment, use the PF Encoder mounting jig for exclusive
use with Stylus Pro 7600 / 9600: do not use the PF Encoder
mounting jig designed for any other printer models.
PF Encoder Sensor mounting jig
Screw
Check the clearance here
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Adjustment Mechanism Adjustment 273
5.3.9 USB ID Writing
CHECK
P O I N T
Even when you have replaced the Main Board, there is no need of
new setting of the USB ID, since the USB ID is backed up if
parameter backup can be executed.
When new setting is to be performed, use the dedicated service
utility.
CHAPTER
6
MAINTENANCE
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Maintenance Overview 275
6.1 Overview
This section explains necessary maintenance items and their details for this product.
Basically for this product, service technicians are required to visit the user’s location
where the EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 is used, and perform necessary maintenance/
service on-site while following the precautions below. Service technicians have to be
extra careful not to cause any accident to the product or the user’s environment.
W ARNING Since the power switch is mounted on the secondary circuit of
the power supply circuit, unless otherwise specified, always
turn off the printer using the power switch. After all moving
parts have stopped, wait several seconds and then disconnect
the power cable from the AC plug socket to prevent electric
shock or circuit damage during service operations.
The cover open sensor for detecting the open/close condition of
the front cover has an interlock switch that functions as a safety
device. Therefore, it is prohibited to turn off this switch.
A lithium battery is installed on the MAIN Board of this
printer. Be sure to observe the following instructions
when servicing the battery:
Keep the battery away from any metal.
Do not install the battery in the wrong direction. (This may cause
burning or explosion.)
Do not heat the battery or put it near fire.
Do not set the C472 MAIN board directly on top of any object
which is conductive.
Be careful not to let ink get into your eyes or your skin. If ink
gets in your eye, rinse them immediately with water.
C A U T I O N When performing service and maintenance operations,
sufficient space should be assured surrounding the place where
the work is performed.
The printer should be set in a place where there is no vibration,
and where it is level and stable.
This machine is extremely heavy, so adequate caution should
be exercised when handling it. (If you are taking or reinstalling
the body and stand, there should be 2 or more persons doing
the work.)
If operations are performed which involve the removal of ink
system parts, there is danger of the product or the floor, etc. in
the place where it is installed becoming soiled, so sheets, etc.
should be spread on the floor, etc. during the work o removing
parts related to the ink channels.
If you are handling electrical circuit boards, to prevent
destruction of the elements by static electricity, the elements on
the board should not be touched with bare hands. If necessary,
take the necessary measures to prevent static discharge, such as
wearing a ground strap, when performing such work.
If you are removing the various covers and operating the
printer in that state, adequate caution should be used so as not
to be injured by high speed operating parts such as the PS fan.
The cutter blade is extremely sharp, care should be taken not to
be injured by it.
The an ultra-hardened blade is used for the cutter blade, and
materially, this item is extremely brittle, so it should not be
bumped against any metal or other parts on the printer when
handled.
If the printer that has already been installed needs to be packed
and transported again, first make certain that the print head
has been capped properly with the power to the printer turned
off. Then remove all the ink cartridges and install all the
packing materials as referred to in the Start-Up Guide or
Assembly and Setup Guide supplied with the printer.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Maintenance Overview 276
6.1.1 Periodic Maintenance Items and Product Life
Information
Periodic Maintenance Items
The printer uses sensors and counters to determine when consumable items need to be
replaced. When a consumable part has reached its predetermined end-of-life according
to the corresponding counter, a message appears. See Table 6-1 for parts which require
periodic replacement.
Product Life Information
Table 6-1 shows the product life about the printer body, each mechanism and various
parts. Information regarding to the product life can be checked by the following way.
Panel Setting: “Printer Status Menu”
The amount of ink remaining is indicated on the LCD. (“F*****E” - F = full, E =
empty, and each asterisk * represents a percentage of the total ink.)
Also, the counters which record these values can be initialized by “Maintenance
Mode 2”.
C A U T I O N Do not perform the counter initialization without replacing the
corresponding parts and checking their operation. Since the
counters for “Waste Ink Life” and “Ink Remaining Quantity”
influence printer operations, do not clear them unnecessarily.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Maintenance Overview 277
Table 6-1. Stylus Pro 7600/9600 - Lives of Periodically Replaced Components and Maintenance
Print Volume
(# of sheet)
Product Life
(Specification)
Cutter Maintenance Tank Cleaning Unit CR Motor PF Motor Print Head
SPro7600/9600 SPro9600 SPro7600 SPro9600 SPro7600 SPro9600 SPro7600 SPro9600 SPro7600 SPro9600 SPro7600
1000 pages Film media*7
2000 pages Coated paper*7
5000 pages 5000p*1
10000 pages
8000p*1
11000p*2
18000p*2
20000 pages SPro9600 20000p
2.5Million passes*3
50000 pages SPro7600 50000p
3.25Million
passes*4*5 28 Billion shots/nozzle
Warning message –MAINTENANCE TANK
ALMOST FULL – – – –
Error message –MAINTENANCE TANK FULL *6 ––––
MAINTENANCE
REQ nnnn – –
0040 0002
–
0020
SERVICE REQ nnnnnnnn –– –
00000101
––
Reset operation
(Counter cleared automatically by replacing it with new
one) ♦Counter clear
MM2: CLEAR COUNTERS
CLEANER
♦Counter clear
MM2: CLEAR COUNTERS CR
MOTOR
♦Counter clear
MM2: CLEAR COUNTERS PF
MOTOR
♦Counter clear
MM2: CLEAR COUNTERS
HEAD
Parts to be replaced
Paper cutter
(CRU) Maintenance Tank
(CRU)
1. Pump&Cap Assy
2. Flushing Box
3. Wiper
At first SR: (& check Ink tubes/
FFC conditions)
1. CR Motor
2. Driven Pulley
At second SR:
1. CR Motor
2. Driven Pulley
3. Ink tubes
4. FFC
*(as required)
• Check the condition of loop scale
(worn, etc.)
• Check the condition of PF
Encoder (foreign matters or dust) *(as required)
Required adjustments (Not required) (Not required) (Not required)
1. CR Belt Tension ADJ
2. Adj: Bi-D
3. Adj: Uni-D
4. Adj: Sponge Pos.
1. PF Belt Tension ADJ
2. Adj: Feed Adj.+T&B 1. Adj: Input Rank
2. INK CHARGING
3. Adj: Head Slant
4. Adj: Feed Adj.+T&B
5. Adj: Sponge Pos.
6. Adj: Bi-D
7. Adj: Uni-D
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Maintenance Overview 278
Note : In the table above, the values by white characters with black background represent the
specified lives and the values by italic characters with bold frame represent standard
lives (can vary with the conditions under which the printer is actually used).
Note "*1": Continuous printing with “Plain paper / Speed” mode on B0 size paper.
"*2": Continuous printing with “Plain paper / Speed” mode on A1 size paper.
"*3": Print in 360x360/MF/Bi-D mode on B0 paper.
"*4": Print in 360x360/MF/Bi-D mode on A1 paper.
"*5": The life of PF motor is counted based on the paper feeding distance at printing
operation (23000 m).
"*6": Error condition and the printer is not ready to print until the error is cleared by
replacing the maintenance tank to new one.
"*7": EPSON standard media and the cutting operation is made in “3 steps cutting” mode.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Maintenance Overview 279
6.1.2 Important Maintenance Items During Service
Operations
Check the following items during printer maintenance/service and perform any
necessary operations.
Table 6-2. Items to be Checked During Maintenance/Service
Items Check Points Remedy
Lower Paper Guide and
the surface of the
Subplaten
Make sure no paper, dust, or
foreign objects are attached or
have accumulated.
Cleaning (If there is an ink
stain, wipe with dry, clean
cloth after cleaning the ink
stain with damp cloth.)
Timing Fence (Slit plate
for CR encoder
detection.)
Is there any accumulation or
adhesion of paper dust or
foreign matter?
Clean
If there is any damage,
replace the part.
Rail on the CR guide
frame
Make sure there are no foreign
objects attached.
Cleaning
P_REAR sensor and
P_FRONT sensor surface
Make sure no paper, dust, or
foreign objects are attached or
have accumulated.
Cleaning
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Maintenance Lubrication and Glue 280
6.2 Lubrication and Glue
In this printer, as necessary, the lubricants specified below should be used for oiling
and adhesion during disassembly and assembly operations.
6.2.1 Lubricating the CR Guide Rail
Lubricant: Super-Multi Oil #32 (Idemitsu)
Apply lubricant to the four points as shown below on the CR Guide Rail (carriage
roller running surface).
Figure 6-1. Lubricating Positions on the CR Guide Rail
Table 6-3. Grease and Glue Application
Type Name Amount Company Part # Location
Grease
Super-Multi Oil
#32 n/a Idemitsu n/a Carriage rail bearings
G-26
(Molicoat EM-
60L)
40g
(n/a)
EPSON
(Dow Corning
Asia)
B702600001 Other parts on mechanism
Glue Screw lock 1,000g EPSON B730200200 Screw lock (blue)
C A U T I O N Do not apply any other oils, lubricants, or glues than those
described in this manual; otherwise printer parts may be damaged
or their useful life may be shortened.
CHECK
P O I N T
Before applying lubricant, clean the surface.
CR Guide Rail
CHAPTER
7
APPENDIX
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Appendix Connectors 282
7.1 Connectors
Main Board (C472 MAIN)
Panel Unit
C472 CR Board
Table 7-1. Main Board Connectors List
CN.No. Pins Color Connected to Remarks
CN1 12 White P/S board Lock type
CN2 16 PANEL FFC, lock type
CN3 36 H-UDI36
CN4 5Yellow D/A_OUT (Not used)
CN5 90 ROM_DIMM
CN6 21 CSIC FFC
CN7 5 Red S_I/O(DEBUGER) (Not used)
CN8 24 CR_FFC1 FFC, lock type
CN9 24 CR_FFC3 FFC, lock type
CN10 24 CR_FFC2 FFC, lock type
CN11 36 IEEE1284 (parallel port)
CN12 4USB (Not used)
CN13 36 TYPE_B
CN14 3White CR_MOT Lock type, with relay connector
CN15 2 White PF_MOT Lock type, with relay connector
CN16 5White PF_ENC
CN17 4 White PUMP_MOT With relay connector
CN18 2Blue P/S_FAN
CN19 2 Black FAN1 With relay connector
CN20 2Yellow FAN2 With relay connector
CN21 2 Red FAN3 * Stylus Pro 9600 only
CN22 3Blue P_THICK0.3
CN23 3 Yellow COVER_L
CN24 3White CR_ORG
CN25 3 Black I/H_LEVER (Not used)
CN26 3Red P_THICK
CN27 4 Black P_REAR
CN28 4Yellow P_FRONT (Not used)
CN29 4 Red HD_SLID
CN30 15 ROLL_UNIT (option unit) * Stylus Pro 9600 only
CN31 2 White H_FAN
CN33 3White RESET
CN35 4 USB2.0 Right side (AC side)
CN36 8IEEE1394 (Not used)
CN37 2 HDD_PS (Not used)
Table 7-2. Panel Unit Connectors List
CN.No. Pins Color Connected to Remarks
CN1 16 Main Board (CN7) FCC, lock type
Table 7-3. C472 CR Board Connectors List
CN.No. Pins Color Connected to Remarks
CN1 24 Main Board (CN8) FFC, lock type
CN2 24 Main Board (CN10) FFC, lock type
CN3 17 Print Head1 FFC, lock type
CN4 30 Print Head2 FFC, lock type
CN5 4 Black P_Edge Sensor
CN6 5White CR Encoder Sensor
CN7 2 White Cutter Solenoid
CN8 4Black Main Board (CN10) FFC, lock type
Table 7-1. Main Board Connectors List (continued)
CN.No. Pins Color Connected to Remarks
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Appendix Connectors 283
C472 SUB-B Board
Power Supply Board
Table 7-4. C472 SUB-B Board Connectors List
CN.No. Pins Color Connected to Remarks
CN1 20 Main Board (CN6) FFC
CN2 2White I/H Lever Sensor
CN3 7 CSIC Relay Board (Black) FFC
CN4 7CSIC Relay Board (Light Black) FFC
CN5 7 CSIC Relay Board (Cyan) FFC
CN6 7CSIC Relay Board (Light Cyan) FFC
CN7 7 CSIC Relay Board (Magenta) FFC
CN8 7CSIC Relay Board (Light Magenta) FFC
CN9 7 CSIC Relay Board (Yellow) FFC
CN10 7Maintenance Tank Relay Board FFC
Table 7-5. Power Supply Board Connector List
CN.No. Pins Color Connected to Remarks
CN001 12 White Main Board (CN1) Lock type
CN301 2 White AC Inlet Lock type
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Appendix Connectors 284
Figure 7-1. Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Connectors
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Appendix Component Layout 285
7.2 Component Layout
Will be established by the next revision.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Appendix Circuit Diagrams 286
7.3 Circuit Diagrams
The circuit diagrams of the following circuit boards are shown on the following pages:
C472 MAIN BOARD
C472SUB BOARD
C472SUB-B BOARD
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Appendix Exploded Diagrams 292
7.4 Exploded Diagrams
131
129
128
112
111
110
127
108
109
109
107
126
114
118
125
117
119
130
116
115
113
106
124
124
105
104
103
103
123 102
101
121
122
120
100
Rev.01 C472-CASE-011
PX-7000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 7600 No.1
X
Rev.01 C472-CASE-021
PX-7000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 7600 No.2
160
159
x 6
x 6158
151
151
151
151
156
152
152
153
154
153
155
161
161
157
x 10
150
B
B
A
including
201,202 201
203
202
200
Rev.01 C472-ELEC-011
PX-7000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 7600 No.3
Q
J
D
X
K
W
B
B
L
C
O
U
N
A
T
Y
Y
300
301
Rev.01 C472-POWE-011
PX-7000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 7600 No.4
Q
J
D
X
K
W
B
B
L
C
O
U
N
A
T
Y
Y
Rev.01 C472-MECH-011
PX-7000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 7600 No.5
511
510
509
508
507
506
505
504
502 503
501
500
D
C
563
Rev.01 C472-MECH-021
PX-7000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 7600 No.6
560
561
562
564
566
565
568
569 568
569 568
569 568
569 568
569 568
569 568
569
570
570
570
570
570
570
570
567
559
556
558
557
555
553
552
551
554
550
556
I
H
G
F
E
x 5
x 34
606
604
602
600
601
603
612
609
611
610
613
606
614
615
616
617
618 619
620
607
606 608
605
Rev.01 C472-MECH-031
PX-7000 / EPSONSTYLUS PRO 7600 No.7
O
N
L
K
J
M
M
672
671
670
669
668
667
667 665
655
656
650
651
x 8
652
653 654
x 11
657
658
659660
661
661
664
663
662 666
Rev.01 C472-MECH-041
PX-7000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 7600 No.8
P
707
706
706
702
705
704
703
700
701
711
712
710
708
708
708
709
Rev.01 C472-MECH-051
PX-7000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 7600 No.9
Q
763
750
762 759
761 x 7
757
x 7
756
755
758
760
755
754
753
752
751
PX-7000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 7600 No.10 Rev.01 C472-MECH-061
U
R
R
T
P
S
S
807
808
802
801
800
803
805
806
804
810
812
811
809
813
Rev.01 C472-MECH-071
PX-7000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 7600 No.11
V
W
V
F
IE
HG
851
850
854
Rev.01 C472-MECH-081
PX-7000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 7600 No.12
853
853 855
851
856
108
120
Rev.01 C473-CASE-011
PX-9000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 9600 No.1
131
129
128
112
111
110
127
109
109
107
126
114
118
125
117
119
116
115
113
106
105
104 103
103
123 102
101
121
122
120
100
X
160
159
x 11
x 8
158
162
153
153
152
152
161
x 4
151
156
152
154
153
155
161
161
157
x 10150
Rev.01 C473-CASE-021
PX-9000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 9600 No.2
B
B
B
A
Rev.01 C473-ELEC-011
PX-9000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 9600 No.3
including
201,202 201
203
202
200
Q
J
D
X
K
W
B
B
LB
C
O
U
N
A
T
Y
Y
300
301
Rev.01 C473-POWE-011
PX-9000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 9600 No.4
Q
J
D
X
K
W
B
B
LB
C
O
U
N
A
T
Y
Y
511
511
510
509
508
507
506
505
504
502 503
501
500
Rev.01 C473-MECH-011
PX-9000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 9600 No.5
D
C
563
Rev.01 C473-MECH-021
PX-9000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 9600 No.6
560
561
562
564
566
565
568
569
568
569 568
569 568
569 568
569 568
569 568
569
570
570
570
570
570
570
570
567
559
556
558
557
555
553
552
551
554
550
556
I
H
G
F
E
Rev.01 C473-MECH-031
PX-9000 / EPSONSTYLUS PRO 9600 No.7
x 2
x 32
606
604
602
600
601
603
612
609
611
610
613
606
614
615 616
617
618 619
620
607
606 608
605
O
N
L
K
J
M
M
672
671
670
669
658
654
663
662
659 660
665 664
666
668
661
655
656
650
651
x 8
652
653
x 14
657
661
661
Rev.01 C473-MECH-041
PX-9000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 9600 No.8
P
707
706
706
702
705
704
703
700
701
711
712
710
708
708
708
709
Rev.01 C473-MECH-051
PX-9000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 9600 No.9
Q
807
808
802
801
800
803
805
806
804
810
812
811
809
813
Rev.01 C473-MECH-071
PX-9000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 9600 No.11
V
W
V
F
IE
HG
851
850
854
Rev.01 C473-MECH-081
PX-9000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 9600 No.12
853
853 855
851
856
SCREW SET
X 5
#
901 900
906
907
905
904
903
903
902
902
908
Rev.01 C473-MECH-091
PX-9000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 9600 No.13
909
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Appendix ASP List (Parts List) 317
7.5 ASP List (Parts List)
7.5.1 ASP List for Stylus Pro 7600
Table 7-6. ASP List for Stylus Pro 7600
Ref No. Part Name
100 L SIDE COVER ASSY.
101 I/H COVER ASSY.
102 I/H COVER ASSY.
103 PLASTIC STOPPER E5
104 FULONT COVER FUICRUM PIN L
105 FRONT COVER ASSY.
106 FRONT COVER SUPPLEMENT
107 ROLL TRAY L ASSY.
108 H TOP COVER ASSY.
109 CATCH
110 TOP COVER
111 DAMPER DISK(TOPCOVER)
112 UNDULATE WASHER(TOPCOVER)
113 PANEL UNIT ASSY.(OVERSEAS)
114 BRANK PANEL
115 LEVER BRIND CAP
116 PRSSURE LEVER KNOB
117 PANEL TAPE CABLE
118 ROLL TRAY R ASSY.
119 R SIDE COVER ASSY.
120 LABEL
121 LABEL
122 LABEL
123 LABEL
124 LABEL
125 LABEL
126 LABEL
127 LOGO PLATE 13X54
128 LABEL
129 LABEL
130 LABEL
131 LABEL
150 FCC CLIP
151 RUBBER FOOT
152 FAN DUCT
153 VACUUM FAN
154 VACUUM FAN 2 CABLE
155 VACUUM FAN 1 CABLE
156 CR LOCKER ASSY.
157 P REAR SENSOR ASSY.
158 FLAT CLAMP(FCR-30-V0)
159 RECYCL CLAMP(RLWS-1515TL-V0)
160 RECYCL CLAMP
161 SILENT DUCT
200 BOARD ASSY.
201 GROUNDING PLATE
202 GUIDE
203 GROUNDING PLATE
500 MOUNTING PLATE
501 SCALE
502 TAPE
503 ENCODER FLANG
504 X REDUCTION BELT
505 BOARD ASSY.
506 SLIT GUIDE
507 PF ENCODER CABLE
508 PF MOTOR
509 PF MOTER CABLE 1 ASSY.
510 EDGE SADDLE
511 PARTITION PLATE
Table 7-6. ASP List for Stylus Pro 7600 (continued)
Ref No. Part Name
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Appendix ASP List (Parts List) 318
550 CUTTER CAP
551 CUTTER SOLENOID SPRING
552 CUTTER SOLENOID ASSY.
553 CUTTER SPRING
554 P EDGE SENSOR ASSY.
555 EDGE SENSOR BASE ASSY.
556 FG CABLE
557 CR ENC ASSY.
558 CR LOCK KICKER
559 TILAP
560 H ADJUST LEVER B
561 H ADJUST LEVER
562 DAMPER STOPPER
563 DAMPER POSITION BOAD
564 PRINT HEAD
565 HEAD TAPE CABLE 1
566 HEAD TAPE CABLE 2
567 SLIDE GEAR
568 CONNECTING SCREW
569 O RING
570 DAMPER ASSY.
600 CR MOTOR
601 CR MOTOR CABLE ASSY.1
602 T FENCE SPRING
603 PRSSURE SPRING
604 T FENCE
605 P THICK SENSOR CABLE ASSY
606 PHOTO SENSOR
607 P THICK2 SENNSOR CABLE ASSY.
608 CR BELT
609 MINI CLAMP
610 CR DRIVE PULLEY ASSY.
Table 7-6. ASP List for Stylus Pro 7600 (continued)
Ref No. Part Name
611 TENSION SPRING
612 PRESS LEVER SPRING
613 HD SLIDE ASSY.
614 CR HP CABLE ASSY.
615 CABLE CLAMP
616 EDGE CLAMP
617 PRESS IDLE GEAR
618 PRESS SHAFT TRAY
619 PRESS TRANSMISSION GEAR
620 PRESS LEVER
650 OUTLET ROLLER ASSY.
651 PAPER GUIDE L2
652 SUB PRATEN B
653 SUB PRATEN A
654 PARTITION PLATE P GUIDE L
655 PAETITION PLATE L
656 POROUS PAD CAP B
657 PROUSPAD C
658 PAETITION PLATE R ASSY.
659 TAPE
660 POROUS PAD
661 PAPER GUIDE WIRE
662 POROUS PAD
663 TAPE
664 PCB ASSY.I/C
665 MT FFC1
666 POROUS PAD ASSY.
667 SCREW MANUAL CUTTER
668 LABEL
669 LABEL
670 LABEL
671 LABEL
Table 7-6. ASP List for Stylus Pro 7600 (continued)
Ref No. Part Name
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Appendix ASP List (Parts List) 319
672 LABEL
700 FLUSHING BOX ASSY.
701 PUMP MOTER JANCTION CABLE
702 TR CONNECTER
703 POROUS PAD
704 CLEANER
705 PUMP REDUCTION GEAR 1
706 POMP SHAFT STOPPER
707 PUMP REDUCTION GEAR 2
708 PG IDLE GEAR A
709 PG IDLE GEAR B
710 PUMP CAP ASSY.
711 MOTOR
712 CAP ASSY.
750 I/H INK FFC ASSY.
751 BOARD ASSY.
752 CSIC FFC 1
753 CLAMP
754 COVER SW CABLE ASSY.1
755 DETECTOR
756 CONNECTING SCREW
757 O RING
758 I/H LEVER SW CABLE ASSY.1
759 I/C LOCK LEVER KNOB
760 HOLDER ASSY.
761 FRAME ASSY.
762 FAN GEAR
763 LEVER
800 TUBE
801 TUBE
802 TUBE
803 TUBE
Table 7-6. ASP List for Stylus Pro 7600 (continued)
Ref No. Part Name
804 TUBE
805 TUBE
806 TUBE
807 TUBE FILME
808 SUS SUPPORT
809 FILME
810 FLAT CORE(SSC-40-12)
811 FILME
812 CR FFC 1 ASSY.
813 BOARD ASSY.
850 FLANGE
851 ADAPTER
852 ROLL SHAFT
853 RETAINING RING(B150300611)
854 STOPPER SHAFT
855 FLANGE
856 LABEL
300 P/S BOARD ASSY.
301 DC CABLE ASSY
Table 7-6. ASP List for Stylus Pro 7600 (continued)
Ref No. Part Name
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Appendix ASP List (Parts List) 320
7.5.2 ASP List for Stylus Pro 9600
Table 7-7. ASP List for Stylus Pro 9600
Ref No. Part Name
100 L SIDE COVER ASSY.
101 I/H COVER ASSY.
102 I/H COVER ASSY.
103 PLASTIC STOPPER E5
104 FULONT COVER FUICRUM PIN L
105 FRONT COVER ASSY.
106 FRONT COVER SUPPLEMENT
107 ROLL TRAY L ASSY.
108 H TOP COVER ASSY.
109 CATCH
110 TOP COVER
111 DAMPER DISK(TOPCOVER)
112 UNDULATE WASHER(TOPCOVER)
113 PANEL UNIT ASSY.(OVERSEAS)
114 BRANK PANEL
115 LEVER BRIND CAP
116 PRSSURE LEVER KNOB
117 PANEL TAPE CABLE
118 ROLL TRAY R ASSY.
119 R SIDE COVER ASSY.
120 LABEL
121 LABEL
122 LABEL
123 LABEL
125 LABEL
126 LABEL
127 LOGO PLATE 13X54
128 LABEL
129 LABEL
131 LABEL
150 FCC CLIP
151 HANDLE
152 FAN DUCT
153 VACUUM FAN
154 VACUUM FAN1 CABLE ASSY.2
155 VACUUM FAN2 CABLE ASSY.2
156 CR LOCKER ASSY.
157 P REAR SENSOR ASSY.
158 FLAT CLAMP(FCR-30-V0)
159 RECYCL CLAMP(RLWS-1515TL-V0)
160 RECYCL CLAMP
161 SILENT DUCT
162 VACUUM FAN3 CABLE ASSY.2
200 BOARD ASSY.
201 GROUNDING PLATE
202 GUIDE
203 GROUNDING PLATE
500 MOUNTING PLATE
501 SCALE
502 TAPE
503 ENCODER FLANG
504 X REDUCTION BELT
505 BOARD ASSY.
506 SLIT GUIDE
507 PF ENCODER CABLE ASSY.2
508 PF MOTOR
509 PF MOTOR CABLE ASSY.2
510 EDGE SADDLE
511 PARTITION PLATE
550 CUTTER CAP
551 CUTTER SOLENOID SPRING
552 CUTTER SOLENOID ASSY.
553 CUTTER SPRING
Table 7-7. ASP List for Stylus Pro 9600 (continued)
Ref No. Part Name
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Appendix ASP List (Parts List) 321
554 P EDGE SENSOR ASSY.
555 EDGE SENSOR BASE ASSY.
556 FG CABLE
557 CR ENC ASSY.
558 CR LOCK KICKER
559 TILAP
560 H ADJUST LEVER B
561 H ADJUST LEVER
562 DAMPER STOPPER
563 DAMPER POSITION BOAD
564 PRINT HEAD
565 HEAD TAPE CABLE 1
566 HEAD TAPE CABLE 2
567 SLIDE GEAR
568 CONNECTING SCREW
569 O RING
570 DAMPER ASSY.
600 CR MOTOR
601 CR MOTER CABLE ASSY.2
602 T FENCE SPRING
603 PRSSURE SPRING
604 SCALE
605 P THICK SENSOR CABLE ASSY
606 PHOTO SENSOR
607 P THICK2 SENNSOR CABLE ASSY.
608 CR FFC 1 ASSY.
609 MINI CLAMP
610 CR DRIVE PULLEY ASSY.
611 TENSION SPRING
612 PRESS LEVER SPRING
613 HD SLIDE ASSY.
614 CR HP CABLE ASSY.
Table 7-7. ASP List for Stylus Pro 9600 (continued)
Ref No. Part Name
615 CABLE CLAMP
616 EDGE CLAMP
617 PRESS IDLE GEAR
618 PRESS SHAFT TRAY
619 PRESS TRANSMISSION GEAR
620 PRESS LEVER
650 OUTLET ROLLER ASSY.
651 PAPER GUIDE L2
652 SUB PRATEN B
653 SUB PRATEN A
654 PARTITION PLATE
655 PARTITION PLATE L
656 POROUS PAD CAP B
657 PROUSPAD C
658 PAETITION PLATE R ASSY.
659 TAPE
660 POROUS PAD
661 PAPER GUIDE WIRE
662 POROUS PAD
663 TAPE
664 PCB ASSY.I/C
665 M.T FFC2
666 POROUS PAD ASSY.
668 LABEL
669 LABEL
670 LABEL
671 LABEL
672 LABEL
700 FLUSHING BOX ASSY.
701 PUMP MOTER JANCTION CABLE
702 TR CONNECTER
703 POROUS PAD
Table 7-7. ASP List for Stylus Pro 9600 (continued)
Ref No. Part Name
EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A
Appendix ASP List (Parts List) 322
704 CLEANER
705 PUMP REDUCTION GEAR 1
706 POMP SHAFT STOPPER
707 PUMP REDUCTION GEAR 2
708 PG IDLE GEAR A
709 PG IDLE GEAR B
710 PUMP CAP ASSY.
711 MOTOR
712 CAP ASSY.
750 I/H INK FFC ASSY.
751 BOARD ASSY.
752 CSIC FFC 2
753 CLAMP
754 COVER SW CABLE ASSY.2
755 DETECTOR
756 CONNECTING SCREW
757 O RING
758 I/H LEVER SW CABLE ASSY.1
759 I/C LOCK LEVER KNOB
760 HOLDER ASSY.
761 FRAME ASSY.
762 FAN GEAR
763 LEVER
800 TUBE
801 TUBE
802 TUBE
803 TUBE
804 TUBE
805 TUBE
806 TUBE
807 TUBE FILME
808 SUS SUPPORT
Table 7-7. ASP List for Stylus Pro 9600 (continued)
Ref No. Part Name
809 FILME
810 FLAT CORE(SSC-40-12)
811 FILME
812 CR FFC 1 ASSY.
813 BOARD ASSY.
850 FLANGE
851 ADAPTER
853 RETAINING RING(B150300611)
854 STOPPER SHAFT
855 FLANGE
856 LABEL
900 PACKING BOX ASSY.(W)
901 STAND L ASSY.
902 CASTER (NON STOPPER)
903 CASTER (STOPPER)
904 TRAY HOOK S ASSY.
905 TRAY HOOK L ASSY.
906 OUTLET TRAY
907 STAND STAY
908 STAND R ASSY.
909 SCREW ASSY.
300 P/S BOARD ASSY.
301 DC CABLE ASSY
Table 7-7. ASP List for Stylus Pro 9600 (continued)
Ref No. Part Name

Navigation menu